diff options
| author | bubulle <bubulle@alioth.debian.org> | 2010-02-24 21:30:19 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | bubulle <bubulle@alioth.debian.org> | 2010-02-24 21:30:19 +0000 |
| commit | d68d99de92a7bf5a72e8665b88b3d66d419cb05f (patch) | |
| tree | c09c5183761ef09c09dcbfc233582c9f21c280cf /docs/htmldocs/manpages | |
| parent | 0ff834b998a6131cfd66738c069012cc1ab09e1c (diff) | |
| download | samba-d68d99de92a7bf5a72e8665b88b3d66d419cb05f.tar.gz | |
Load samba-3.4.6 into branches/samba/upstream.upstream/3.4.6_dfsg
git-svn-id: svn://svn.debian.org/svn/pkg-samba/branches/samba/upstream@3321 fc4039ab-9d04-0410-8cac-899223bdd6b0
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/htmldocs/manpages')
84 files changed, 1601 insertions, 1585 deletions
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/cifs.upcall.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/cifs.upcall.8.html index 82635c7e14..a75e66291c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/cifs.upcall.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/cifs.upcall.8.html @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>cifs.upcall</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="cifs.upcall"><a name="cifs.upcall.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>cifs.upcall — Userspace upcall helper for Common Internet File System (CIFS)</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">cifs.upcall</code> [--trust-dns|-t] [--version|-v] {keyid}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528928"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>cifs.upcall is a userspace helper program for the linux CIFS client +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>cifs.upcall</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="cifs.upcall.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>cifs.upcall — Userspace upcall helper for Common Internet File System (CIFS)</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">cifs.upcall</code> [--trust-dns|-t] [--version|-v] {keyid}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522940"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>cifs.upcall is a userspace helper program for the linux CIFS client filesystem. There are a number of activities that the kernel cannot easily do itself. This program is a callout program that does these things for the kernel and then returns the result.</p><p>cifs.upcall is generally intended to be run when the kernel calls request-key(8) for a particular key type. While it can be run directly from the command-line, it's not generally intended -to be run that way.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489322"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-c</span></dt><dd><p>This option is deprecated and is currently ignored. +to be run that way.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483345"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-c</span></dt><dd><p>This option is deprecated and is currently ignored. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">--trust-dns|-t</span></dt><dd><p>With krb5 upcalls, the name used as the host portion of the service principal defaults to the hostname portion of the UNC. This option allows the upcall program to reverse resolve the network address of the server in order to get the hostname.</p><p>This is less secure than not trusting DNS. When using this option, it's possible that an attacker could get control of DNS and trick the client into mounting a different server altogether. It's preferable to instead add server principals to the KDC for every possible hostname, but this option exists for cases where that isn't possible. The default is to not trust reverse hostname lookups in this fashion. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">--version|-v</span></dt><dd><p>Print version number and exit. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="CONFIGURATION FOR KEYCTL"><a name="id2489513"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION FOR KEYCTL</h2><p>cifs.upcall is designed to be called from the kernel via the + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483529"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION FOR KEYCTL</h2><p>cifs.upcall is designed to be called from the kernel via the request-key callout program. This requires that request-key be told where and how to call this program. The current cifs.upcall program handles two different key types: @@ -20,10 +20,10 @@ create cifs.spnego * * /usr/local/sbin/cifs.upcall %k create dns_resolver * * /usr/local/sbin/cifs.upcall %k </pre><p> See <a class="citerefentry" href="request-key.conf5..html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">request-key.conf(5)</span></span></a> for more info on each field. -</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489584"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483600"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> <a class="citerefentry" href="request-key.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">request-key.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="mount.cifs.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">mount.cifs</span>(8)</span></a> - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489610"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>Igor Mammedov wrote the cifs.upcall program.</p><p>Jeff Layton authored this manpage.</p><p>The maintainer of the Linux CIFS VFS is Steve French.</p><p>The <a class="ulink" href="mailto:linux-cifs-client@lists.samba.org" target="_top">Linux + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483626"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>Igor Mammedov wrote the cifs.upcall program.</p><p>Jeff Layton authored this manpage.</p><p>The maintainer of the Linux CIFS VFS is Steve French.</p><p>The <a class="ulink" href="mailto:linux-cifs-client@lists.samba.org" target="_top">Linux CIFS Mailing list</a> is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs. </p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/eventlogadm.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/eventlogadm.8.html index 1a05d75562..70f29c3966 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/eventlogadm.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/eventlogadm.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>eventlogadm</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="eventlogadm"><a name="eventlogadm.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>eventlogadm — push records into the Samba event log store</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">eventlogadm</code> [<code class="option">-d</code>] [<code class="option">-h</code>] <code class="option">-o</code> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>eventlogadm</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="eventlogadm.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>eventlogadm — push records into the Samba event log store</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">eventlogadm</code> [<code class="option">-d</code>] [<code class="option">-h</code>] <code class="option">-o</code> <code class="literal">addsource</code> <em class="replaceable"><code>EVENTLOG</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>SOURCENAME</code></em> @@ -10,10 +10,10 @@ <code class="literal">dump</code> <em class="replaceable"><code>EVENTLOG</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>RECORD_NUMBER</code></em> - </p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489536"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(1)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">eventlogadm</code> is a filter that accepts + </p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483552"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(1)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">eventlogadm</code> is a filter that accepts formatted event log records on standard input and writes them to the Samba event log store. Windows client can then manipulate - these record using the usual administration tools.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489566"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="option">-d</code></span></dt><dd><p> + these record using the usual administration tools.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483582"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="option">-d</code></span></dt><dd><p> The <code class="literal">-d</code> option causes <code class="literal">eventlogadm</code> to emit debugging information. </p></dd><dt><span class="term"> @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ event log store named by EVENTLOG. </p></dd><dt><span class="term"> <code class="option">-o</code> - <code class="literal">write</code> + <code class="literal">dump</code> <em class="replaceable"><code>EVENTLOG</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>RECORD_NUMBER</code></em> </span></dt><dd><p> @@ -44,56 +44,56 @@ output on screen. </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><code class="option">-h</code></span></dt><dd><p> Print usage information. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EVENTLOG RECORD FORMAT"><a name="id2489716"></a><h2>EVENTLOG RECORD FORMAT</h2><p>For the write operation, <code class="literal">eventlogadm</code> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483733"></a><h2>EVENTLOG RECORD FORMAT</h2><p>For the write operation, <code class="literal">eventlogadm</code> expects to be able to read structured records from standard input. These records are a sequence of lines, with the record key and data separated by a colon character. Records are separated - by at least one or more blank line.</p><p>The event log record field are:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p> + by at least one or more blank line.</p><p>The event log record field are:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p> <code class="literal">LEN</code> - This field should be 0, since <code class="literal">eventlogadm</code> will calculate this value. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">RS1</code> - This must be the value 1699505740. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">RCN</code> - This field should be 0. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">TMG</code> - The time the eventlog record was generated; format is the number of seconds since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970, UTC. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">TMW</code> - The time the eventlog record was written; format is the number of seconds since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970, UTC. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">EID</code> - The eventlog ID. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">ETP</code> - The event type -- one of "INFO", "ERROR", "WARNING", "AUDIT SUCCESS" or "AUDIT FAILURE". - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">ECT</code> - The event category; this depends on the message file. It is primarily used as a means of filtering in the eventlog viewer. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">RS2</code> - This field should be 0. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">CRN</code> - This field should be 0. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">USL</code> - This field should be 0. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">SRC</code> - This field contains the source name associated with the event log. If a message file is used with an event log, there will be a registry entry for associating this source name with a message file DLL. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">SRN</code> - The name of the machine on which the eventlog was generated. This is typically the host name. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">STR</code> - The text associated with the eventlog. There may be more than one string in a record. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">DAT</code> - This field should be left unset. - </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2487578"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>An example of the record format accepted by <code class="literal">eventlogadm</code>:</p><pre class="programlisting"> + </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481600"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>An example of the record format accepted by <code class="literal">eventlogadm</code>:</p><pre class="programlisting"> LEN: 0 RS1: 1699505740 RCN: 0 @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ tail -f /var/log/messages | \\ my_program_to_parse_into_eventlog_records | \\ eventlogadm SystemLogEvents - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487628"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487639"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481650"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481661"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/findsmb.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/findsmb.1.html index ac51100671..94fad87f8f 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/findsmb.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/findsmb.1.html @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>findsmb</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="findsmb"><a name="findsmb.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>findsmb — list info about machines that respond to SMB - name queries on a subnet</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">findsmb</code> [subnet broadcast address]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528904"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This perl script is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>findsmb</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="findsmb.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>findsmb — list info about machines that respond to SMB + name queries on a subnet</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">findsmb</code> [subnet broadcast address]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522923"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This perl script is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">findsmb</code> is a perl script that prints out several pieces of information about machines on a subnet that respond to SMB name query requests. It uses <a class="citerefentry" href="nmblookup.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmblookup</span>(1)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a> to obtain this information. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489314"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-r</span></dt><dd><p>Controls whether <code class="literal">findsmb</code> takes + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483331"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-r</span></dt><dd><p>Controls whether <code class="literal">findsmb</code> takes bugs in Windows95 into account when trying to find a Netbios name registered of the remote machine. This option is disabled by default because it is specific to Windows 95 and Windows 95 machines only. @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ <a class="citerefentry" href="findsmb.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">findsmb</span>(1)</span></a> is run. This value is passed to <a class="citerefentry" href="nmblookup.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmblookup</span>(1)</span></a> - as part of the <code class="constant">-B</code> option.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489514"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>The output of <code class="literal">findsmb</code> lists the following + as part of the <code class="constant">-B</code> option.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483530"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>The output of <code class="literal">findsmb</code> lists the following information for all machines that respond to the initial <code class="literal">nmblookup</code> for any name: IP address, NetBIOS name, Workgroup name, operating system, and SMB server version.</p><p>There will be a '+' in front of the workgroup name for @@ -48,10 +48,10 @@ IP ADDR NETBIOS NAME WORKGROUP/OS/VERSION 192.168.35.88 SCNT2 +[MVENGR] [Windows NT 4.0] [NT LAN Manager 4.0] 192.168.35.93 FROGSTAR-PC [MVENGR] [Windows 5.0] [Windows 2000 LAN Manager] 192.168.35.97 HERBNT1 *[HERB-NT] [Windows NT 4.0] [NT LAN Manager 4.0] -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489615"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489626"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483632"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483643"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, and <a class="citerefentry" href="nmblookup.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmblookup</span>(1)</span></a> - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489660"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483677"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ad.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ad.8.html index 7d28987279..d1f831d002 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ad.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ad.8.html @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_ad</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="idmap_ad"><a name="idmap_ad.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_ad — Samba's idmap_ad Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="DESCRIPTION"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_ad plugin provides a way for Winbind to read +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_ad</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="idmap_ad.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_ad — Samba's idmap_ad Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_ad plugin provides a way for Winbind to read id mappings from an AD server that uses RFC2307/SFU schema extensions. This module implements only the "idmap" API, and is READONLY. Mappings must be provided in advance by the administrator by adding the posixAccount/posixGroup classes and relative attribute/value pairs to the user and - group objects in the AD.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="IDMAP OPTIONS"><a name="id2528899"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> + group objects in the AD.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522918"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> Defines the available matching UID and GID range for which the backend is authoritative. Note that the range acts as a filter. If specified any UID or GID stored in AD that fall outside the @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Active Directory regarding user and group information. This can be either the RFC2307 schema support included in Windows 2003 R2 or the Service for Unix (SFU) schema. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489310"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483327"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> The following example shows how to retrieve idmappings from our principal and and trusted AD domains. If trusted domains are present id conflicts must be resolved beforehand, there is no @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ idmap config CORP : backend = ad idmap config CORP : range = 1000-999999 - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489334"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483351"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_adex.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_adex.8.html index 306fbcddd5..0d56a8c9d2 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_adex.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_adex.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_adex</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="idmap_adex"><a name="idmap_adex.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_adex — Samba's idmap_adex Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="DESCRIPTION"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_adex</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="idmap_adex.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_adex — Samba's idmap_adex Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> The idmap_adex plugin provides a way for Winbind to read id mappings from an AD server that uses RFC2307 schema extensions. This module implements both the idmap and nss_info @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ attributes to the partial attribute set of the forest global catalog servers. This can be done using the Active Directory Schema Management MMC plugin (schmmgmt.dll). - </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="NSS_INFO"><h2>NSS_INFO</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>NSS_INFO</h2><p> The nss_info plugin supports reading the unixHomeDirectory, gidNumber, loginShell, and uidNumber attributes from the user object and the gidNumber attribute from the group object to @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Username aliases are implement by setting the uid attribute on the user object. While group name aliases are implemented by reading the displayname attribute from the group object. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2528941"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522952"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> The following example shows how to retrieve idmappings and NSS data from our principal and trusted AD domains. </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ winbind nss info = adex winbind normalize names = yes - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489320"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483341"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_hash.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_hash.8.html index 6ca77f9ec4..4aa8f71525 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_hash.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_hash.8.html @@ -1,16 +1,16 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_hash</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="idmap_hash"><a name="idmap_hash.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_hash — Samba's idmap_hash Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="DESCRIPTION"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_hash plugin implements a hashing algorithm used to map +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_hash</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="idmap_hash.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_hash — Samba's idmap_hash Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_hash plugin implements a hashing algorithm used to map SIDs for domain users and groups to 31-bit uids and gids, respectively. This plugin also implements the nss_info API and can be used to support a local name mapping files if enabled via the "winbind normalize names" and "winbind nss info" parameters in smb.conf. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="IDMAP OPTIONS"><a name="id2528907"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">name_map</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522917"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">name_map</span></dt><dd><p> Specifies the absolute path to the name mapping file used by the nss_info API. Entries in the file are of the form "<em class="replaceable"><code>unix name</code></em> = <em class="replaceable"><code>qualified domain name</code></em>". Mapping of both user and group names is supported. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2528938"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>The following example utilizes the idmap_hash plugin for + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522949"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>The following example utilizes the idmap_hash plugin for the idmap and nss_info information. </p><pre class="programlisting"> [global] @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ winbind nss info = hash winbind normalize names = yes idmap_hash:name_map = /etc/samba/name_map.cfg - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489318"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483339"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ldap.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ldap.8.html index fc8df0a170..f5e6e59cb2 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ldap.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_ldap.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_ldap</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="idmap_ldap"><a name="idmap_ldap.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_ldap — Samba's idmap_ldap Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="DESCRIPTION"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_ldap plugin provides a means for Winbind to +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_ldap</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="idmap_ldap.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_ldap — Samba's idmap_ldap Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_ldap plugin provides a means for Winbind to store and retrieve SID/uid/gid mapping tables in an LDAP directory service. </p><p> @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ any explicitly configured domain with idmap backend ldap should have the same range as the default range, since it needs to use the global uid / gid allocator. See the example below. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="IDMAP OPTIONS"><a name="id2528933"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">ldap_base_dn = DN</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522944"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">ldap_base_dn = DN</span></dt><dd><p> Defines the directory base suffix to use when searching for SID/uid/gid mapping entries. If not defined, idmap_ldap will default to using the "ldap idmap suffix" option from smb.conf. @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ If the parameter is absent, Winbind fails over to use the "idmap uid" and "idmap gid" options from smb.conf. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="IDMAP ALLOC OPTIONS"><a name="id2489360"></a><h2>IDMAP ALLOC OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">ldap_base_dn = DN</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483381"></a><h2>IDMAP ALLOC OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">ldap_base_dn = DN</span></dt><dd><p> Defines the directory base suffix under which new SID/uid/gid mapping entries should be stored. If not defined, idmap_ldap will default to using the "ldap idmap suffix" option from smb.conf. @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Specifies the LDAP server to which modify/add/delete requests should be sent. If not defined, idmap_ldap will assume that ldap://localhost/ should be used. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489544"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483559"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> The follow sets of a LDAP configuration which uses two LDAP directories, one for storing the ID mappings and one for retrieving new IDs. @@ -60,12 +60,12 @@ idmap alloc backend = ldap idmap alloc config : ldap_url = ldap://id-master/ idmap alloc config : ldap_base_dn = ou=idmap,dc=example,dc=com - </pre></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="NOTE"><h2>NOTE</h2><p>In order to use authentication against ldap servers you may + </pre></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>NOTE</h2><p>In order to use authentication against ldap servers you may need to provide a DN and a password. To avoid exposing the password in plain text in the configuration file we store it into a security store. The "net idmap " command is used to store a secret for the DN specified in a specific idmap domain. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489581"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483596"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_nss.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_nss.8.html index 792c9aee0c..9c7cd0f6f4 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_nss.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_nss.8.html @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_nss</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="idmap_nss"><a name="idmap_nss.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_nss — Samba's idmap_nss Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="DESCRIPTION"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_nss plugin provides a means to map Unix users and groups +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_nss</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="idmap_nss.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_nss — Samba's idmap_nss Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_nss plugin provides a means to map Unix users and groups to Windows accounts and obseletes the "winbind trusted domains only" smb.conf option. This provides a simple means of ensuring that the SID for a Unix user named jsmith is reported as the one assigned to DOMAIN\jsmith which is necessary for reporting ACLs on files and printers stored on a Samba member server. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2528900"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522918"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> This example shows how to use idmap_nss to check the local accounts for its own domain while using allocation to create new mappings for trusted domains </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ idmap config SAMBA : backend = nss idmap config SAMBA : range = 1000-999999 - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2528920"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522939"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_rid.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_rid.8.html index 81102bb3cb..7a31560135 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_rid.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_rid.8.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_rid</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="idmap_rid"><a name="idmap_rid.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_rid — Samba's idmap_rid Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="DESCRIPTION"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_rid backend provides a way to use an algorithmic +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_rid</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="idmap_rid.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_rid — Samba's idmap_rid Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The idmap_rid backend provides a way to use an algorithmic mapping scheme to map UIDs/GIDs and SIDs. No database is required - in this case as the mapping is deterministic.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="IDMAP OPTIONS"><a name="id2528896"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> + in this case as the mapping is deterministic.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> Defines the available matching uid and gid range for which the backend is authoritative. Note that the range acts as a filter. If algorithmically determined UID or GID fall outside the @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ RIDs by default start at 1000 (512 hexadecimal). </p><p> Use of this parameter is deprecated. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="THE MAPPING FORMULAS"><a name="id2489314"></a><h2>THE MAPPING FORMULAS</h2><p> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483331"></a><h2>THE MAPPING FORMULAS</h2><p> The Unix ID for a RID is calculated this way: </p><pre class="programlisting"> ID = RID - BASE_RID + LOW_RANGE_ID. @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ </p><pre class="programlisting"> RID = ID + BASE_RID - LOW_RANGE_ID. </pre><p> - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489341"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483357"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> This example shows how to configure two domains with idmap_rid, the principal domain and a trusted domain, leaving the default id mapping scheme at tdb. The example also demonstrates the use @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ idmap config TRUSTED : backend = rid idmap config TRUSTED : range = 50000 - 99999 idmap config TRUSTED : base_rid = 1000 - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489366"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483383"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb.8.html index 1156b7b04c..0d1dfbcfb8 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_tdb</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="idmap_tdb"><a name="idmap_tdb.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_tdb — Samba's idmap_tdb Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="DESCRIPTION"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_tdb</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="idmap_tdb.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_tdb — Samba's idmap_tdb Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> The idmap_tdb plugin is the default backend used by winbindd for storing SID/uid/gid mapping tables. </p><p> @@ -19,13 +19,13 @@ any explicitly configured domain with idmap backend tdb should have the same range as the default range, since it needs to use the global uid / gid allocator. See the example below. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="IDMAP OPTIONS"><a name="id2528925"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522944"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> Defines the available matching uid and gid range for which the backend is authoritative. If the parameter is absent, Winbind fails over to use the "idmap uid" and "idmap gid" options from smb.conf. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489318"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483335"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> This example shows how tdb is used as a the default idmap backend. It configures the idmap range through the global options for all domains encountered. This same range is used for uid/gid allocation. @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ idmap config DOM1 : backend = tdb idmap config DOM1 : range = 1000000-2000000 - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489360"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483376"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb2.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb2.8.html index e3cfffbc80..9198b56e3d 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb2.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/idmap_tdb2.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_tdb2</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="idmap_tdb2"><a name="idmap_tdb2.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_tdb2 — Samba's idmap_tdb2 Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="DESCRIPTION"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>idmap_tdb2</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="idmap_tdb2.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>idmap_tdb2 — Samba's idmap_tdb2 Backend for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> The idmap_tdb2 plugin is a substitute for the default idmap_tdb backend used by winbindd for storing SID/uid/gid mapping tables in clustered environments with Samba and CTDB. @@ -20,13 +20,13 @@ any explicitly configured domain with idmap backend tdb2 should have the same range as the default range, since it needs to use the global uid / gid allocator. See the example below. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="IDMAP OPTIONS"><a name="id2528934"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522945"></a><h2>IDMAP OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> Defines the available matching uid and gid range for which the backend is authoritative. If the parameter is absent, Winbind fails over to use the "idmap uid" and "idmap gid" options from smb.conf. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="IDMAP SCRIPT"><a name="id2489318"></a><h2>IDMAP SCRIPT</h2><p> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483340"></a><h2>IDMAP SCRIPT</h2><p> The tdb2 idmap backend supports a script for performing id mappings through the smb.conf option <em class="parameter"><code>idmap : script</code></em>. The script should accept the following command line options. @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ that can be passed in for SID to Unix ID mapping, since otherwise SIDs unmapped by the script might get mapped to IDs that had previously been mapped by the script. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489360"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483382"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p> This example shows how tdb2 is used as a the default idmap backend. It configures the idmap range through the global options for all domains encountered. This same range is used for uid/gid allocation. @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ idmap backend = tdb2 idmap uid = 1000000-2000000 idmap gid = 1000000-2000000 - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489514"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483528"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/index.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/index.html index 638964537c..130a807a16 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/index.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/index.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title></title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="article"><div class="titlepage"><hr></div><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="cifs.upcall.8.html" target="_top">cifs.upcall(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>Userspace upcall helper for Common Internet File System (CIFS) +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title></title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="article" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><hr></div><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="cifs.upcall.8.html" target="_top">cifs.upcall(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>Userspace upcall helper for Common Internet File System (CIFS) </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="eventlogadm.8.html" target="_top">eventlogadm(8)</a></span></dt><dd><p>push records into the Samba event log store </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="ulink" href="findsmb.1.html" target="_top">findsmb(1)</a></span></dt><dd><p>list info about machines that respond to SMB name queries on a subnet diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldb.3.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldb.3.html index 23b31e19ef..8c2d96645e 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldb.3.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldb.3.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldb</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="ldb"><a name="ldb.3"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldb<b>The Samba Project</b> — A light-weight database library</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><pre class="synopsis">#include <ldb.h></pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="description"><a name="id2528860"></a><h2>description</h2><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldb</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="ldb.3"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldb<p><b>The Samba Project</b></p> — A light-weight database library</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><pre class="synopsis">#include <ldb.h></pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522914"></a><h2>description</h2><p> ldb is a light weight embedded database library and API. With a programming interface that is very similar to LDAP, ldb can store its data either in a tdb(3) database or in a real LDAP database. @@ -34,97 +34,97 @@ If you are new to ldb, then I suggest starting with the manual pages for ldbsearch(1) and ldbedit(1), and experimenting with a local database. Then I suggest you look at the ldb_connect(3) and ldb_search(3) manual pages. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="TOOLS"><a name="id2528918"></a><h2>TOOLS</h2><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483339"></a><h2>TOOLS</h2><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p> <span class="application">ldbsearch(1)</span> - command line ldb search utility - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <span class="application">ldbedit(1)</span> - edit all or part of a ldb database using your favourite editor - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <span class="application">ldbadd(1)</span> - add records to a ldb database using LDIF formatted input - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <span class="application">ldbdel(1)</span> - delete records from a ldb database - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <span class="application">ldbmodify(1)</span> - modify records in a ldb database using LDIF formatted input - </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="FUNCTIONS"><a name="id2489671"></a><h2>FUNCTIONS</h2><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483525"></a><h2>FUNCTIONS</h2><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_connect(3)</code> - connect to a ldb backend - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_search(3)</code> - perform a database search - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_add(3)</code> - add a record to the database - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_delete(3)</code> - delete a record from the database - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_modify(3)</code> - modify a record in the database - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_errstring(3)</code> - retrieve extended error information from the last operation - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_ldif_write(3)</code> - write a LDIF formatted message - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_ldif_write_file(3)</code> - write a LDIF formatted message to a file - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_ldif_read(3)</code> - read a LDIF formatted message - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_ldif_read_free(3)</code> - free the result of a ldb_ldif_read() - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_ldif_read_file(3)</code> - read a LDIF message from a file - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_ldif_read_string(3)</code> - read a LDIF message from a string - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_msg_find_element(3)</code> - find an element in a ldb_message - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_val_equal_exact(3)</code> - compare two ldb_val structures - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_msg_find_val(3)</code> - find an element by value - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_msg_add_empty(3)</code> - add an empty message element to a ldb_message - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_msg_add(3)</code> - add a non-empty message element to a ldb_message - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_msg_element_compare(3)</code> - compare two ldb_message_element structures - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_msg_find_int(3)</code> - return an integer value from a ldb_message - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_msg_find_uint(3)</code> - return an unsigned integer value from a ldb_message - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_msg_find_double(3)</code> - return a double value from a ldb_message - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_msg_find_string(3)</code> - return a string value from a ldb_message - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_set_alloc(3)</code> - set the memory allocation function to be used by ldb - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_set_debug(3)</code> - set a debug handler to be used by ldb - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="function">ldb_set_debug_stderr(3)</code> - set a debug handler for stderr output - </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="Author"><a name="id2487456"></a><h2>Author</h2><p> + </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481474"></a><h2>Author</h2><p> ldb was written by <a class="ulink" href="http://samba.org/~tridge/" target="_top">Andrew Tridgell</a>. </p><p> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbadd.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbadd.1.html index f4363489e7..f682dc4457 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbadd.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbadd.1.html @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbadd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="ldbadd"><a name="ldbadd.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbadd — Command-line utility for adding records to an LDB</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbadd</code> [-h] [-H LDB-URL] [ldif-file1] [ldif-file2] [...]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528901"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>ldbadd adds records to an ldb(7) database. It reads +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbadd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="ldbadd.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbadd — Command-line utility for adding records to an LDB</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbadd</code> [-h] [-H LDB-URL] [ldif-file1] [ldif-file2] [...]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522952"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>ldbadd adds records to an ldb(7) database. It reads the ldif(5) files specified on the command line and adds the records from these files to the LDB database, which is specified by the -H option or the LDB_URL environment variable. </p><p>If - is specified as a ldb file, the ldif input is read from - standard input.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489607"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p> + standard input.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483337"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p> Show list of available options.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-H <ldb-url></span></dt><dd><p> LDB URL to connect to. See ldb(7) for details. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="ENVIRONMENT"><a name="id2489642"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to (can be overrided by using the - -H command-line option.)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489663"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489674"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbmodify, ldbdel, ldif(5)</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489684"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483371"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to (can be overrided by using the + -H command-line option.)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483392"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483527"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbmodify, ldbdel, ldif(5)</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483537"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by <a class="ulink" href="http://samba.org/~tridge/" target="_top">Andrew Tridgell</a>. </p><p> If you wish to report a problem or make a suggestion then please see diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbdel.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbdel.1.html index ea0397fba5..d38fa74fe4 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbdel.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbdel.1.html @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbdel</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="ldbdel"><a name="ldbdel.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbdel — Command-line program for deleting LDB records</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbdel</code> [-h] [-H LDB-URL] [dn] [...]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528893"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>ldbdel deletes records from an ldb(7) database. +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbdel</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="ldbdel.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbdel — Command-line program for deleting LDB records</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbdel</code> [-h] [-H LDB-URL] [dn] [...]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522944"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>ldbdel deletes records from an ldb(7) database. It deletes the records identified by the dn's specified on the command-line. </p><p>ldbdel uses either the database that is specified with the -H option or the database specified by the LDB_URL environment - variable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2528911"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p> + variable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483328"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p> Show list of available options.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-H <ldb-url></span></dt><dd><p> LDB URL to connect to. See ldb(7) for details. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="ENVIRONMENT"><a name="id2489632"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to (can be overrided by using the - -H command-line option.)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489654"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489665"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbmodify, ldbadd, ldif(5)</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489674"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483362"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to (can be overrided by using the + -H command-line option.)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483383"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483394"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbmodify, ldbadd, ldif(5)</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483529"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by <a class="ulink" href="http://samba.org/~tridge/" target="_top">Andrew Tridgell</a>. </p><p> If you wish to report a problem or make a suggestion then please see diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbedit.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbedit.1.html index 71d7fdcda2..9d2de5acc6 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbedit.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbedit.1.html @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbedit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="ldbedit"><a name="ldbedit.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbedit — Edit LDB databases using your preferred editor</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbedit</code> [-?] [--usage] [-s base|one|sub] [-b basedn] [-a] [-e editor] [-H LDB-URL] [expression] [attributes...]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489334"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>ldbedit is a utility that allows you to edit LDB entries (in +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbedit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="ldbedit.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbedit — Edit LDB databases using your preferred editor</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbedit</code> [-?] [--usage] [-s base|one|sub] [-b basedn] [-a] [-e editor] [-H LDB-URL] [expression] [attributes...]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483351"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>ldbedit is a utility that allows you to edit LDB entries (in tdb files, sqlite files or LDAP servers) using your preferred editor. ldbedit generates an LDIF file based on your query, allows you to edit the LDIF, and then merges that LDIF back into the LDB backend. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489349"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-?, </span><span class="term">--help</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483366"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-?, </span><span class="term">--help</span></dt><dd><p> Show list of available options, and a phrase describing what that option does. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">--usage</span></dt><dd><p> @@ -34,14 +34,14 @@ operations that are being performed. Without this option, ldbedit will only provide a summary change line. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="ENVIRONMENT"><a name="id2489632"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to. This can be + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483649"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to. This can be overridden by using the -H command-line option.) </p></dd><dt><span class="term">VISUAL and EDITOR</span></dt><dd><p> Environment variables used to determine what editor to use. VISUAL takes precedence over EDITOR, and both are overridden by the -e command-line option. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489673"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489684"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbmodify(1), ldbdel(1), ldif(5), vi(1)</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489695"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483690"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483701"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbmodify(1), ldbdel(1), ldif(5), vi(1)</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483712"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by <a class="ulink" href="http://samba.org/~tridge/" target="_top">Andrew Tridgell</a>. </p><p> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbmodify.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbmodify.1.html index 997407d4e6..9cbd67b5e1 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbmodify.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbmodify.1.html @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbmodify</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="ldbmodify"><a name="ldbmodify.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbmodify — Modify records in a LDB database</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbmodify</code> [-H LDB-URL] [ldif-file]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528910"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbmodify</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="ldbmodify.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbmodify — Modify records in a LDB database</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbmodify</code> [-H LDB-URL] [ldif-file]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522929"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> ldbmodify changes, adds and deletes records in a LDB database. The changes that should be made to the LDB database are read from the specified LDIF-file. If - is specified as the filename, input is read from stdin. - </p><p>For now, see ldapmodify(1) for details on the LDIF file format.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2528929"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-H <ldb-url></span></dt><dd><p> + </p><p>For now, see ldapmodify(1) for details on the LDIF file format.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522948"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-H <ldb-url></span></dt><dd><p> LDB URL to connect to. See ldb(7) for details. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="ENVIRONMENT"><a name="id2489319"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to (can be overrided by using the - -H command-line option.)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489341"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489352"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbedit</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489362"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483336"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to (can be overrided by using the + -H command-line option.)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483358"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483369"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbedit</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483379"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by <a class="ulink" href="http://samba.org/~tridge/" target="_top">Andrew Tridgell</a>. </p><p> If you wish to report a problem or make a suggestion then please see diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbrename.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbrename.1.html index 4dfdd1d09f..cbb1b6226c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbrename.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbrename.1.html @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbrename</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="ldbrename"><a name="ldbrename.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbrename — Edit LDB databases using your favorite editor</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbrename</code> [-h] [-o options] {olddn} {newdb}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528910"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>ldbrename is a utility that allows you to rename trees in +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbrename</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="ldbrename.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbrename — Edit LDB databases using your favorite editor</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbrename</code> [-h] [-o options] {olddn} {newdb}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522946"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>ldbrename is a utility that allows you to rename trees in an LDB database based by DN. This utility takes two arguments: the original DN name of the top element and the DN to change it to. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2528924"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483328"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p> Show list of available options.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-H <ldb-url></span></dt><dd><p> LDB URL to connect to. See ldb(7) for details. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-o options</span></dt><dd><p>Extra ldb options, such as - modules.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="ENVIRONMENT"><a name="id2489338"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to (can be overrided by using the - -H command-line option.)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489359"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489370"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbmodify, ldbdel, ldif(5)</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489502"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by + modules.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483372"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to (can be overrided by using the + -H command-line option.)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483393"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483526"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbmodify, ldbdel, ldif(5)</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483535"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by <a class="ulink" href="http://samba.org/~tridge/" target="_top">Andrew Tridgell</a>. </p><p> If you wish to report a problem or make a suggestion then please see diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbsearch.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbsearch.1.html index 5996424131..ca8489a54c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbsearch.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ldbsearch.1.html @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbsearch</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="ldbsearch"><a name="ldbsearch.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbsearch — Search for records in a LDB database</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbsearch</code> [-h] [-s base|one|sub] [-b basedn] [-i] [-H LDB-URL] [expression] [attributes]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489321"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>ldbsearch searches a LDB database for records matching the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ldbsearch</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="ldbsearch.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ldbsearch — Search for records in a LDB database</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ldbsearch</code> [-h] [-s base|one|sub] [-b basedn] [-i] [-H LDB-URL] [expression] [attributes]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483338"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>ldbsearch searches a LDB database for records matching the specified expression (see the ldapsearch(1) manpage for a description of the expression format). For each record, the specified attributes are printed. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489335"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483352"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p> Show list of available options.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-H <ldb-url></span></dt><dd><p> LDB URL to connect to. See ldb(7) for details. - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-s one|sub|base</span></dt><dd><p>Search scope to use. One-level, subtree or base.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-i</span></dt><dd><p>Read search expressions from stdin. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-b basedn</span></dt><dd><p>Specify Base DN to use.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="ENVIRONMENT"><a name="id2489526"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to (can be overrided by using the - -H command-line option.)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489547"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489558"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbedit(1)</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489569"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by + </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-s one|sub|base</span></dt><dd><p>Search scope to use. One-level, subtree or base.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-i</span></dt><dd><p>Read search expressions from stdin. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-b basedn</span></dt><dd><p>Specify Base DN to use.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483543"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">LDB_URL</span></dt><dd><p>LDB URL to connect to (can be overrided by using the + -H command-line option.)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483564"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 4.0 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483575"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p>ldb(7), ldbedit(1)</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483585"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> ldb was written by <a class="ulink" href="http://samba.org/~tridge/" target="_top">Andrew Tridgell</a>. </p><p> If you wish to report a problem or make a suggestion then please see diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/libsmbclient.7.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/libsmbclient.7.html index 1a02ce89dd..e2fed89e5c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/libsmbclient.7.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/libsmbclient.7.html @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>libsmbclient</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="libsmbclient"><a name="libsmbclient.7"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>libsmbclient — An extension library for browsers and that can be used as a generic browsing API.</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>libsmbclient</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="libsmbclient.7"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>libsmbclient — An extension library for browsers and that can be used as a generic browsing API.</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><p> Browser URL: <code class="literal">smb://[[[domain:]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]] [?options] </code> - </p></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528909"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> + </p></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522921"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite. </p><p> <code class="literal">libsmbclient</code> is a library toolset that permits applications to manipulate CIFS/SMB network @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ <code class="literal">libsmbclient</code> can not be used directly from the command line, instead it provides an extension of the capabilities of tools such as file managers and browsers. This man page describes the configuration options for this tool so that the user may obtain greatest utility of use. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489316"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483338"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p> What the URLs mean: </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">smb://</span></dt><dd><p> Shows all workgroups or domains that are visible in the network. The behavior matches @@ -46,11 +46,11 @@ <code class="literal">libsmbclient</code> will check the users shell environment for the <code class="literal">USER</code> parameter and will use its value when if the <code class="literal">user</code> parameter was not included in the URL. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="PROGRAMMERS GUIDE"><a name="id2489586"></a><h2>PROGRAMMERS GUIDE</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483603"></a><h2>PROGRAMMERS GUIDE</h2><p> Watch this space for future updates. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489597"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483613"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p> This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489608"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483624"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/lmhosts.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/lmhosts.5.html index 25afeea80b..9d4dd64522 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/lmhosts.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/lmhosts.5.html @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>lmhosts</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="lmhosts"><a name="lmhosts.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>lmhosts — The Samba NetBIOS hosts file</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><p><code class="filename">lmhosts</code> is the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528902"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This file is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="filename">lmhosts</code> is the <span class="emphasis"><em>Samba +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>lmhosts</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="lmhosts.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>lmhosts — The Samba NetBIOS hosts file</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><p><code class="filename">lmhosts</code> is the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522921"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This file is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="filename">lmhosts</code> is the <span class="emphasis"><em>Samba </em></span> NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file. It is very similar to the <code class="filename">/etc/hosts</code> file format, except that the hostname component must correspond - to the NetBIOS naming format.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="FILE FORMAT"><a name="id2489309"></a><h2>FILE FORMAT</h2><p>It is an ASCII file containing one line for NetBIOS name. + to the NetBIOS naming format.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483325"></a><h2>FILE FORMAT</h2><p>It is an ASCII file containing one line for NetBIOS name. The two fields on each line are separated from each other by white space. Any entry beginning with '#' is ignored. Each line - in the lmhosts file contains the following information:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>IP Address - in dotted decimal format.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>NetBIOS Name - This name format is a + in the lmhosts file contains the following information:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>IP Address - in dotted decimal format.</p></li><li><p>NetBIOS Name - This name format is a maximum fifteen character host name, with an optional trailing '#' character followed by the NetBIOS name type as two hexadecimal digits.</p><p>If the trailing '#' is omitted then the given IP @@ -25,10 +25,10 @@ the NetBIOS name requested.</p><p>The second mapping will be returned only when the "0x20" name type for a name "NTSERVER" is queried. Any other name type will not be resolved.</p><p>The default location of the <code class="filename">lmhosts</code> file - is in the same directory as the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> file.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="FILES"><a name="id2489511"></a><h2>FILES</h2><p>lmhosts is loaded from the configuration directory. This is + is in the same directory as the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> file.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483526"></a><h2>FILES</h2><p>lmhosts is loaded from the configuration directory. This is usually <code class="filename">/etc/samba</code> or <code class="filename">/usr/local/samba/lib</code>. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489533"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489544"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a> - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489579"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483549"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483560"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483594"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/log2pcap.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/log2pcap.1.html index 30a9bde589..f019208784 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/log2pcap.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/log2pcap.1.html @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>log2pcap</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="log2pcap"><a name="log2pcap.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>log2pcap — Extract network traces from Samba log files</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">log2pcap</code> [-h] [-q] [logfile] [pcap_file]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528927"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">log2pcap</code> reads in a +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>log2pcap</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="log2pcap.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>log2pcap — Extract network traces from Samba log files</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">log2pcap</code> [-h] [-q] [logfile] [pcap_file]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522946"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">log2pcap</code> reads in a samba log file and generates a pcap file (readable by most sniffers, such as ethereal or tcpdump) based on the packet dumps in the log file.</p><p>The log file must have a <em class="parameter"><code>log level</code></em> of at least <code class="constant">5</code> to get the SMB header/parameters right, <code class="constant">10</code> to get the first 512 data bytes of the packet and <code class="constant">50</code> to get the whole packet. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489346"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483363"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is specified the output file will be a hex dump, in a format that is readable by the <span class="application">text2pcap</span> utility.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-q</span></dt><dd><p>Be quiet. No warning messages about missing @@ -17,13 +17,13 @@ If this argument is not specified, output data will be written to stdout. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489547"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Extract all network traffic from all samba log files:</p><pre class="programlisting"> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483564"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Extract all network traffic from all samba log files:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <code class="prompt">$</code> log2pcap < /var/log/* > trace.pcap </pre><p>Convert to pcap using text2pcap:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <code class="prompt">$</code> log2pcap -h samba.log | text2pcap -T 139,139 - trace.pcap - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489588"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="BUGS"><a name="id2489599"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p>Only SMB data is extracted from the samba logs, no LDAP, + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483605"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483616"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p>Only SMB data is extracted from the samba logs, no LDAP, NetBIOS lookup or other data.</p><p>The generated TCP and IP headers don't contain a valid - checksum.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489615"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="text2pcap.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">text2pcap</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="ethereal.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">ethereal</span>(1)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489638"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + checksum.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483632"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="text2pcap.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">text2pcap</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="ethereal.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">ethereal</span>(1)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483655"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>This manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/mount.cifs.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/mount.cifs.8.html index b3edf14a63..b80db6c383 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/mount.cifs.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/mount.cifs.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>mount.cifs</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="mount.cifs"><a name="mount.cifs.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>mount.cifs — mount using the Common Internet File System (CIFS)</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">mount.cifs</code> {service} {mount-point} [-o options]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528928"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>mount.cifs mounts a Linux CIFS filesystem. It +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>mount.cifs</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="mount.cifs.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>mount.cifs — mount using the Common Internet File System (CIFS)</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">mount.cifs</code> {service} {mount-point} [-o options]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522940"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>mount.cifs mounts a Linux CIFS filesystem. It is usually invoked indirectly by the <a class="citerefentry" href="mount.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">mount</span>(8)</span></a> command when using the "-t cifs" option. This command only works in Linux, and the kernel must @@ -28,12 +28,12 @@ kernel log. </p><p> <span class="emphasis"><em>modinfo cifs</em></span> command displays the version of cifs module. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489376"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">user=<em class="replaceable"><code>arg</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>specifies the username to connect as. If + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483524"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">user=<em class="replaceable"><code>arg</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>specifies the username to connect as. If this is not given, then the environment variable <span class="emphasis"><em>USER</em></span> is used. This option can also take the form "user%password" or "workgroup/user" or "workgroup/user%password" to allow the password and workgroup to be specified as part of the username. - </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> + </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> The cifs vfs accepts the parameter <em class="parameter"><code>user=</code></em>, or for users familiar with smbfs it accepts the longer form of the parameter <em class="parameter"><code>username=</code></em>. Similarly the longer smbfs style parameter names may be accepted as synonyms for the shorter cifs parameters <em class="parameter"><code>pass=</code></em>,<em class="parameter"><code>dom=</code></em> and <em class="parameter"><code>cred=</code></em>. </p></div></dd><dt><span class="term">password=<em class="replaceable"><code>arg</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>specifies the CIFS password. If this option is not given then the environment variable @@ -171,9 +171,9 @@ port 445 is tried and if no response then port 139 is tried. module. POSIX ACL support can be disabled on a per mount basis by specifying "noacl" on mount.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">nocase</span></dt><dd><p>Request case insensitive path name matching (case sensitive is the default if the server suports it). - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">sec=</span></dt><dd><p>Security mode. Allowed values are:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>none attempt to connection as a null user (no name) </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>krb5 Use Kerberos version 5 authentication</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>krb5i Use Kerberos authentication and packet signing</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>ntlm Use NTLM password hashing (default)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>ntlmi Use NTLM password hashing with signing (if + </p></dd><dt><span class="term">sec=</span></dt><dd><p>Security mode. Allowed values are:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>none attempt to connection as a null user (no name) </p></li><li><p>krb5 Use Kerberos version 5 authentication</p></li><li><p>krb5i Use Kerberos authentication and packet signing</p></li><li><p>ntlm Use NTLM password hashing (default)</p></li><li><p>ntlmi Use NTLM password hashing with signing (if /proc/fs/cifs/PacketSigningEnabled on or if - server requires signing also can be the default)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>ntlmv2 Use NTLMv2 password hashing</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>ntlmv2i Use NTLMv2 password hashing with packet signing</p></li></ul></div><p>[NB This [sec parameter] is under development and expected to be available in cifs kernel module 1.40 and later] + server requires signing also can be the default)</p></li><li><p>ntlmv2 Use NTLMv2 password hashing</p></li><li><p>ntlmv2i Use NTLMv2 password hashing with packet signing</p></li></ul></div><p>[NB This [sec parameter] is under development and expected to be available in cifs kernel module 1.40 and later] </p></dd><dt><span class="term">nobrl</span></dt><dd><p>Do not send byte range lock requests to the server. This is necessary for certain applications that break with cifs style mandatory byte range locks (and most @@ -223,11 +223,11 @@ port 445 is tried and if no response then port 139 is tried. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">wsize=<em class="replaceable"><code>arg</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>default network write size (default 57344) maximum wsize currently allowed by CIFS is 57344 (fourteen - 4096 byte pages)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">--verbose</span></dt><dd><p>Print additional debugging information for the mount. Note that this parameter must be specified before the -o. For example:</p><p>mount -t cifs //server/share /mnt --verbose -o user=username</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="SERVICE FORMATTING AND DELIMITERS"><a name="id2487437"></a><h2>SERVICE FORMATTING AND DELIMITERS</h2><p> + 4096 byte pages)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">--verbose</span></dt><dd><p>Print additional debugging information for the mount. Note that this parameter must be specified before the -o. For example:</p><p>mount -t cifs //server/share /mnt --verbose -o user=username</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481455"></a><h2>SERVICE FORMATTING AND DELIMITERS</h2><p> It's generally preferred to use forward slashes (/) as a delimiter in service names. They are considered to be the "universal delimiter" since they are generally not allowed to be embedded within path components on Windows machines and the client can convert them to blackslashes (\) unconditionally. Conversely, backslash characters are allowed by POSIX to be part of a path component, and can't be automatically converted in the same way. </p><p> mount.cifs will attempt to convert backslashes to forward slashes where it's able to do so, but it cannot do so in any path component following the sharename. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"><a name="id2487882"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481902"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2><p> The variable <span class="emphasis"><em>USER</em></span> may contain the username of the person to be used to authenticate to the server. The variable can be used to set both username and @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ person using the client. The variable <span class="emphasis"><em>PASSWD_FILE</em></span> may contain the pathname of a file to read the password from. A single line of input is read and used as the password. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="NOTES"><a name="id2487916"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>This command may be used only by root, unless installed setuid, in which case the noeexec and nosuid mount flags are enabled.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="CONFIGURATION"><a name="id2487928"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481937"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>This command may be used only by root, unless installed setuid, in which case the noeexec and nosuid mount flags are enabled.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481949"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p> The primary mechanism for making configuration changes and for reading debug information for the cifs vfs is via the Linux /proc filesystem. In the directory <code class="filename">/proc/fs/cifs</code> are various @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ loaded. These can be seen by running the modinfo utility against the file cifs.ko which will list the options that may be passed to cifs during module installation (device driver load). For more information see the kernel file <code class="filename">fs/cifs/README</code>. -</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="BUGS"><a name="id2487961"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p>Mounting using the CIFS URL specification is currently not supported. +</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481982"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p>Mounting using the CIFS URL specification is currently not supported. </p><p>The credentials file does not handle usernames or passwords with leading space.</p><p> Note that the typical response to a bug report is a suggestion @@ -258,11 +258,11 @@ to try the latest version first. So please try doing that first, and always include which versions you use of relevant software when reporting bugs (minimum: mount.cifs (try mount.cifs -V), kernel (see /proc/version) and server type you are trying to contact. -</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487986"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 1.52 of - the cifs vfs filesystem (roughly Linux kernel 2.6.24).</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2487998"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482007"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 1.52 of + the cifs vfs filesystem (roughly Linux kernel 2.6.24).</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482018"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> Documentation/filesystems/cifs.txt and fs/cifs/README in the linux kernel source tree may contain additional options and information. -</p><p><a class="citerefentry" href="umount.cifs.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">umount.cifs</span>(8)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2488019"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>Steve French</p><p>The syntax and manpage were loosely based on that of smbmount. It +</p><p><a class="citerefentry" href="umount.cifs.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">umount.cifs</span>(8)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532776"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>Steve French</p><p>The syntax and manpage were loosely based on that of smbmount. It was converted to Docbook/XML by Jelmer Vernooij.</p><p>The maintainer of the Linux cifs vfs and the userspace tool <span class="emphasis"><em>mount.cifs</em></span> is <a class="ulink" href="mailto:sfrench@samba.org" target="_top">Steve French</a>. The <a class="ulink" href="mailto:linux-cifs-client@lists.samba.org" target="_top">Linux CIFS Mailing list</a> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html index b096ddfdec..c73c62d708 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/net.8.html @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>net</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="net"><a name="net.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>net — Tool for administration of Samba and remote +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>net</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="net.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>net — Tool for administration of Samba and remote CIFS servers. - </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">net</code> {<ads|rap|rpc>} [-h] [-w workgroup] [-W myworkgroup] [-U user] [-I ip-address] [-p port] [-n myname] [-s conffile] [-S server] [-l] [-P] [-d debuglevel] [-V] [--request-timeout seconds]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489664"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The Samba net utility is meant to work just like the net utility + </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">net</code> {<ads|rap|rpc>} [-h] [-w workgroup] [-W myworkgroup] [-U user] [-I ip-address] [-p port] [-n myname] [-s conffile] [-S server] [-l] [-P] [-d debuglevel] [-V] [--request-timeout seconds]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483395"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The Samba net utility is meant to work just like the net utility available for windows and DOS. The first argument should be used to specify the protocol to use when executing a certain command. ADS is used for ActiveDirectory, RAP is using for old (Win9x/NT3) clients and RPC can be used for NT4 and Windows 2000. If this argument is omitted, net will try to determine it automatically. Not all commands are available on all protocols. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489694"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483548"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-w target-workgroup</span></dt><dd><p> Sets target workgroup or domain. You have to specify either this option or the IP address or the name of a server. @@ -57,18 +57,18 @@ investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</p><p>Note that specifying this parameter here will override the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#" target="_top"></a> parameter -in the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="COMMANDS"><a name="id2487548"></a><h2>COMMANDS</h2><div class="refsect2" title="CHANGESECRETPW"><a name="id2487554"></a><h3>CHANGESECRETPW</h3><p>This command allows the Samba machine account password to be set from an external application +in the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481568"></a><h2>COMMANDS</h2><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481573"></a><h3>CHANGESECRETPW</h3><p>This command allows the Samba machine account password to be set from an external application to a machine account password that has already been stored in Active Directory. DO NOT USE this command unless you know exactly what you are doing. The use of this command requires that the force flag (-f) be used also. There will be NO command prompt. Whatever information is piped into stdin, either by typing at the command line or otherwise, will be stored as the literal machine password. Do NOT use this without care and attention as it will overwrite a legitimate machine password without warning. YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="TIME"><a name="id2487574"></a><h3>TIME</h3><p>The <code class="literal">NET TIME</code> command allows you to view the time on a remote server - or synchronise the time on the local server with the time on the remote server.</p><div class="refsect3" title="TIME"><a name="id2487592"></a><h4>TIME</h4><p>Without any options, the <code class="literal">NET TIME</code> command +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481594"></a><h3>TIME</h3><p>The <code class="literal">NET TIME</code> command allows you to view the time on a remote server + or synchronise the time on the local server with the time on the remote server.</p><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481611"></a><h4>TIME</h4><p>Without any options, the <code class="literal">NET TIME</code> command displays the time on the remote server. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="TIME SYSTEM"><a name="id2487608"></a><h4>TIME SYSTEM</h4><p>Displays the time on the remote server in a format ready for <code class="literal">/bin/date</code>.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="TIME SET"><a name="id2487625"></a><h4>TIME SET</h4><p>Tries to set the date and time of the local server to that on -the remote server using <code class="literal">/bin/date</code>. </p></div><div class="refsect3" title="TIME ZONE"><a name="id2487643"></a><h4>TIME ZONE</h4><p>Displays the timezone in hours from GMT on the remote computer.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="[RPC|ADS] JOIN [TYPE] [-U username[%password]] [createupn=UPN] [createcomputer=OU] [options]"><a name="id2487655"></a><h3>[RPC|ADS] JOIN [TYPE] [-U username[%password]] [createupn=UPN] [createcomputer=OU] [options]</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481628"></a><h4>TIME SYSTEM</h4><p>Displays the time on the remote server in a format ready for <code class="literal">/bin/date</code>.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481644"></a><h4>TIME SET</h4><p>Tries to set the date and time of the local server to that on +the remote server using <code class="literal">/bin/date</code>. </p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481662"></a><h4>TIME ZONE</h4><p>Displays the timezone in hours from GMT on the remote computer.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481674"></a><h3>[RPC|ADS] JOIN [TYPE] [-U username[%password]] [createupn=UPN] [createcomputer=OU] [options]</h3><p> Join a domain. If the account already exists on the server, and [TYPE] is MEMBER, the machine will attempt to join automatically. (Assuming that the machine has been created in server manager) @@ -85,81 +85,81 @@ OU string reads from top to bottom without RDNs, and is delimited by a '/'. Please note that '\' is used for escape by both the shell and ldap, so it may need to be doubled or quadrupled to pass through, and it is not used as a delimiter. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="[RPC] OLDJOIN [options]"><a name="id2487689"></a><h3>[RPC] OLDJOIN [options]</h3><p>Join a domain. Use the OLDJOIN option to join the domain +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481709"></a><h3>[RPC] OLDJOIN [options]</h3><p>Join a domain. Use the OLDJOIN option to join the domain using the old style of domain joining - you need to create a trust -account in server manager first.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="[RPC|ADS] USER"><a name="id2487702"></a><h3>[RPC|ADS] USER</h3><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|ADS] USER"><a name="id2487707"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] USER</h4><p>List all users</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|ADS] USER DELETE target"><a name="id2487718"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] USER DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>target</code></em></h4><p>Delete specified user</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|ADS] USER INFO target"><a name="id2487730"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] USER INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>target</code></em></h4><p>List the domain groups of the specified user.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|ADS] USER RENAME oldname newname"><a name="id2487743"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] USER RENAME <em class="replaceable"><code>oldname</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>newname</code></em></h4><p>Rename specified user.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|ADS] USER ADD name [password] [-F user flags] [-C comment]"><a name="id2487758"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] USER ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> [password] [-F user flags] [-C comment]</h4><p>Add specified user.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="[RPC|ADS] GROUP"><a name="id2487773"></a><h3>[RPC|ADS] GROUP</h3><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|ADS] GROUP [misc options] [targets]"><a name="id2487779"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] GROUP [misc options] [targets]</h4><p>List user groups.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|ADS] GROUP DELETE name [misc. options]"><a name="id2487790"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] GROUP DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> [misc. options]</h4><p>Delete specified group.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|ADS] GROUP ADD name [-C comment]"><a name="id2487803"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] GROUP ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> [-C comment]</h4><p>Create specified group.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="[RAP|RPC] SHARE"><a name="id2487818"></a><h3>[RAP|RPC] SHARE</h3><div class="refsect3" title="[RAP|RPC] SHARE [misc. options] [targets]"><a name="id2487823"></a><h4>[RAP|RPC] SHARE [misc. options] [targets]</h4><p>Enumerates all exported resources (network shares) on target server.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="[RAP|RPC] SHARE ADD name=serverpath [-C comment] [-M maxusers] [targets]"><a name="id2487835"></a><h4>[RAP|RPC] SHARE ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>name=serverpath</code></em> [-C comment] [-M maxusers] [targets]</h4><p>Adds a share from a server (makes the export active). Maxusers +account in server manager first.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481721"></a><h3>[RPC|ADS] USER</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481727"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] USER</h4><p>List all users</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481737"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] USER DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>target</code></em></h4><p>Delete specified user</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481749"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] USER INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>target</code></em></h4><p>List the domain groups of the specified user.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481762"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] USER RENAME <em class="replaceable"><code>oldname</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>newname</code></em></h4><p>Rename specified user.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481778"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] USER ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> [password] [-F user flags] [-C comment]</h4><p>Add specified user.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481793"></a><h3>[RPC|ADS] GROUP</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481798"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] GROUP [misc options] [targets]</h4><p>List user groups.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481809"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] GROUP DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> [misc. options]</h4><p>Delete specified group.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481823"></a><h4>[RPC|ADS] GROUP ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> [-C comment]</h4><p>Create specified group.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481837"></a><h3>[RAP|RPC] SHARE</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481843"></a><h4>[RAP|RPC] SHARE [misc. options] [targets]</h4><p>Enumerates all exported resources (network shares) on target server.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481855"></a><h4>[RAP|RPC] SHARE ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>name=serverpath</code></em> [-C comment] [-M maxusers] [targets]</h4><p>Adds a share from a server (makes the export active). Maxusers specifies the number of users that can be connected to the -share simultaneously.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="SHARE DELETE sharename"><a name="id2487852"></a><h4>SHARE DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p>Delete specified share.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="[RPC|RAP] FILE"><a name="id2487865"></a><h3>[RPC|RAP] FILE</h3><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|RAP] FILE"><a name="id2487871"></a><h4>[RPC|RAP] FILE</h4><p>List all open files on remote server.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|RAP] FILE CLOSE fileid"><a name="id2487882"></a><h4>[RPC|RAP] FILE CLOSE <em class="replaceable"><code>fileid</code></em></h4><p>Close file with specified <em class="replaceable"><code>fileid</code></em> on -remote server.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="[RPC|RAP] FILE INFO fileid"><a name="id2487898"></a><h4>[RPC|RAP] FILE INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>fileid</code></em></h4><p> +share simultaneously.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481871"></a><h4>SHARE DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p>Delete specified share.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481885"></a><h3>[RPC|RAP] FILE</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481890"></a><h4>[RPC|RAP] FILE</h4><p>List all open files on remote server.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481901"></a><h4>[RPC|RAP] FILE CLOSE <em class="replaceable"><code>fileid</code></em></h4><p>Close file with specified <em class="replaceable"><code>fileid</code></em> on +remote server.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481917"></a><h4>[RPC|RAP] FILE INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>fileid</code></em></h4><p> Print information on specified <em class="replaceable"><code>fileid</code></em>. Currently listed are: file-id, username, locks, path, permissions. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="[RAP|RPC] FILE USER user"><a name="id2487914"></a><h4>[RAP|RPC] FILE USER <em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481934"></a><h4>[RAP|RPC] FILE USER <em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em></h4><p> List files opened by specified <em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em>. Please note that <code class="literal">net rap file user</code> does not work against Samba servers. -</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="SESSION"><a name="id2487938"></a><h3>SESSION</h3><div class="refsect3" title="RAP SESSION"><a name="id2487944"></a><h4>RAP SESSION</h4><p>Without any other options, SESSION enumerates all active SMB/CIFS -sessions on the target server.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="RAP SESSION DELETE|CLOSE CLIENT_NAME"><a name="id2487955"></a><h4>RAP SESSION DELETE|CLOSE <em class="replaceable"><code>CLIENT_NAME</code></em></h4><p>Close the specified sessions.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="RAP SESSION INFO CLIENT_NAME"><a name="id2487967"></a><h4>RAP SESSION INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>CLIENT_NAME</code></em></h4><p>Give a list with all the open files in specified session.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="RAP SERVER DOMAIN"><a name="id2487982"></a><h3>RAP SERVER <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h3><p>List all servers in specified domain or workgroup. Defaults -to local domain.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="RAP DOMAIN"><a name="id2487995"></a><h3>RAP DOMAIN</h3><p>Lists all domains and workgroups visible on the -current network.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="RAP PRINTQ"><a name="id2488006"></a><h3>RAP PRINTQ</h3><div class="refsect3" title="RAP PRINTQ INFO QUEUE_NAME"><a name="id2488012"></a><h4>RAP PRINTQ INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>QUEUE_NAME</code></em></h4><p>Lists the specified print queue and print jobs on the server. +</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481957"></a><h3>SESSION</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481963"></a><h4>RAP SESSION</h4><p>Without any other options, SESSION enumerates all active SMB/CIFS +sessions on the target server.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481975"></a><h4>RAP SESSION DELETE|CLOSE <em class="replaceable"><code>CLIENT_NAME</code></em></h4><p>Close the specified sessions.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2481987"></a><h4>RAP SESSION INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>CLIENT_NAME</code></em></h4><p>Give a list with all the open files in specified session.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2482001"></a><h3>RAP SERVER <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h3><p>List all servers in specified domain or workgroup. Defaults +to local domain.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2482015"></a><h3>RAP DOMAIN</h3><p>Lists all domains and workgroups visible on the +current network.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2482026"></a><h3>RAP PRINTQ</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2482032"></a><h4>RAP PRINTQ INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>QUEUE_NAME</code></em></h4><p>Lists the specified print queue and print jobs on the server. If the <em class="replaceable"><code>QUEUE_NAME</code></em> is omitted, all -queues are listed.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="RAP PRINTQ DELETE JOBID"><a name="id2538499"></a><h4>RAP PRINTQ DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>JOBID</code></em></h4><p>Delete job with specified id.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="RAP VALIDATE user [password]"><a name="id2538512"></a><h3>RAP VALIDATE <em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>password</code></em>]</h3><p> +queues are listed.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532513"></a><h4>RAP PRINTQ DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>JOBID</code></em></h4><p>Delete job with specified id.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532526"></a><h3>RAP VALIDATE <em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>password</code></em>]</h3><p> Validate whether the specified user can log in to the remote server. If the password is not specified on the commandline, it will be prompted. -</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Currently NOT implemented.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="RAP GROUPMEMBER"><a name="id2538534"></a><h3>RAP GROUPMEMBER</h3><div class="refsect3" title="RAP GROUPMEMBER LIST GROUP"><a name="id2538540"></a><h4>RAP GROUPMEMBER LIST <em class="replaceable"><code>GROUP</code></em></h4><p>List all members of the specified group.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="RAP GROUPMEMBER DELETE GROUP USER"><a name="id2538552"></a><h4>RAP GROUPMEMBER DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>GROUP</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>USER</code></em></h4><p>Delete member from group.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="RAP GROUPMEMBER ADD GROUP USER"><a name="id2538567"></a><h4>RAP GROUPMEMBER ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>GROUP</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>USER</code></em></h4><p>Add member to group.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="RAP ADMIN command"><a name="id2538583"></a><h3>RAP ADMIN <em class="replaceable"><code>command</code></em></h3><p>Execute the specified <em class="replaceable"><code>command</code></em> on +</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Currently NOT implemented.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532549"></a><h3>RAP GROUPMEMBER</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532554"></a><h4>RAP GROUPMEMBER LIST <em class="replaceable"><code>GROUP</code></em></h4><p>List all members of the specified group.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532567"></a><h4>RAP GROUPMEMBER DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>GROUP</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>USER</code></em></h4><p>Delete member from group.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532582"></a><h4>RAP GROUPMEMBER ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>GROUP</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>USER</code></em></h4><p>Add member to group.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532598"></a><h3>RAP ADMIN <em class="replaceable"><code>command</code></em></h3><p>Execute the specified <em class="replaceable"><code>command</code></em> on the remote server. Only works with OS/2 servers. -</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Currently NOT implemented.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="RAP SERVICE"><a name="id2538604"></a><h3>RAP SERVICE</h3><div class="refsect3" title="RAP SERVICE START NAME [arguments...]"><a name="id2538609"></a><h4>RAP SERVICE START <em class="replaceable"><code>NAME</code></em> [arguments...]</h4><p>Start the specified service on the remote server. Not implemented yet.</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Currently NOT implemented.</p></div></div><div class="refsect3" title="RAP SERVICE STOP"><a name="id2538627"></a><h4>RAP SERVICE STOP</h4><p>Stop the specified service on the remote server.</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Currently NOT implemented.</p></div></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="RAP PASSWORD USER OLDPASS NEWPASS"><a name="id2538643"></a><h3>RAP PASSWORD <em class="replaceable"><code>USER</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>OLDPASS</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>NEWPASS</code></em></h3><p> +</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Currently NOT implemented.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532618"></a><h3>RAP SERVICE</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532623"></a><h4>RAP SERVICE START <em class="replaceable"><code>NAME</code></em> [arguments...]</h4><p>Start the specified service on the remote server. Not implemented yet.</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Currently NOT implemented.</p></div></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532642"></a><h4>RAP SERVICE STOP</h4><p>Stop the specified service on the remote server.</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Currently NOT implemented.</p></div></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532658"></a><h3>RAP PASSWORD <em class="replaceable"><code>USER</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>OLDPASS</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>NEWPASS</code></em></h3><p> Change password of <em class="replaceable"><code>USER</code></em> from <em class="replaceable"><code>OLDPASS</code></em> to <em class="replaceable"><code>NEWPASS</code></em>. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="LOOKUP"><a name="id2538671"></a><h3>LOOKUP</h3><div class="refsect3" title="LOOKUP HOST HOSTNAME [TYPE]"><a name="id2538676"></a><h4>LOOKUP HOST <em class="replaceable"><code>HOSTNAME</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>TYPE</code></em>]</h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532685"></a><h3>LOOKUP</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532691"></a><h4>LOOKUP HOST <em class="replaceable"><code>HOSTNAME</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>TYPE</code></em>]</h4><p> Lookup the IP address of the given host with the specified type (netbios suffix). The type defaults to 0x20 (workstation). -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="LOOKUP LDAP [DOMAIN]"><a name="id2538694"></a><h4>LOOKUP LDAP [<em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em>]</h4><p>Give IP address of LDAP server of specified <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em>. Defaults to local domain.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="LOOKUP KDC [REALM]"><a name="id2538711"></a><h4>LOOKUP KDC [<em class="replaceable"><code>REALM</code></em>]</h4><p>Give IP address of KDC for the specified <em class="replaceable"><code>REALM</code></em>. -Defaults to local realm.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="LOOKUP DC [DOMAIN]"><a name="id2538728"></a><h4>LOOKUP DC [<em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em>]</h4><p>Give IP's of Domain Controllers for specified <em class="replaceable"><code> -DOMAIN</code></em>. Defaults to local domain.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="LOOKUP MASTER DOMAIN"><a name="id2538745"></a><h4>LOOKUP MASTER <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h4><p>Give IP of master browser for specified <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em> -or workgroup. Defaults to local domain.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="CACHE"><a name="id2538763"></a><h3>CACHE</h3><p>Samba uses a general caching interface called 'gencache'. It +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532709"></a><h4>LOOKUP LDAP [<em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em>]</h4><p>Give IP address of LDAP server of specified <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em>. Defaults to local domain.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532726"></a><h4>LOOKUP KDC [<em class="replaceable"><code>REALM</code></em>]</h4><p>Give IP address of KDC for the specified <em class="replaceable"><code>REALM</code></em>. +Defaults to local realm.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532743"></a><h4>LOOKUP DC [<em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em>]</h4><p>Give IP's of Domain Controllers for specified <em class="replaceable"><code> +DOMAIN</code></em>. Defaults to local domain.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532760"></a><h4>LOOKUP MASTER <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h4><p>Give IP of master browser for specified <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em> +or workgroup. Defaults to local domain.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532777"></a><h3>CACHE</h3><p>Samba uses a general caching interface called 'gencache'. It can be controlled using 'NET CACHE'.</p><p>All the timeout parameters support the suffixes: -</p><table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"><tr><td>s - Seconds</td></tr><tr><td>m - Minutes</td></tr><tr><td>h - Hours</td></tr><tr><td>d - Days</td></tr><tr><td>w - Weeks</td></tr></table><p> +</p><table class="simplelist" border="0" summary="Simple list"><tr><td>s - Seconds</td></tr><tr><td>m - Minutes</td></tr><tr><td>h - Hours</td></tr><tr><td>d - Days</td></tr><tr><td>w - Weeks</td></tr></table><p> -</p><div class="refsect3" title="CACHE ADD key data time-out"><a name="id2538798"></a><h4>CACHE ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>data</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>time-out</code></em></h4><p>Add specified key+data to the cache with the given timeout.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CACHE DEL key"><a name="id2538818"></a><h4>CACHE DEL <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em></h4><p>Delete key from the cache.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CACHE SET key data time-out"><a name="id2538829"></a><h4>CACHE SET <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>data</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>time-out</code></em></h4><p>Update data of existing cache entry.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CACHE SEARCH PATTERN"><a name="id2538848"></a><h4>CACHE SEARCH <em class="replaceable"><code>PATTERN</code></em></h4><p>Search for the specified pattern in the cache data.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CACHE LIST"><a name="id2538861"></a><h4>CACHE LIST</h4><p> +</p><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532813"></a><h4>CACHE ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>data</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>time-out</code></em></h4><p>Add specified key+data to the cache with the given timeout.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532832"></a><h4>CACHE DEL <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em></h4><p>Delete key from the cache.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532844"></a><h4>CACHE SET <em class="replaceable"><code>key</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>data</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>time-out</code></em></h4><p>Update data of existing cache entry.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532863"></a><h4>CACHE SEARCH <em class="replaceable"><code>PATTERN</code></em></h4><p>Search for the specified pattern in the cache data.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532875"></a><h4>CACHE LIST</h4><p> List all current items in the cache. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CACHE FLUSH"><a name="id2538871"></a><h4>CACHE FLUSH</h4><p>Remove all the current items from the cache.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="GETLOCALSID [DOMAIN]"><a name="id2538883"></a><h3>GETLOCALSID [DOMAIN]</h3><p>Prints the SID of the specified domain, or if the parameter is -omitted, the SID of the local server.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SETLOCALSID S-1-5-21-x-y-z"><a name="id2538894"></a><h3>SETLOCALSID S-1-5-21-x-y-z</h3><p>Sets SID for the local server to the specified SID.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="GETDOMAINSID"><a name="id2538905"></a><h3>GETDOMAINSID</h3><p>Prints the local machine SID and the SID of the current -domain.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SETDOMAINSID"><a name="id2538916"></a><h3>SETDOMAINSID</h3><p>Sets the SID of the current domain.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="GROUPMAP"><a name="id2538925"></a><h3>GROUPMAP</h3><p>Manage the mappings between Windows group SIDs and UNIX groups. -Common options include:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>unixgroup - Name of the UNIX group</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>ntgroup - Name of the Windows NT group (must be - resolvable to a SID</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>rid - Unsigned 32-bit integer</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>sid - Full SID in the form of "S-1-..."</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>type - Type of the group; either 'domain', 'local', - or 'builtin'</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>comment - Freeform text description of the group</p></li></ul></div><div class="refsect3" title="GROUPMAP ADD"><a name="id2538968"></a><h4>GROUPMAP ADD</h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532886"></a><h4>CACHE FLUSH</h4><p>Remove all the current items from the cache.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532897"></a><h3>GETLOCALSID [DOMAIN]</h3><p>Prints the SID of the specified domain, or if the parameter is +omitted, the SID of the local server.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532909"></a><h3>SETLOCALSID S-1-5-21-x-y-z</h3><p>Sets SID for the local server to the specified SID.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532919"></a><h3>GETDOMAINSID</h3><p>Prints the local machine SID and the SID of the current +domain.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532930"></a><h3>SETDOMAINSID</h3><p>Sets the SID of the current domain.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532940"></a><h3>GROUPMAP</h3><p>Manage the mappings between Windows group SIDs and UNIX groups. +Common options include:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>unixgroup - Name of the UNIX group</p></li><li><p>ntgroup - Name of the Windows NT group (must be + resolvable to a SID</p></li><li><p>rid - Unsigned 32-bit integer</p></li><li><p>sid - Full SID in the form of "S-1-..."</p></li><li><p>type - Type of the group; either 'domain', 'local', + or 'builtin'</p></li><li><p>comment - Freeform text description of the group</p></li></ul></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2532983"></a><h4>GROUPMAP ADD</h4><p> Add a new group mapping entry: </p><pre class="programlisting"> net groupmap add {rid=int|sid=string} unixgroup=string \ [type={domain|local}] [ntgroup=string] [comment=string] </pre><p> -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="GROUPMAP DELETE"><a name="id2538985"></a><h4>GROUPMAP DELETE</h4><p>Delete a group mapping entry. If more than one group name matches, the first entry found is deleted.</p><p>net groupmap delete {ntgroup=string|sid=SID}</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="GROUPMAP MODIFY"><a name="id2539001"></a><h4>GROUPMAP MODIFY</h4><p>Update en existing group entry.</p><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533000"></a><h4>GROUPMAP DELETE</h4><p>Delete a group mapping entry. If more than one group name matches, the first entry found is deleted.</p><p>net groupmap delete {ntgroup=string|sid=SID}</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533015"></a><h4>GROUPMAP MODIFY</h4><p>Update en existing group entry.</p><p> </p><pre class="programlisting"> net groupmap modify {ntgroup=string|sid=SID} [unixgroup=string] \ [comment=string] [type={domain|local}] </pre><p> -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="GROUPMAP LIST"><a name="id2539021"></a><h4>GROUPMAP LIST</h4><p>List existing group mapping entries.</p><p>net groupmap list [verbose] [ntgroup=string] [sid=SID]</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="MAXRID"><a name="id2539037"></a><h3>MAXRID</h3><p>Prints out the highest RID currently in use on the local +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533035"></a><h4>GROUPMAP LIST</h4><p>List existing group mapping entries.</p><p>net groupmap list [verbose] [ntgroup=string] [sid=SID]</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533051"></a><h3>MAXRID</h3><p>Prints out the highest RID currently in use on the local server (by the active 'passdb backend'). -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="RPC INFO"><a name="id2539048"></a><h3>RPC INFO</h3><p>Print information about the domain of the remote server, +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533062"></a><h3>RPC INFO</h3><p>Print information about the domain of the remote server, such as domain name, domain sid and number of users and groups. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="[RPC|ADS] TESTJOIN"><a name="id2539060"></a><h3>[RPC|ADS] TESTJOIN</h3><p>Check whether participation in a domain is still valid.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="[RPC|ADS] CHANGETRUSTPW"><a name="id2539070"></a><h3>[RPC|ADS] CHANGETRUSTPW</h3><p>Force change of domain trust password.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="RPC TRUSTDOM"><a name="id2539081"></a><h3>RPC TRUSTDOM</h3><div class="refsect3" title="RPC TRUSTDOM ADD DOMAIN"><a name="id2539086"></a><h4>RPC TRUSTDOM ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h4><p>Add a interdomain trust account for <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em>. +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533074"></a><h3>[RPC|ADS] TESTJOIN</h3><p>Check whether participation in a domain is still valid.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533085"></a><h3>[RPC|ADS] CHANGETRUSTPW</h3><p>Force change of domain trust password.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533095"></a><h3>RPC TRUSTDOM</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533101"></a><h4>RPC TRUSTDOM ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h4><p>Add a interdomain trust account for <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em>. This is in fact a Samba account named <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN$</code></em> with the account flag <code class="constant">'I'</code> (interdomain trust account). If the command is used against localhost it has the same effect as <code class="literal">smbpasswd -a -i DOMAIN</code>. Please note that both commands expect a appropriate UNIX account. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="RPC TRUSTDOM DEL DOMAIN"><a name="id2539117"></a><h4>RPC TRUSTDOM DEL <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h4><p>Remove interdomain trust account for +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533132"></a><h4>RPC TRUSTDOM DEL <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h4><p>Remove interdomain trust account for <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em>. If it is used against localhost it has the same effect as <code class="literal">smbpasswd -x DOMAIN$</code>. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="RPC TRUSTDOM ESTABLISH DOMAIN"><a name="id2539139"></a><h4>RPC TRUSTDOM ESTABLISH <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533154"></a><h4>RPC TRUSTDOM ESTABLISH <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h4><p> Establish a trust relationship to a trusting domain. Interdomain account must already be created on the remote PDC. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="RPC TRUSTDOM REVOKE DOMAIN"><a name="id2539153"></a><h4>RPC TRUSTDOM REVOKE <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h4><p>Abandon relationship to trusted domain</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="RPC TRUSTDOM LIST"><a name="id2539166"></a><h4>RPC TRUSTDOM LIST</h4><p>List all current interdomain trust relationships.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="RPC RIGHTS"><a name="id2539176"></a><h4>RPC RIGHTS</h4><p>This subcommand is used to view and manage Samba's rights assignments (also +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533168"></a><h4>RPC TRUSTDOM REVOKE <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em></h4><p>Abandon relationship to trusted domain</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533180"></a><h4>RPC TRUSTDOM LIST</h4><p>List all current interdomain trust relationships.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533191"></a><h4>RPC RIGHTS</h4><p>This subcommand is used to view and manage Samba's rights assignments (also referred to as privileges). There are three options currently available: <em class="parameter"><code>list</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>grant</code></em>, and <em class="parameter"><code>revoke</code></em>. More details on Samba's privilege model and its use -can be found in the Samba-HOWTO-Collection.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="RPC ABORTSHUTDOWN"><a name="id2539207"></a><h3>RPC ABORTSHUTDOWN</h3><p>Abort the shutdown of a remote server.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="RPC SHUTDOWN [-t timeout] [-r] [-f] [-C message]"><a name="id2539217"></a><h3>RPC SHUTDOWN [-t timeout] [-r] [-f] [-C message]</h3><p>Shut down the remote server.</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-r</span></dt><dd><p> +can be found in the Samba-HOWTO-Collection.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533222"></a><h3>RPC ABORTSHUTDOWN</h3><p>Abort the shutdown of a remote server.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533232"></a><h3>RPC SHUTDOWN [-t timeout] [-r] [-f] [-C message]</h3><p>Shut down the remote server.</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-r</span></dt><dd><p> Reboot after shutdown. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-f</span></dt><dd><p> Force shutting down all applications. @@ -167,23 +167,23 @@ Force shutting down all applications. Timeout before system will be shut down. An interactive user of the system can use this time to cancel the shutdown. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-C message</span></dt><dd><p>Display the specified message on the screen to -announce the shutdown.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="RPC SAMDUMP"><a name="id2539278"></a><h3>RPC SAMDUMP</h3><p>Print out sam database of remote server. You need -to run this against the PDC, from a Samba machine joined as a BDC. </p></div><div class="refsect2" title="RPC VAMPIRE"><a name="id2539290"></a><h3>RPC VAMPIRE</h3><p>Export users, aliases and groups from remote server to +announce the shutdown.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533293"></a><h3>RPC SAMDUMP</h3><p>Print out sam database of remote server. You need +to run this against the PDC, from a Samba machine joined as a BDC. </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533305"></a><h3>RPC VAMPIRE</h3><p>Export users, aliases and groups from remote server to local server. You need to run this against the PDC, from a Samba machine joined as a BDC. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="RPC VAMPIRE KEYTAB"><a name="id2539302"></a><h3>RPC VAMPIRE KEYTAB</h3><p>Dump remote SAM database to local Kerberos keytab file. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="RPC VAMPIRE LDIF"><a name="id2539313"></a><h3>RPC VAMPIRE LDIF</h3><p>Dump remote SAM database to local LDIF file or standard output. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="RPC GETSID"><a name="id2539324"></a><h3>RPC GETSID</h3><p>Fetch domain SID and store it in the local <code class="filename">secrets.tdb</code>. </p></div><div class="refsect2" title="ADS LEAVE"><a name="id2539339"></a><h3>ADS LEAVE</h3><p>Make the remote host leave the domain it is part of. </p></div><div class="refsect2" title="ADS STATUS"><a name="id2539350"></a><h3>ADS STATUS</h3><p>Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS. +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533317"></a><h3>RPC VAMPIRE KEYTAB</h3><p>Dump remote SAM database to local Kerberos keytab file. +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533328"></a><h3>RPC VAMPIRE LDIF</h3><p>Dump remote SAM database to local LDIF file or standard output. +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533339"></a><h3>RPC GETSID</h3><p>Fetch domain SID and store it in the local <code class="filename">secrets.tdb</code>. </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533354"></a><h3>ADS LEAVE</h3><p>Make the remote host leave the domain it is part of. </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533365"></a><h3>ADS STATUS</h3><p>Print out status of machine account of the local machine in ADS. Prints out quite some debug info. Aimed at developers, regular -users should use <code class="literal">NET ADS TESTJOIN</code>.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="ADS PRINTER"><a name="id2539367"></a><h3>ADS PRINTER</h3><div class="refsect3" title="ADS PRINTER INFO [PRINTER] [SERVER]"><a name="id2539372"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER INFO [<em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em>] [<em class="replaceable"><code>SERVER</code></em>]</h4><p> +users should use <code class="literal">NET ADS TESTJOIN</code>.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533382"></a><h3>ADS PRINTER</h3><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533388"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER INFO [<em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em>] [<em class="replaceable"><code>SERVER</code></em>]</h4><p> Lookup info for <em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em> on <em class="replaceable"><code>SERVER</code></em>. The printer name defaults to "*", the -server name defaults to the local host.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="ADS PRINTER PUBLISH PRINTER"><a name="id2539396"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER PUBLISH <em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em></h4><p>Publish specified printer using ADS.</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="ADS PRINTER REMOVE PRINTER"><a name="id2539409"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER REMOVE <em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em></h4><p>Remove specified printer from ADS directory.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="ADS SEARCH EXPRESSION ATTRIBUTES..."><a name="id2539423"></a><h3>ADS SEARCH <em class="replaceable"><code>EXPRESSION</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>ATTRIBUTES...</code></em></h3><p>Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The +server name defaults to the local host.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533412"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER PUBLISH <em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em></h4><p>Publish specified printer using ADS.</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533424"></a><h4>ADS PRINTER REMOVE <em class="replaceable"><code>PRINTER</code></em></h4><p>Remove specified printer from ADS directory.</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533438"></a><h3>ADS SEARCH <em class="replaceable"><code>EXPRESSION</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>ATTRIBUTES...</code></em></h3><p>Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The expression is a standard LDAP search expression, and the attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the results.</p><p>Example: <strong class="userinput"><code>net ads search '(objectCategory=group)' sAMAccountName</code></strong> -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="ADS DN DN (attributes)"><a name="id2539450"></a><h3>ADS DN <em class="replaceable"><code>DN</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>(attributes)</code></em></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533465"></a><h3>ADS DN <em class="replaceable"><code>DN</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>(attributes)</code></em></h3><p> Perform a raw LDAP search on a ADS server and dump the results. The DN standard LDAP DN, and the attributes are a list of LDAP fields to show in the result. -</p><p>Example: <strong class="userinput"><code>net ads dn 'CN=administrator,CN=Users,DC=my,DC=domain' SAMAccountName</code></strong></p></div><div class="refsect2" title="ADS WORKGROUP"><a name="id2539477"></a><h3>ADS WORKGROUP</h3><p>Print out workgroup name for specified kerberos realm.</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM CREATEBUILTINGROUP <NAME>"><a name="id2539487"></a><h3>SAM CREATEBUILTINGROUP <NAME></h3><p> +</p><p>Example: <strong class="userinput"><code>net ads dn 'CN=administrator,CN=Users,DC=my,DC=domain' SAMAccountName</code></strong></p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533492"></a><h3>ADS WORKGROUP</h3><p>Print out workgroup name for specified kerberos realm.</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533502"></a><h3>SAM CREATEBUILTINGROUP <NAME></h3><p> (Re)Create a BUILTIN group. Only a wellknown set of BUILTIN groups can be created with this command. This is the list of currently recognized group names: Administrators, @@ -193,84 +193,84 @@ compatible Access. This command requires a running Winbindd with idmap allocation properly configured. The group gid will be allocated out of the winbindd range. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM CREATELOCALGROUP <NAME>"><a name="id2539506"></a><h3>SAM CREATELOCALGROUP <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533521"></a><h3>SAM CREATELOCALGROUP <NAME></h3><p> Create a LOCAL group (also known as Alias). This command requires a running Winbindd with idmap allocation properly configured. The group gid will be allocated out of the winbindd range. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM DELETELOCALGROUP <NAME>"><a name="id2539520"></a><h3>SAM DELETELOCALGROUP <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533535"></a><h3>SAM DELETELOCALGROUP <NAME></h3><p> Delete an existing LOCAL group (also known as Alias). -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM MAPUNIXGROUP <NAME>"><a name="id2539531"></a><h3>SAM MAPUNIXGROUP <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533547"></a><h3>SAM MAPUNIXGROUP <NAME></h3><p> Map an existing Unix group and make it a Domain Group, the domain group will have the same name. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM UNMAPUNIXGROUP <NAME>"><a name="id2539544"></a><h3>SAM UNMAPUNIXGROUP <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533559"></a><h3>SAM UNMAPUNIXGROUP <NAME></h3><p> Remove an existing group mapping entry. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM ADDMEM <GROUP> <MEMBER>"><a name="id2539555"></a><h3>SAM ADDMEM <GROUP> <MEMBER></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533570"></a><h3>SAM ADDMEM <GROUP> <MEMBER></h3><p> Add a member to a Local group. The group can be specified only by name, the member can be specified by name or SID. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM DELMEM <GROUP> <MEMBER>"><a name="id2539568"></a><h3>SAM DELMEM <GROUP> <MEMBER></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533583"></a><h3>SAM DELMEM <GROUP> <MEMBER></h3><p> Remove a member from a Local group. The group and the member must be specified by name. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM LISTMEM <GROUP>"><a name="id2539580"></a><h3>SAM LISTMEM <GROUP></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533595"></a><h3>SAM LISTMEM <GROUP></h3><p> List Local group members. The group must be specified by name. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM LIST <users|groups|localgroups|builtin|workstations> [verbose]"><a name="id2539591"></a><h3>SAM LIST <users|groups|localgroups|builtin|workstations> [verbose]</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533606"></a><h3>SAM LIST <users|groups|localgroups|builtin|workstations> [verbose]</h3><p> List the specified set of accounts by name. If verbose is specified, the rid and description is also provided for each account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM RIGHTS LIST"><a name="id2539605"></a><h3>SAM RIGHTS LIST</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533620"></a><h3>SAM RIGHTS LIST</h3><p> List all available privileges. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM RIGHTS GRANT <NAME> <PRIVILEGE>"><a name="id2539615"></a><h3>SAM RIGHTS GRANT <NAME> <PRIVILEGE></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533630"></a><h3>SAM RIGHTS GRANT <NAME> <PRIVILEGE></h3><p> Grant one or more privileges to a user. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM RIGHTS REVOKE <NAME> <PRIVILEGE>"><a name="id2539626"></a><h3>SAM RIGHTS REVOKE <NAME> <PRIVILEGE></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533642"></a><h3>SAM RIGHTS REVOKE <NAME> <PRIVILEGE></h3><p> Revoke one or more privileges from a user. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SHOW <NAME>"><a name="id2539638"></a><h3>SAM SHOW <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533653"></a><h3>SAM SHOW <NAME></h3><p> Show the full DOMAIN\\NAME the SID and the type for the corresponding account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET HOMEDIR <NAME> <DIRECTORY>"><a name="id2539649"></a><h3>SAM SET HOMEDIR <NAME> <DIRECTORY></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533664"></a><h3>SAM SET HOMEDIR <NAME> <DIRECTORY></h3><p> Set the home directory for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET PROFILEPATH <NAME> <PATH>"><a name="id2539660"></a><h3>SAM SET PROFILEPATH <NAME> <PATH></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533675"></a><h3>SAM SET PROFILEPATH <NAME> <PATH></h3><p> Set the profile path for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET COMMENT <NAME> <COMMENT>"><a name="id2539671"></a><h3>SAM SET COMMENT <NAME> <COMMENT></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533686"></a><h3>SAM SET COMMENT <NAME> <COMMENT></h3><p> Set the comment for a user or group account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET FULLNAME <NAME> <FULL NAME>"><a name="id2539682"></a><h3>SAM SET FULLNAME <NAME> <FULL NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533698"></a><h3>SAM SET FULLNAME <NAME> <FULL NAME></h3><p> Set the full name for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET LOGONSCRIPT <NAME> <SCRIPT>"><a name="id2539694"></a><h3>SAM SET LOGONSCRIPT <NAME> <SCRIPT></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533709"></a><h3>SAM SET LOGONSCRIPT <NAME> <SCRIPT></h3><p> Set the logon script for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET HOMEDRIVE <NAME> <DRIVE>"><a name="id2539705"></a><h3>SAM SET HOMEDRIVE <NAME> <DRIVE></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533720"></a><h3>SAM SET HOMEDRIVE <NAME> <DRIVE></h3><p> Set the home drive for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET WORKSTATIONS <NAME> <WORKSTATIONS>"><a name="id2539716"></a><h3>SAM SET WORKSTATIONS <NAME> <WORKSTATIONS></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533731"></a><h3>SAM SET WORKSTATIONS <NAME> <WORKSTATIONS></h3><p> Set the workstations a user account is allowed to log in from. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET DISABLE <NAME>"><a name="id2539728"></a><h3>SAM SET DISABLE <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533743"></a><h3>SAM SET DISABLE <NAME></h3><p> Set the "disabled" flag for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET PWNOTREQ <NAME>"><a name="id2539739"></a><h3>SAM SET PWNOTREQ <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533754"></a><h3>SAM SET PWNOTREQ <NAME></h3><p> Set the "password not required" flag for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET AUTOLOCK <NAME>"><a name="id2539750"></a><h3>SAM SET AUTOLOCK <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533766"></a><h3>SAM SET AUTOLOCK <NAME></h3><p> Set the "autolock" flag for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET PWNOEXP <NAME>"><a name="id2539762"></a><h3>SAM SET PWNOEXP <NAME></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533777"></a><h3>SAM SET PWNOEXP <NAME></h3><p> Set the "password do not expire" flag for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM SET PWDMUSTCHANGENOW <NAME> [yes|no]"><a name="id2539773"></a><h3>SAM SET PWDMUSTCHANGENOW <NAME> [yes|no]</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533788"></a><h3>SAM SET PWDMUSTCHANGENOW <NAME> [yes|no]</h3><p> Set or unset the "password must change" flag for a user account. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM POLICY LIST"><a name="id2539785"></a><h3>SAM POLICY LIST</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533800"></a><h3>SAM POLICY LIST</h3><p> List the available account policies. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM POLICY SHOW <account policy>"><a name="id2539795"></a><h3>SAM POLICY SHOW <account policy></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533811"></a><h3>SAM POLICY SHOW <account policy></h3><p> Show the account policy value. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM POLICY SET <account policy> <value>"><a name="id2539806"></a><h3>SAM POLICY SET <account policy> <value></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533822"></a><h3>SAM POLICY SET <account policy> <value></h3><p> Set a value for the account policy. Valid values can be: "forever", "never", "off", or a number. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAM PROVISION"><a name="id2539819"></a><h3>SAM PROVISION</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533834"></a><h3>SAM PROVISION</h3><p> Only available if ldapsam:editposix is set and winbindd is running. Properly populates the ldap tree with the basic accounts (Administrator) and groups (Domain Users, Domain Admins, Domain Guests) on the ldap tree. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="IDMAP DUMP <local tdb file name>"><a name="id2539832"></a><h3>IDMAP DUMP <local tdb file name></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533848"></a><h3>IDMAP DUMP <local tdb file name></h3><p> Dumps the mappings contained in the local tdb file specified. This command is useful to dump only the mappings produced by the idmap_tdb backend. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="IDMAP RESTORE [input file]"><a name="id2539846"></a><h3>IDMAP RESTORE [input file]</h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533861"></a><h3>IDMAP RESTORE [input file]</h3><p> Restore the mappings from the specified file or stdin. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="IDMAP SECRET <DOMAIN>|ALLOC <secret>"><a name="id2539857"></a><h3>IDMAP SECRET <DOMAIN>|ALLOC <secret></h3><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533872"></a><h3>IDMAP SECRET <DOMAIN>|ALLOC <secret></h3><p> Store a secret for the specified domain, used primarily for domains that use idmap_ldap as a backend. In this case the secret is used as the password for the user DN used to bind to the ldap server. -</p></div><div class="refsect2" title="USERSHARE"><a name="id2539871"></a><h3>USERSHARE</h3><p>Starting with version 3.0.23, a Samba server now supports the ability for +</p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533886"></a><h3>USERSHARE</h3><p>Starting with version 3.0.23, a Samba server now supports the ability for non-root users to add user defined shares to be exported using the "net usershare" commands. </p><p> @@ -297,9 +297,9 @@ To allow 100 usershare definitions. Now, members of the UNIX group "serverops" can create user defined shares on demand using the commands below. </p><p>The usershare commands are: -</p><table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"><tr><td>net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]] - to add or change a user defined share.</td></tr><tr><td>net usershare delete sharename - to delete a user defined share.</td></tr><tr><td>net usershare info [-l|--long] [wildcard sharename] - to print info about a user defined share.</td></tr><tr><td>net usershare list [-l|--long] [wildcard sharename] - to list user defined shares.</td></tr></table><p> +</p><table class="simplelist" border="0" summary="Simple list"><tr><td>net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]] - to add or change a user defined share.</td></tr><tr><td>net usershare delete sharename - to delete a user defined share.</td></tr><tr><td>net usershare info [-l|--long] [wildcard sharename] - to print info about a user defined share.</td></tr><tr><td>net usershare list [-l|--long] [wildcard sharename] - to list user defined shares.</td></tr></table><p> -</p><div class="refsect3" title="USERSHARE ADD sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]]"><a name="id2539944"></a><h4>USERSHARE ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[comment]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[acl]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[guest_ok=[y|n]]</code></em></h4><p> +</p><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2533959"></a><h4>USERSHARE ADD <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[comment]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[acl]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[guest_ok=[y|n]]</code></em></h4><p> Add or replace a new user defined share, with name "sharename". </p><p> "path" specifies the absolute pathname on the system to be exported. @@ -336,11 +336,11 @@ sharename as the one you wish to modify and specify the new options you wish. The Samba smbd daemon notices user defined share modifications at connect time so will see the change immediately, there is no need to restart smbd on adding, deleting or changing a user defined share. -</div><div class="refsect3" title="USERSHARE DELETE sharename"><a name="id2540016"></a><h4>USERSHARE DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> +</div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534031"></a><h4>USERSHARE DELETE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> Deletes the user defined share by name. The Samba smbd daemon immediately notices this change, although it will not disconnect any users currently connected to the deleted share. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="USERSHARE INFO [-l|--long] [wildcard sharename]"><a name="id2540031"></a><h4>USERSHARE INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>[-l|--long]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[wildcard sharename]</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534046"></a><h4>USERSHARE INFO <em class="replaceable"><code>[-l|--long]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[wildcard sharename]</code></em></h4><p> Get info on user defined shares owned by the current user matching the given pattern, or all users. </p><p> net usershare info on its own dumps out info on the user defined shares that were @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ guest_ok=n And is a list of the current settings of the user defined share that can be modified by the "net usershare add" command. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="USERSHARE LIST [-l|--long] wildcard sharename"><a name="id2540071"></a><h4>USERSHARE LIST <em class="replaceable"><code>[-l|--long]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>wildcard sharename</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534086"></a><h4>USERSHARE LIST <em class="replaceable"><code>[-l|--long]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>wildcard sharename</code></em></h4><p> List all the user defined shares owned by the current user matching the given pattern, or all users. </p><p> net usershare list on its own list out the names of the user defined shares that were @@ -367,28 +367,28 @@ created by the current user, or restricts the list to share names that match the wildcard pattern ('*' matches one or more characters, '?' matches only one character). If the '-l' or '--long' option is also given, it includes the names of user defined shares created by other users. -</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="CONF"><a name="id2540098"></a><h3>CONF</h3><p>Starting with version 3.2.0, a Samba server can be configured by data +</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2534113"></a><h3>CONF</h3><p>Starting with version 3.2.0, a Samba server can be configured by data stored in registry. This configuration data can be edited with the new "net conf" commands. </p><p> The deployment of this configuration data can be activated in two levels from the <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span> file: Share definitions from registry are activated by setting <em class="parameter"><code>registry shares</code></em> to -<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">yes</span>”</span> in the [global] section and global configuration options are +“<span class="quote">yes</span>” in the [global] section and global configuration options are activated by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INCLUDE" target="_top">include = registry</a> in the [global] section for a mixed configuration or by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CONFIGBACKEND" target="_top">config backend = registry</a> in the [global] section for a registry-only configuration. See the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> manpage for details. </p><p>The conf commands are: -</p><table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"><tr><td>net conf list - Dump the complete configuration in smb.conf like +</p><table class="simplelist" border="0" summary="Simple list"><tr><td>net conf list - Dump the complete configuration in smb.conf like format.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf import - Import configuration from file in smb.conf format.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf listshares - List the registry shares.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf drop - Delete the complete configuration from registry.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf showshare - Show the definition of a registry share.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf addshare - Create a new registry share.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf delshare - Delete a registry share.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf setparm - Store a parameter.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf getparm - Retrieve the value of a parameter.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf delparm - Delete a parameter.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf getincludes - Show the includes of a share definition.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf setincludes - Set includes for a share.</td></tr><tr><td>net conf delincludes - Delete includes from a share definition.</td></tr></table><p> -</p><div class="refsect3" title="CONF LIST"><a name="id2540219"></a><h4>CONF LIST</h4><p> +</p><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534234"></a><h4>CONF LIST</h4><p> Print the configuration data stored in the registry in a smb.conf-like format to standard output. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF IMPORT [--test|-T] filename [section]"><a name="id2540230"></a><h4>CONF IMPORT <em class="replaceable"><code>[--test|-T]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[section]</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534245"></a><h4>CONF IMPORT <em class="replaceable"><code>[--test|-T]</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>[section]</code></em></h4><p> This command imports configuration from a file in smb.conf format. If a section encountered in the input file is present in registry, its contents is replaced. Sections of registry configuration that have @@ -398,30 +398,30 @@ Optionally, a section may be specified to restrict the effect of the import command to that specific section. A test mode is enabled by specifying the parameter "-T" on the commandline. In test mode, no changes are made to the registry, and the resulting configuration is printed to standard output instead. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF LISTSHARES"><a name="id2540270"></a><h4>CONF LISTSHARES</h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534286"></a><h4>CONF LISTSHARES</h4><p> List the names of the shares defined in registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF DROP"><a name="id2540281"></a><h4>CONF DROP</h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534296"></a><h4>CONF DROP</h4><p> Delete the complete configuration data from registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF SHOWSHARE sharename"><a name="id2540292"></a><h4>CONF SHOWSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534307"></a><h4>CONF SHOWSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> Show the definition of the share or section specified. It is valid to specify "global" as sharename to retrieve the global configuration options from registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF ADDSHARE sharename path [writeable={y|N} [guest_ok={y|N} [comment]]]"><a name="id2540306"></a><h4>CONF ADDSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>writeable={y|N}</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>guest_ok={y|N}</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em>]]] </h4><p>Create a new share definition in registry. +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534321"></a><h4>CONF ADDSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>path</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>writeable={y|N}</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>guest_ok={y|N}</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>comment</code></em>]]] </h4><p>Create a new share definition in registry. The sharename and path have to be given. The share name may <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> be "global". Optionally, values for the very common options "writeable", "guest ok" and a "comment" may be specified. The same result may be obtained by a sequence of "net conf setparm" commands. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF DELSHARE sharename"><a name="id2540340"></a><h4>CONF DELSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534356"></a><h4>CONF DELSHARE <em class="replaceable"><code>sharename</code></em></h4><p> Delete a share definition from registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF SETPARM section parameter value"><a name="id2540353"></a><h4>CONF SETPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>value</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534368"></a><h4>CONF SETPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>value</code></em></h4><p> Store a parameter in registry. The section may be global or a sharename. The section is created if it does not exist yet. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF GETPARM section parameter"><a name="id2540373"></a><h4>CONF GETPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534388"></a><h4>CONF GETPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em></h4><p> Show a parameter stored in registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF DELPARM section parameter"><a name="id2540389"></a><h4>CONF DELPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534404"></a><h4>CONF DELPARM <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>parameter</code></em></h4><p> Delete a parameter stored in registry. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF GETINCLUDES section"><a name="id2540405"></a><h4>CONF GETINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534420"></a><h4>CONF GETINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em></h4><p> Get the list of includes for the provided section (global or share). </p><p> Note that due to the nature of the registry database and the nature of include directives, @@ -437,69 +437,69 @@ per share, and this list is evaluated after all the parameters of the share. Further note that currently, only files can be included from registry configuration. In the future, there will be the ability to include configuration data from other registry keys. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF SETINCLUDES section [filename]+"><a name="id2540440"></a><h4>CONF SETINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em>]+</h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534455"></a><h4>CONF SETINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em> [<em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em>]+</h4><p> Set the list of includes for the provided section (global or share) to the given list of one or more filenames. The filenames may contain the usual smb.conf macros like %I. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="CONF DELINCLUDES section"><a name="id2540459"></a><h4>CONF DELINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534474"></a><h4>CONF DELINCLUDES <em class="replaceable"><code>section</code></em></h4><p> Delete the list of includes from the provided section (global or share). -</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="EVENTLOG"><a name="id2540473"></a><h3>EVENTLOG</h3><p>Starting with version 3.4.0 net can read, dump, import and export native +</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2534488"></a><h3>EVENTLOG</h3><p>Starting with version 3.4.0 net can read, dump, import and export native win32 eventlog files (usually *.evt). evt files are used by the native Windows eventviewer tools. </p><p> The import and export of evt files can only succeed when <em class="parameter"><code>eventlog list</code></em> is used in <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span> file. See the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> manpage for details. </p><p>The eventlog commands are: -</p><table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"><tr><td>net eventlog dump - Dump a eventlog *.evt file on the screen.</td></tr><tr><td>net eventlog import - Import a eventlog *.evt into the samba internal +</p><table class="simplelist" border="0" summary="Simple list"><tr><td>net eventlog dump - Dump a eventlog *.evt file on the screen.</td></tr><tr><td>net eventlog import - Import a eventlog *.evt into the samba internal tdb based representation of eventlogs.</td></tr><tr><td>net eventlog export - Export the samba internal tdb based representation of eventlogs into an eventlog *.evt file.</td></tr></table><p> -</p><div class="refsect3" title="EVENTLOG DUMP filename"><a name="id2540528"></a><h4>EVENTLOG DUMP <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em></h4><p> +</p><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534543"></a><h4>EVENTLOG DUMP <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em></h4><p> Prints a eventlog *.evt file to standard output. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="EVENTLOG IMPORT filename eventlog"><a name="id2540540"></a><h4>EVENTLOG IMPORT <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>eventlog</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534555"></a><h4>EVENTLOG IMPORT <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>eventlog</code></em></h4><p> Imports a eventlog *.evt file defined by <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em> into the samba internal tdb representation of eventlog defined by <em class="replaceable"><code>eventlog</code></em>. <em class="replaceable"><code>eventlog</code></em> needs to part of the <em class="parameter"><code>eventlog list</code></em> defined in smb.conf. See the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> manpage for details. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="EVENTLOG EXPORT filename eventlog"><a name="id2540580"></a><h4>EVENTLOG EXPORT <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>eventlog</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534595"></a><h4>EVENTLOG EXPORT <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>eventlog</code></em></h4><p> Exports the samba internal tdb representation of eventlog defined by <em class="replaceable"><code>eventlog</code></em> to a eventlog *.evt file defined by <em class="replaceable"><code>filename</code></em>. <em class="replaceable"><code>eventlog</code></em> needs to part of the <em class="parameter"><code>eventlog list</code></em> defined in smb.conf. See the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> manpage for details. -</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="DOM"><a name="id2540621"></a><h3>DOM</h3><p>Starting with version 3.2.0 Samba has support for remote join and unjoin APIs, both client and server-side. Windows supports remote join capabilities since Windows 2000. +</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2534636"></a><h3>DOM</h3><p>Starting with version 3.2.0 Samba has support for remote join and unjoin APIs, both client and server-side. Windows supports remote join capabilities since Windows 2000. </p><p>In order for Samba to be joined or unjoined remotely an account must be used that is either member of the Domain Admins group, a member of the local Administrators group or a user that is granted the SeMachineAccountPrivilege privilege. </p><p>The client side support for remote join is implemented in the net dom commands which are: -</p><table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"><tr><td>net dom join - Join a remote computer into a domain.</td></tr><tr><td>net dom unjoin - Unjoin a remote computer from a domain.</td></tr><tr><td>net dom renamecomputer - Renames a remote computer joined to a domain.</td></tr></table><p> -</p><div class="refsect3" title="DOM JOIN domain=DOMAIN ou=OU account=ACCOUNT password=PASSWORD reboot"><a name="id2540663"></a><h4>DOM JOIN <em class="replaceable"><code>domain=DOMAIN</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>ou=OU</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>account=ACCOUNT</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>password=PASSWORD</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>reboot</code></em></h4><p> +</p><table class="simplelist" border="0" summary="Simple list"><tr><td>net dom join - Join a remote computer into a domain.</td></tr><tr><td>net dom unjoin - Unjoin a remote computer from a domain.</td></tr><tr><td>net dom renamecomputer - Renames a remote computer joined to a domain.</td></tr></table><p> +</p><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534678"></a><h4>DOM JOIN <em class="replaceable"><code>domain=DOMAIN</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>ou=OU</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>account=ACCOUNT</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>password=PASSWORD</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>reboot</code></em></h4><p> Joins a computer into a domain. This command supports the following additional parameters: -</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em> can be a NetBIOS domain name (also known as short domain name) or a DNS domain name for Active Directory Domains. As in Windows, it is also possible to control which Domain Controller to use. This can be achieved by appending the DC name using the \ separator character. Example: MYDOM\MYDC. The <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em> parameter cannot be NULL.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>OU</code></em> can be set to a RFC 1779 LDAP DN, like <span class="emphasis"><em>ou=mymachines,cn=Users,dc=example,dc=com</em></span> in order to create the machine account in a non-default LDAP containter. This optional parameter is only supported when joining Active Directory Domains.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em> defines a domain account that will be used to join the machine to the domain. This domain account needs to have sufficient privileges to join machines.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>PASSWORD</code></em> defines the password for the domain account defined with <em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em>.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>REBOOT</code></em> is an optional parameter that can be set to reboot the remote machine after successful join to the domain.</p></li></ul></div><p> +</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em> can be a NetBIOS domain name (also known as short domain name) or a DNS domain name for Active Directory Domains. As in Windows, it is also possible to control which Domain Controller to use. This can be achieved by appending the DC name using the \ separator character. Example: MYDOM\MYDC. The <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN</code></em> parameter cannot be NULL.</p></li><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>OU</code></em> can be set to a RFC 1779 LDAP DN, like <span class="emphasis"><em>ou=mymachines,cn=Users,dc=example,dc=com</em></span> in order to create the machine account in a non-default LDAP containter. This optional parameter is only supported when joining Active Directory Domains.</p></li><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em> defines a domain account that will be used to join the machine to the domain. This domain account needs to have sufficient privileges to join machines.</p></li><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>PASSWORD</code></em> defines the password for the domain account defined with <em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em>.</p></li><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>REBOOT</code></em> is an optional parameter that can be set to reboot the remote machine after successful join to the domain.</p></li></ul></div><p> Note that you also need to use standard net parameters to connect and authenticate to the remote machine that you want to join. These additional parameters include: -S computer and -U user. </p><p> Example: net dom join -S xp -U XP\\administrator%secret domain=MYDOM account=MYDOM\\administrator password=topsecret reboot. </p><p> This example would connect to a computer named XP as the local administrator using password secret, and join the computer into a domain called MYDOM using the MYDOM domain administrator account and password topsecret. After successful join, the computer would reboot. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="DOM UNJOIN account=ACCOUNT password=PASSWORD reboot"><a name="id2540769"></a><h4>DOM UNJOIN <em class="replaceable"><code>account=ACCOUNT</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>password=PASSWORD</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>reboot</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534784"></a><h4>DOM UNJOIN <em class="replaceable"><code>account=ACCOUNT</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>password=PASSWORD</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>reboot</code></em></h4><p> Unjoins a computer from a domain. This command supports the following additional parameters: -</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em> defines a domain account that will be used to unjoin the machine from the domain. This domain account needs to have sufficient privileges to unjoin machines.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>PASSWORD</code></em> defines the password for the domain account defined with <em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em>.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>REBOOT</code></em> is an optional parameter that can be set to reboot the remote machine after successful unjoin from the domain.</p></li></ul></div><p> +</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em> defines a domain account that will be used to unjoin the machine from the domain. This domain account needs to have sufficient privileges to unjoin machines.</p></li><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>PASSWORD</code></em> defines the password for the domain account defined with <em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em>.</p></li><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>REBOOT</code></em> is an optional parameter that can be set to reboot the remote machine after successful unjoin from the domain.</p></li></ul></div><p> Note that you also need to use standard net parameters to connect and authenticate to the remote machine that you want to unjoin. These additional parameters include: -S computer and -U user. </p><p> Example: net dom unjoin -S xp -U XP\\administrator%secret account=MYDOM\\administrator password=topsecret reboot. </p><p> This example would connect to a computer named XP as the local administrator using password secret, and unjoin the computer from the domain using the MYDOM domain administrator account and password topsecret. After successful unjoin, the computer would reboot. -</p></div><div class="refsect3" title="DOM RENAMECOMPUTER newname=NEWNAME account=ACCOUNT password=PASSWORD reboot"><a name="id2540840"></a><h4>DOM RENAMECOMPUTER <em class="replaceable"><code>newname=NEWNAME</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>account=ACCOUNT</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>password=PASSWORD</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>reboot</code></em></h4><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect3" lang="en"><a name="id2534855"></a><h4>DOM RENAMECOMPUTER <em class="replaceable"><code>newname=NEWNAME</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>account=ACCOUNT</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>password=PASSWORD</code></em> <em class="replaceable"><code>reboot</code></em></h4><p> Renames a computer that is joined to a domain. This command supports the following additional parameters: -</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>NEWNAME</code></em> defines the new name of the machine in the domain.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em> defines a domain account that will be used to rename the machine in the domain. This domain account needs to have sufficient privileges to rename machines.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>PASSWORD</code></em> defines the password for the domain account defined with <em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em>.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="replaceable"><code>REBOOT</code></em> is an optional parameter that can be set to reboot the remote machine after successful rename in the domain.</p></li></ul></div><p> +</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>NEWNAME</code></em> defines the new name of the machine in the domain.</p></li><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em> defines a domain account that will be used to rename the machine in the domain. This domain account needs to have sufficient privileges to rename machines.</p></li><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>PASSWORD</code></em> defines the password for the domain account defined with <em class="replaceable"><code>ACCOUNT</code></em>.</p></li><li><p><em class="replaceable"><code>REBOOT</code></em> is an optional parameter that can be set to reboot the remote machine after successful rename in the domain.</p></li></ul></div><p> Note that you also need to use standard net parameters to connect and authenticate to the remote machine that you want to rename in the domain. These additional parameters include: -S computer and -U user. </p><p> Example: net dom renamecomputer -S xp -U XP\\administrator%secret newname=XPNEW account=MYDOM\\administrator password=topsecret reboot. </p><p> This example would connect to a computer named XP as the local administrator using password secret, and rename the joined computer to XPNEW using the MYDOM domain administrator account and password topsecret. After successful rename, the computer would reboot. -</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="HELP [COMMAND]"><a name="id2540923"></a><h3>HELP [COMMAND]</h3><p>Gives usage information for the specified command.</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2540935"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is complete for version 3 of the Samba - suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2540945"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</p></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2534938"></a><h3>HELP [COMMAND]</h3><p>Gives usage information for the specified command.</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2534950"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is complete for version 3 of the Samba + suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2534961"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The net manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmbd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmbd.8.html index 75fc255aa0..772acddaf5 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmbd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmbd.8.html @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>nmbd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="nmbd"><a name="nmbd.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>nmbd — NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS - over IP naming services to clients</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">nmbd</code> [-D] [-F] [-S] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log directory>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489652"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This program is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">nmbd</code> is a server that understands +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>nmbd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="nmbd.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>nmbd — NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS + over IP naming services to clients</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">nmbd</code> [-D] [-F] [-S] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log directory>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483383"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This program is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">nmbd</code> is a server that understands and can reply to NetBIOS over IP name service requests, like those produced by SMB/CIFS clients such as Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and LanManager clients. It also @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ replying to queries from clients for these names.</p><p>In addition, <code class="literal">nmbd</code> can act as a WINS proxy, relaying broadcast queries from clients that do not understand how to talk the WINS protocol to a WINS - server.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489867"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-D</span></dt><dd><p>If specified, this parameter causes + server.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483721"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-D</span></dt><dd><p>If specified, this parameter causes <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to operate as a daemon. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port. By default, <code class="literal">nmbd</code> @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. This option changes the default UDP port number (normally 137) that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> responds to name queries on. Don't use this option unless you are an expert, in which case you - won't need help!</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="FILES"><a name="id2487727"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/inetd.conf</code></span></dt><dd><p>If the server is to be run by the + won't need help!</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481745"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/inetd.conf</code></span></dt><dd><p>If the server is to be run by the <code class="literal">inetd</code> meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon. @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. will store the browsing database in the file <code class="filename">browse.dat </code> in the <code class="filename">var/locks</code> directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="SIGNALS"><a name="id2487934"></a><h2>SIGNALS</h2><p>To shut down an <code class="literal">nmbd</code> process it is recommended + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481952"></a><h2>SIGNALS</h2><p>To shut down an <code class="literal">nmbd</code> process it is recommended that SIGKILL (-9) <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the name database in an inconsistent state. The correct way to terminate <code class="literal">nmbd</code> is to send it @@ -129,13 +129,13 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. using <a class="citerefentry" href="smbcontrol.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbcontrol</span>(1)</span></a> (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2.2). This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running - at a normally low log level.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2538488"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2538499"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> + at a normally low log level.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482037"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532512"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> <a class="citerefentry" href="inetd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">inetd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testprns.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testprns</span>(1)</span></a>, and the Internet RFC's <code class="filename">rfc1001.txt</code>, <code class="filename">rfc1002.txt</code>. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page <a class="ulink" href="http://samba.org/cifs/" target="_top"> - http://samba.org/cifs/</a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2538573"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + http://samba.org/cifs/</a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532586"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmblookup.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmblookup.1.html index 7ffe4eaf0b..104ce95057 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmblookup.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/nmblookup.1.html @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>nmblookup</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="nmblookup"><a name="nmblookup"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>nmblookup — NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS - names</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">nmblookup</code> [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] [-f] {name}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489376"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">nmblookup</code> is used to query NetBIOS names +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>nmblookup</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="nmblookup"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>nmblookup — NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS + names</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">nmblookup</code> [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>] [-T] [-f] {name}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483393"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">nmblookup</code> is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP addresses in a network using NetBIOS over TCP/IP queries. The options allow the name queries to be directed at a particular IP broadcast area or to a particular machine. All queries - are done over UDP.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489528"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-M</span></dt><dd><p>Searches for a master browser by looking + are done over UDP.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483545"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-M</span></dt><dd><p>Searches for a master browser by looking up the NetBIOS name <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> with a type of <code class="constant">0x1d</code>. If <em class="replaceable"><code> name</code></em> is "-" then it does a lookup on the special name @@ -88,12 +88,12 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. If a NetBIOS name then the different name types may be specified by appending '#<type>' to the name. This name may also be '*', which will return all registered names within a broadcast - area.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2487742"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p><code class="literal">nmblookup</code> can be used to query + area.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481763"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p><code class="literal">nmblookup</code> can be used to query a WINS server (in the same way <code class="literal">nslookup</code> is used to query DNS servers). To query a WINS server, <code class="literal">nmblookup</code> must be called like this:</p><p><code class="literal">nmblookup -U server -R 'name'</code></p><p>For example, running :</p><p><code class="literal">nmblookup -U samba.org -R 'IRIX#1B'</code></p><p>would query the WINS server samba.org for the domain - master browser (1B name type) for the IRIX workgroup.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487793"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2487804"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, and <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487837"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + master browser (1B name type) for the IRIX workgroup.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481812"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481823"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, and <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481856"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.html index 31741e520f..0d59843a2c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/ntlm_auth.1.html @@ -1,18 +1,18 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ntlm_auth</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="ntlm_auth"><a name="ntlm-auth.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ntlm_auth — tool to allow external access to Winbind's NTLM authentication function</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ntlm_auth</code> [-d debuglevel] [-l logdir] [-s <smb config file>]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528920"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">ntlm_auth</code> is a helper utility that authenticates +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>ntlm_auth</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="ntlm-auth.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>ntlm_auth — tool to allow external access to Winbind's NTLM authentication function</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">ntlm_auth</code> [-d debuglevel] [-l logdir] [-s <smb config file>]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522939"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">ntlm_auth</code> is a helper utility that authenticates users using NT/LM authentication. It returns 0 if the users is authenticated successfully and 1 if access was denied. ntlm_auth uses winbind to access the user and authentication data for a domain. This utility - is only indended to be used by other programs (currently + is only intended to be used by other programs (currently <a class="ulink" href="http://www.squid-cache.org/" target="_top">Squid</a> and <a class="ulink" href="http://download.samba.org/ftp/unpacked/lorikeet/trunk/mod_ntlm_winbind/" target="_top">mod_ntlm_winbind</a>) - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS"><a name="id2489332"></a><h2>OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483350"></a><h2>OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS</h2><p> The <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon must be operational for many of these commands to function.</p><p>Some of these commands also require access to the directory <code class="filename">winbindd_privileged</code> in <code class="filename">$LOCKDIR</code>. This should be done either by running this command as root or providing group access to the <code class="filename">winbindd_privileged</code> directory. For - security reasons, this directory should not be world-accessable. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489378"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">--helper-protocol=PROTO</span></dt><dd><p> + security reasons, this directory should not be world-accessable. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483395"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">--helper-protocol=PROTO</span></dt><dd><p> Operate as a stdio-based helper. Valid helper protocols are: </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">squid-2.4-basic</span></dt><dd><p> Server-side helper for use with Squid 2.4's basic (plaintext) @@ -60,37 +60,37 @@ finished supplying data to the other. (Which in turn could cause the helper to authenticate the user). </p><p>Curently implemented parameters from the - external program to the helper are:</p><div class="variablelist"><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3>Implementors should take care to base64 encode + external program to the helper are:</p><div class="variablelist"><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3>Implementors should take care to base64 encode any data (such as usernames/passwords) that may contain malicous user data, such as a newline. They may also need to decode strings from the helper, which likewise may have been base64 encoded.</div><dl><dt><span class="term">Username</span></dt><dd><p>The username, expected to be in Samba's <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXCHARSET" target="_top">unix charset</a>. - </p><div class="example"><a name="id2489752"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 1. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Username: bob</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p><div class="example"><a name="id2489757"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 2. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Username:: Ym9i</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">Username</span></dt><dd><p>The user's domain, expected to be in + </p><div class="example"><a name="id2483767"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 1. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Username: bob</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p><div class="example"><a name="id2483772"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 2. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Username:: Ym9i</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">Username</span></dt><dd><p>The user's domain, expected to be in Samba's <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXCHARSET" target="_top">unix charset</a>. - </p><div class="example"><a name="id2487554"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 3. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Domain: WORKGROUP</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p><div class="example"><a name="id2487559"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 4. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Domain:: V09SS0dST1VQ</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">Full-Username</span></dt><dd><p>The fully qualified username, expected to be in + </p><div class="example"><a name="id2481575"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 3. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Domain: WORKGROUP</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p><div class="example"><a name="id2481579"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 4. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Domain:: V09SS0dST1VQ</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">Full-Username</span></dt><dd><p>The fully qualified username, expected to be in Samba's <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXCHARSET" target="_top">unix charset</a> and qualified with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDSEPARATOR" target="_top">winbind separator</a>. - </p><div class="example"><a name="id2487596"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 5. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Full-Username: WORKGROUP\bob</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p><div class="example"><a name="id2487600"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 6. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Full-Username:: V09SS0dST1VQYm9i</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">LANMAN-Challenge</span></dt><dd><p>The 8 byte <code class="literal">LANMAN Challenge</code> value, + </p><div class="example"><a name="id2481615"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 5. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Full-Username: WORKGROUP\bob</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p><div class="example"><a name="id2481619"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 6. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Full-Username:: V09SS0dST1VQYm9i</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">LANMAN-Challenge</span></dt><dd><p>The 8 byte <code class="literal">LANMAN Challenge</code> value, generated randomly by the server, or (in cases such as MSCHAPv2) generated in some way by both the server and the client. - </p><div class="example"><a name="id2487624"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 7. </b></p><div class="example-contents">LANMAN-Challege: 0102030405060708</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">LANMAN-Response</span></dt><dd><p>The 24 byte <code class="literal">LANMAN Response</code> value, + </p><div class="example"><a name="id2481644"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 7. </b></p><div class="example-contents">LANMAN-Challege: 0102030405060708</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">LANMAN-Response</span></dt><dd><p>The 24 byte <code class="literal">LANMAN Response</code> value, calculated from the user's password and the supplied <code class="literal">LANMAN Challenge</code>. Typically, this is provided over the network by a client wishing to authenticate. - </p><div class="example"><a name="id2487656"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 8. </b></p><div class="example-contents">LANMAN-Response: 0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">NT-Response</span></dt><dd><p>The >= 24 byte <code class="literal">NT Response</code> + </p><div class="example"><a name="id2481675"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 8. </b></p><div class="example-contents">LANMAN-Response: 0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">NT-Response</span></dt><dd><p>The >= 24 byte <code class="literal">NT Response</code> calculated from the user's password and the supplied <code class="literal">LANMAN Challenge</code>. Typically, this is provided over the network by a client wishing to authenticate. - </p><div class="example"><a name="id2487689"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 9. </b></p><div class="example-contents">NT-Response: 0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">Password</span></dt><dd><p>The user's password. This would be + </p><div class="example"><a name="id2481708"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 9. </b></p><div class="example-contents">NT-Response: 0102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F101112131415161718</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">Password</span></dt><dd><p>The user's password. This would be provided by a network client, if the helper is being used in a legacy situation that exposes plaintext passwords in this way. - </p><div class="example"><a name="id2487709"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 10. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Password: samba2</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p><div class="example"><a name="id2487714"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 11. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Password:: c2FtYmEy</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">Request-User-Session-Key</span></dt><dd><p>Apon sucessful authenticaiton, return + </p><div class="example"><a name="id2481729"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 10. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Password: samba2</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p><div class="example"><a name="id2481733"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 11. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Password:: c2FtYmEy</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">Request-User-Session-Key</span></dt><dd><p>Apon sucessful authenticaiton, return the user session key associated with the login. - </p><div class="example"><a name="id2487731"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 12. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Request-User-Session-Key: Yes</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">Request-LanMan-Session-Key</span></dt><dd><p>Apon sucessful authenticaiton, return + </p><div class="example"><a name="id2481751"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 12. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Request-User-Session-Key: Yes</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd><dt><span class="term">Request-LanMan-Session-Key</span></dt><dd><p>Apon sucessful authenticaiton, return the LANMAN session key associated with the login. - </p><div class="example"><a name="id2487748"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 13. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Request-LanMan-Session-Key: Yes</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd></dl></div></dd></dl></div></dd><dt><span class="term">--username=USERNAME</span></dt><dd><p> + </p><div class="example"><a name="id2481768"></a><p class="title"><b>Example 13. </b></p><div class="example-contents">Request-LanMan-Session-Key: Yes</div></div><p><br class="example-break"></p></dd></dl></div></dd></dl></div></dd><dt><span class="term">--username=USERNAME</span></dt><dd><p> Specify username of user to authenticate </p></dd><dt><span class="term">--domain=DOMAIN</span></dt><dd><p> Specify domain of user to authenticate @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-l|--log-basename=logdirectory</spa <code class="constant">".progname"</code> will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLE SETUP"><a name="id2538506"></a><h2>EXAMPLE SETUP</h2><p>To setup ntlm_auth for use by squid 2.5, with both basic and +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532521"></a><h2>EXAMPLE SETUP</h2><p>To setup ntlm_auth for use by squid 2.5, with both basic and NTLMSSP authentication, the following should be placed in the <code class="filename">squid.conf</code> file. </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -137,20 +137,20 @@ auth_param basic program ntlm_auth --helper-protocol=squid-2.5-basic auth_param basic children 5 auth_param basic realm Squid proxy-caching web server auth_param basic credentialsttl 2 hours -</pre><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This example assumes that ntlm_auth has been installed into your +</pre><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This example assumes that ntlm_auth has been installed into your path, and that the group permissions on <code class="filename">winbindd_privileged</code> are as described above.</p></div><p>To setup ntlm_auth for use by squid 2.5 with group limitation in addition to the above example, the following should be added to the <code class="filename">squid.conf</code> file. </p><pre class="programlisting"> auth_param ntlm program ntlm_auth --helper-protocol=squid-2.5-ntlmssp --require-membership-of='WORKGROUP\Domain Users' auth_param basic program ntlm_auth --helper-protocol=squid-2.5-basic --require-membership-of='WORKGROUP\Domain Users' -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="TROUBLESHOOTING"><a name="id2538561"></a><h2>TROUBLESHOOTING</h2><p>If you're experiencing problems with authenticating Internet Explorer running +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532578"></a><h2>TROUBLESHOOTING</h2><p>If you're experiencing problems with authenticating Internet Explorer running under MS Windows 9X or Millenium Edition against ntlm_auth's NTLMSSP authentication helper (--helper-protocol=squid-2.5-ntlmssp), then please read <a class="ulink" href="http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q239/8/69.ASP" target="_top"> the Microsoft Knowledge Base article #239869 and follow instructions described there</a>. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2538583"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba - suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2538593"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532599"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba + suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532610"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The ntlm_auth manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij and diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pam_winbind.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pam_winbind.8.html index dbb1d4ccd3..159ce09333 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pam_winbind.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pam_winbind.8.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>pam_winbind</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="pam_winbind"><a name="pam_winbind.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>pam_winbind — PAM module for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528891"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>pam_winbind</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="pam_winbind.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>pam_winbind — PAM module for Winbind</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522902"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p> pam_winbind is a PAM module that can authenticate users against the local domain by talking to the Winbind daemon. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SYNOPSIS"><a name="id2528914"></a><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522925"></a><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><p> Edit the PAM system config /etc/pam.d/service and modify it as the following example shows: </p><pre class="programlisting"> ... @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Make sure that pam_winbind is one of the first modules in the session part. It may retrieve kerberos tickets which are needed by other modules. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2528943"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522954"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p> pam_winbind supports several options which can either be set in the PAM configuration files or in the pam_winbind configuration @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ going to expire. Defaults to 14 days. </p></dd></dl></div><p> - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="PAM DATA EXPORTS"><a name="id2489670"></a><h2>PAM DATA EXPORTS</h2><p>This section describes the data exported in the PAM stack which could be used in other PAM modules.</p><dt><span class="term">PAM_WINBIND_HOMEDIR</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483686"></a><h2>PAM DATA EXPORTS</h2><p>This section describes the data exported in the PAM stack which could be used in other PAM modules.</p><dt><span class="term">PAM_WINBIND_HOMEDIR</span></dt><dd><p> This is the Windows Home Directory set in the profile tab in the user settings on the Active Directory Server. This could be a local path or a directory on a share mapped to a drive. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ </p></dd><dt><span class="term">PAM_WINBIND_PROFILEPATH</span></dt><dd><p> This is the profile path set in the profile tab in the user settings. Noramlly the home directory is synced with this directory on a share. - </p></dd></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489745"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="wbinfo.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">wbinfo</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489780"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of Samba.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487454"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></dd></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483761"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="wbinfo.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">wbinfo</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483796"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of Samba.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481475"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. </p><p>This manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij and Guenther Deschner.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pdbedit.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pdbedit.8.html index d9bf432799..37eb2d0475 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pdbedit.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/pdbedit.8.html @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>pdbedit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="pdbedit"><a name="pdbedit.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>pdbedit — manage the SAM database (Database of Samba Users)</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">pdbedit</code> [-L] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S script] [-p profile] [-K] [-a] [-t, --password-from-stdin] [-m] [-r] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] [-b passdb-backend] [-g] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy] [-C value] [-c account-control] [-y]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489581"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The pdbedit program is used to manage the users accounts +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>pdbedit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="pdbedit.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>pdbedit — manage the SAM database (Database of Samba Users)</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">pdbedit</code> [-L] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S script] [-p profile] [-K] [-a] [-t, --password-from-stdin] [-m] [-r] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] [-b passdb-backend] [-g] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy] [-C value] [-c account-control] [-y]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483597"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The pdbedit program is used to manage the users accounts stored in the sam database and can only be run by root.</p><p>The pdbedit tool uses the passdb modular interface and is independent from the kind of users database used (currently there are smbpasswd, ldap, nis+ and tdb based and more can be added without changing the tool).</p><p>There are five main ways to use pdbedit: adding a user account, removing a user account, modifing a user account, listing user - accounts, importing users accounts.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489618"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-L</span></dt><dd><p>This option lists all the user accounts + accounts, importing users accounts.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483633"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-L</span></dt><dd><p>This option lists all the user accounts present in the users database. This option prints a list of user/uid pairs separated by the ':' character.</p><p>Example: <code class="literal">pdbedit -L</code></p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ samba:45:0F2B255F7B67A7A9AAD3B435B51404EE: rid. </p><p>Example: <code class="literal">-U S-1-5-21-2447931902-1787058256-3961074038-5004</code></p></dd><dt><span class="term">-c account-control</span></dt><dd><p>This option can be used while adding or modifying a user account. It will specify the users' account control property. Possible flags are listed below. </p><p> - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>N: No password required</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>D: Account disabled</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>H: Home directory required</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>T: Temporary duplicate of other account</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>U: Regular user account</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>M: MNS logon user account</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>W: Workstation Trust Account</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>S: Server Trust Account</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>L: Automatic Locking</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>X: Password does not expire</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>I: Domain Trust Account</p></li></ul></div><p> + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>N: No password required</p></li><li><p>D: Account disabled</p></li><li><p>H: Home directory required</p></li><li><p>T: Temporary duplicate of other account</p></li><li><p>U: Regular user account</p></li><li><p>M: MNS logon user account</p></li><li><p>W: Workstation Trust Account</p></li><li><p>S: Server Trust Account</p></li><li><p>L: Automatic Locking</p></li><li><p>X: Password does not expire</p></li><li><p>I: Domain Trust Account</p></li></ul></div><p> </p><p>Example: <code class="literal">-c "[X ]"</code></p></dd><dt><span class="term">-K|--kickoff-time</span></dt><dd><p>This option is used to modify the kickoff time for a certain user. Use "never" as argument to set the kickoff time to unlimited. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ samba:45:0F2B255F7B67A7A9AAD3B435B51404EE: </p><pre class="programlisting">new password: retype new password </pre><p> -</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>pdbedit does not call the unix password syncronisation +</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>pdbedit does not call the unix password syncronisation script if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" target="_top">unix password sync</a> has been set. It only updates the data in the Samba user database. @@ -147,8 +147,8 @@ The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-l|--log-basename=logdirectory</span></dt><dd><p>Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension <code class="constant">".progname"</code> will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="NOTES"><a name="id2538740"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>This command may be used only by root.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2538749"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2538760"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2538782"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532758"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>This command may be used only by root.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532768"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532778"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532801"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The pdbedit manpage was written by Simo Sorce and Jelmer Vernooij.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/profiles.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/profiles.1.html index 71df9d9e5c..7deb9257c5 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/profiles.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/profiles.1.html @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>profiles</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="profiles"><a name="profiles.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>profiles — A utility to report and change SIDs in registry files - </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">profiles</code> [-v] [-c SID] [-n SID] {file}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528927"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">profiles</code> is a utility that +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>profiles</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="profiles.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>profiles — A utility to report and change SIDs in registry files + </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">profiles</code> [-v] [-c SID] [-n SID] {file}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522946"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">profiles</code> is a utility that reports and changes SIDs in windows registry files. It currently only supports NT. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489323"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">file</span></dt><dd><p>Registry file to view or edit. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-v,--verbose</span></dt><dd><p>Increases verbosity of messages. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483340"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">file</span></dt><dd><p>Registry file to view or edit. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-v,--verbose</span></dt><dd><p>Increases verbosity of messages. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-c SID1 -n SID2</span></dt><dd><p>Change all occurences of SID1 in <code class="filename">file</code> by SID2. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489508"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba - suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489520"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483525"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba + suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483536"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The profiles man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij. </p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/rpcclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/rpcclient.1.html index b7117972ff..27ec206ddb 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/rpcclient.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/rpcclient.1.html @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>rpcclient</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="rpcclient"><a name="rpcclient.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>rpcclient — tool for executing client side - MS-RPC functions</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">rpcclient</code> [-A authfile] [-c <command string>] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logdir] [-N] [-s <smb config file>] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N] [-I destinationIP] {server}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489358"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">rpcclient</code> is a utility initially developed +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>rpcclient</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="rpcclient.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>rpcclient — tool for executing client side + MS-RPC functions</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">rpcclient</code> [-A authfile] [-c <command string>] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logdir] [-N] [-s <smb config file>] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N] [-I destinationIP] {server}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483375"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">rpcclient</code> is a utility initially developed to test MS-RPC functionality in Samba itself. It has undergone several stages of development and stability. Many system administrators have now written scripts around it to manage Windows NT clients from - their UNIX workstation. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489512"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">server</span></dt><dd><p>NetBIOS name of Server to which to connect. + their UNIX workstation. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483528"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">server</span></dt><dd><p>NetBIOS name of Server to which to connect. The server can be any SMB/CIFS server. The name is resolved using the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMERESOLVEORDER" target="_top">name resolve order</a> line from <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-c|--command='command string'</span></dt><dd><p>execute semicolon separated commands (listed below)) </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-I IP-address</span></dt><dd><p><em class="replaceable"><code>IP address</code></em> is the address of the server to connect to. @@ -48,6 +48,8 @@ option is also defined the password on the command line will be silently ingnored and no password will be used.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-k|--kerberos</span></dt><dd><p> Try to authenticate with kerberos. Only useful in an Active Directory environment. +</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-C|--use-ccache</span></dt><dd><p> +Try to use the credentials cached by winbind. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-A|--authentication-file=filename</span></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to specify a file from which to read the username and password used in the connection. The format of the file is @@ -89,11 +91,11 @@ SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM). </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-O|--socket- socket. See the socket options parameter in the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> manual page for the list of valid options. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="COMMANDS"><a name="id2487714"></a><h2>COMMANDS</h2><div class="refsect2" title="LSARPC"><a name="id2487720"></a><h3>LSARPC</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">lsaquery</span></dt><dd><p>Query info policy</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lookupsids</span></dt><dd><p>Resolve a list +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481745"></a><h2>COMMANDS</h2><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481751"></a><h3>LSARPC</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">lsaquery</span></dt><dd><p>Query info policy</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lookupsids</span></dt><dd><p>Resolve a list of SIDs to usernames. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">lookupnames</span></dt><dd><p>Resolve a list of usernames to SIDs. - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumtrusts</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate trusted domains</p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumprivs</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate privileges</p></dd><dt><span class="term">getdispname</span></dt><dd><p>Get the privilege name</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaenumsid</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate the LSA SIDS</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaenumprivsaccount</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate the privileges of an SID</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaenumacctrights</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate the rights of an SID</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaenumacctwithright</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate accounts with a right</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaaddacctrights</span></dt><dd><p>Add rights to an account</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaremoveacctrights</span></dt><dd><p>Remove rights from an account</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsalookupprivvalue</span></dt><dd><p>Get a privilege value given its name</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaquerysecobj</span></dt><dd><p>Query LSA security object</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="LSARPC-DS"><a name="id2487845"></a><h3>LSARPC-DS</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">dsroledominfo</span></dt><dd><p>Get Primary Domain Information</p></dd></dl></div><p> </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>DFS</em></span></p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">dfsexist</span></dt><dd><p>Query DFS support</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dfsadd</span></dt><dd><p>Add a DFS share</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dfsremove</span></dt><dd><p>Remove a DFS share</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dfsgetinfo</span></dt><dd><p>Query DFS share info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dfsenum</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate dfs shares</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="REG"><a name="id2487914"></a><h3>REG</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">shutdown</span></dt><dd><p>Remote Shutdown</p></dd><dt><span class="term">abortshutdown</span></dt><dd><p>Abort Shutdown</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="SRVSVC"><a name="id2487941"></a><h3>SRVSVC</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">srvinfo</span></dt><dd><p>Server query info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">netshareenum</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate shares</p></dd><dt><span class="term">netfileenum</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate open files</p></dd><dt><span class="term">netremotetod</span></dt><dd><p>Fetch remote time of day</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="SAMR"><a name="id2487982"></a><h3>SAMR</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">queryuser</span></dt><dd><p>Query user info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">querygroup</span></dt><dd><p>Query group info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">queryusergroups</span></dt><dd><p>Query user groups</p></dd><dt><span class="term">querygroupmem</span></dt><dd><p>Query group membership</p></dd><dt><span class="term">queryaliasmem</span></dt><dd><p>Query alias membership</p></dd><dt><span class="term">querydispinfo</span></dt><dd><p>Query display info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">querydominfo</span></dt><dd><p>Query domain info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumdomusers</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate domain users</p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumdomgroups</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate domain groups</p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumalsgroups</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate alias groups</p></dd><dt><span class="term">createdomuser</span></dt><dd><p>Create domain user</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samlookupnames</span></dt><dd><p>Look up names</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samlookuprids</span></dt><dd><p>Look up names</p></dd><dt><span class="term">deletedomuser</span></dt><dd><p>Delete domain user</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samquerysecobj</span></dt><dd><p>Query SAMR security object</p></dd><dt><span class="term">getdompwinfo</span></dt><dd><p>Retrieve domain password info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lookupdomain</span></dt><dd><p>Look up domain</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="SPOOLSS"><a name="id2538588"></a><h3>SPOOLSS</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">adddriver <arch> <config> [<version>]</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumtrusts</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate trusted domains</p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumprivs</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate privileges</p></dd><dt><span class="term">getdispname</span></dt><dd><p>Get the privilege name</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaenumsid</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate the LSA SIDS</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaenumprivsaccount</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate the privileges of an SID</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaenumacctrights</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate the rights of an SID</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaenumacctwithright</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate accounts with a right</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaaddacctrights</span></dt><dd><p>Add rights to an account</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaremoveacctrights</span></dt><dd><p>Remove rights from an account</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsalookupprivvalue</span></dt><dd><p>Get a privilege value given its name</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lsaquerysecobj</span></dt><dd><p>Query LSA security object</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481876"></a><h3>LSARPC-DS</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">dsroledominfo</span></dt><dd><p>Get Primary Domain Information</p></dd></dl></div><p> </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>DFS</em></span></p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">dfsexist</span></dt><dd><p>Query DFS support</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dfsadd</span></dt><dd><p>Add a DFS share</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dfsremove</span></dt><dd><p>Remove a DFS share</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dfsgetinfo</span></dt><dd><p>Query DFS share info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dfsenum</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate dfs shares</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481945"></a><h3>REG</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">shutdown</span></dt><dd><p>Remote Shutdown</p></dd><dt><span class="term">abortshutdown</span></dt><dd><p>Abort Shutdown</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481972"></a><h3>SRVSVC</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">srvinfo</span></dt><dd><p>Server query info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">netshareenum</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate shares</p></dd><dt><span class="term">netfileenum</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate open files</p></dd><dt><span class="term">netremotetod</span></dt><dd><p>Fetch remote time of day</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2482014"></a><h3>SAMR</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">queryuser</span></dt><dd><p>Query user info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">querygroup</span></dt><dd><p>Query group info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">queryusergroups</span></dt><dd><p>Query user groups</p></dd><dt><span class="term">querygroupmem</span></dt><dd><p>Query group membership</p></dd><dt><span class="term">queryaliasmem</span></dt><dd><p>Query alias membership</p></dd><dt><span class="term">querydispinfo</span></dt><dd><p>Query display info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">querydominfo</span></dt><dd><p>Query domain info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumdomusers</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate domain users</p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumdomgroups</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate domain groups</p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumalsgroups</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate alias groups</p></dd><dt><span class="term">createdomuser</span></dt><dd><p>Create domain user</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samlookupnames</span></dt><dd><p>Look up names</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samlookuprids</span></dt><dd><p>Look up names</p></dd><dt><span class="term">deletedomuser</span></dt><dd><p>Delete domain user</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samquerysecobj</span></dt><dd><p>Query SAMR security object</p></dd><dt><span class="term">getdompwinfo</span></dt><dd><p>Retrieve domain password info</p></dd><dt><span class="term">lookupdomain</span></dt><dd><p>Look up domain</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2532617"></a><h3>SPOOLSS</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">adddriver <arch> <config> [<version>]</span></dt><dd><p> Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver information on the server. Note that the driver files should already exist in the directory returned by @@ -178,11 +180,11 @@ Comma Separated list of Files already be correctly installed on the print server. </p><p>See also the <code class="literal">enumprinters</code> and <code class="literal">enumdrivers</code> commands for obtaining a list of of installed printers and drivers.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">addform</span></dt><dd><p>Add form</p></dd><dt><span class="term">setform</span></dt><dd><p>Set form</p></dd><dt><span class="term">getform</span></dt><dd><p>Get form</p></dd><dt><span class="term">deleteform</span></dt><dd><p>Delete form</p></dd><dt><span class="term">enumforms</span></dt><dd><p>Enumerate form</p></dd><dt><span class="term">setprinter</span></dt><dd><p>Set printer comment</p></dd><dt><span class="term">setprinterdata</span></dt><dd><p>Set REG_SZ printer data</p></dd><dt><span class="term">setprintername <printername> - <newprintername></span></dt><dd><p>Set printer name</p></dd><dt><span class="term">rffpcnex</span></dt><dd><p>Rffpcnex test</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="NETLOGON"><a name="id2538983"></a><h3>NETLOGON</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">logonctrl2</span></dt><dd><p>Logon Control 2</p></dd><dt><span class="term">logonctrl</span></dt><dd><p>Logon Control</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samsync</span></dt><dd><p>Sam Synchronisation</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samdeltas</span></dt><dd><p>Query Sam Deltas</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samlogon</span></dt><dd><p>Sam Logon</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" title="GENERAL COMMANDS"><a name="id2539040"></a><h3>GENERAL COMMANDS</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">debuglevel</span></dt><dd><p>Set the current + <newprintername></span></dt><dd><p>Set printer name</p></dd><dt><span class="term">rffpcnex</span></dt><dd><p>Rffpcnex test</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533012"></a><h3>NETLOGON</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">logonctrl2</span></dt><dd><p>Logon Control 2</p></dd><dt><span class="term">logonctrl</span></dt><dd><p>Logon Control</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samsync</span></dt><dd><p>Sam Synchronisation</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samdeltas</span></dt><dd><p>Query Sam Deltas</p></dd><dt><span class="term">samlogon</span></dt><dd><p>Sam Logon</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2533069"></a><h3>GENERAL COMMANDS</h3><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">debuglevel</span></dt><dd><p>Set the current debug level used to log information.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">help (?)</span></dt><dd><p>Print a listing of all known commands or extended help on a particular command. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">quit (exit)</span></dt><dd><p>Exit <code class="literal">rpcclient - </code>.</p></dd></dl></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="BUGS"><a name="id2539081"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p><code class="literal">rpcclient</code> is designed as a developer testing tool + </code>.</p></dd></dl></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2533110"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p><code class="literal">rpcclient</code> is designed as a developer testing tool and may not be robust in certain areas (such as command line parsing). It has been known to generate a core dump upon failures when invalid parameters where passed to the interpreter. </p><p>From Luke Leighton's original rpcclient man page:</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>WARNING!</em></span> The MSRPC over SMB code has @@ -195,8 +197,8 @@ Comma Separated list of Files versions of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="rpcclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">rpcclient</span>(1)</span></a> that are incompatible for some commands or services. Additionally, the developers are sending reports to Microsoft, and problems found or reported to Microsoft are fixed in Service Packs, which may - result in incompatibilities.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2539139"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba - suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2539150"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + result in incompatibilities.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2533168"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba + suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2533179"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original rpcclient man page was written by Matthew diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/samba.7.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/samba.7.html index cc260de796..641173f4b4 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/samba.7.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/samba.7.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>samba</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="samba"><a name="samba.7"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>samba — A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">samba</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528858"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The Samba software suite is a collection of programs +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>samba</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="samba.7"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>samba — A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">samba</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522912"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>The Samba software suite is a collection of programs that implements the Server Message Block (commonly abbreviated as SMB) protocol for UNIX systems. This protocol is sometimes also referred to as the Common Internet File System (CIFS). For a @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ <a class="citerefentry" href="smbmnt.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbmnt</span>(8)</span></a></span></dt><dd><p><code class="literal">smbmount</code>,<code class="literal">smbumount</code> and <code class="literal">smbmnt</code> are commands that can be used to mount CIFS/SMB shares on Linux. </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><a class="citerefentry" href="smbcquotas.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbcquotas</span>(1)</span></a></span></dt><dd><p><code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> is a tool that - can set remote QUOTA's on server with NTFS 5. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="COMPONENTS"><a name="id2487779"></a><h2>COMPONENTS</h2><p>The Samba suite is made up of several components. Each + can set remote QUOTA's on server with NTFS 5. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481796"></a><h2>COMPONENTS</h2><p>The Samba suite is made up of several components. Each component is described in a separate manual page. It is strongly recommended that you read the documentation that comes with Samba and the manual pages of those components that you use. If the @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ for information on how to file a bug report or submit a patch.</p><p>If you require help, visit the Samba webpage at <a class="ulink" href="http://samba.org/" target="_top">http://www.samba.org/</a> and explore the many option available to you. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AVAILABILITY"><a name="id2487811"></a><h2>AVAILABILITY</h2><p>The Samba software suite is licensed under the + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481829"></a><h2>AVAILABILITY</h2><p>The Samba software suite is licensed under the GNU Public License(GPL). A copy of that license should have come with the package in the file COPYING. You are encouraged to distribute copies of the Samba suite, but @@ -86,14 +86,14 @@ the README file that comes with Samba.</p><p>If you have access to a WWW viewer (such as Mozilla or Konqueror) then you will also find lots of useful information, including back issues of the Samba mailing list, at - <a class="ulink" href="http://lists.samba.org/" target="_top">http://lists.samba.org</a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487856"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the - Samba suite. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="CONTRIBUTIONS"><a name="id2487867"></a><h2>CONTRIBUTIONS</h2><p>If you wish to contribute to the Samba project, + <a class="ulink" href="http://lists.samba.org/" target="_top">http://lists.samba.org</a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481874"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the + Samba suite. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481885"></a><h2>CONTRIBUTIONS</h2><p>If you wish to contribute to the Samba project, then I suggest you join the Samba mailing list at <a class="ulink" href="http://lists.samba.org/" target="_top">http://lists.samba.org</a>. </p><p>If you have patches to submit, visit <a class="ulink" href="http://devel.samba.org/" target="_top">http://devel.samba.org/</a> for information on how to do it properly. We prefer patches - in <code class="literal">diff -u</code> format.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="CONTRIBUTORS"><a name="id2487901"></a><h2>CONTRIBUTORS</h2><p>Contributors to the project are now too numerous + in <code class="literal">diff -u</code> format.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481918"></a><h2>CONTRIBUTORS</h2><p>Contributors to the project are now too numerous to mention here but all deserve the thanks of all Samba users. To see a full list, look at the <code class="filename">change-log</code> in the source package @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ http://cvs.samba.org/</a> for the contributors to Samba post-CVS. CVS is the Open Source source code control system used by the Samba Team to develop - Samba. The project would have been unmanageable without it.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487929"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + Samba. The project would have been unmanageable without it.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481946"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/sharesec.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/sharesec.1.html index f2dfef51bc..9f180e19d1 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/sharesec.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/sharesec.1.html @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>sharesec</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="sharesec"><a name="sharesec.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>sharesec — Set or get share ACLs</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">sharesec</code> {sharename} [-r, --remove=ACL] [-m, --modify=ACL] [-a, --add=ACL] [-R, --replace=ACLs] [-D, --delete] [-v, --view] [-M, --machine-sid] [-F, --force] [-d, --debuglevel=DEBUGLEVEL] [-s, --configfile=CONFIGFILE] [-l, --log-basename=LOGFILEBASE] [-V, --version] [-?, --help] [--usage]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489379"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">sharesec</code> program manipulates share permissions - on SMB file shares.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489530"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p>The following options are available to the <code class="literal">sharesec</code> program. +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>sharesec</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="sharesec.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>sharesec — Set or get share ACLs</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">sharesec</code> {sharename} [-r, --remove=ACL] [-m, --modify=ACL] [-a, --add=ACL] [-R, --replace=ACLs] [-D, --delete] [-v, --view] [-M, --machine-sid] [-F, --force] [-d, --debuglevel=DEBUGLEVEL] [-s, --configfile=CONFIGFILE] [-l, --log-basename=LOGFILEBASE] [-V, --version] [-?, --help] [--usage]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483396"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">sharesec</code> program manipulates share permissions + on SMB file shares.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483546"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p>The following options are available to the <code class="literal">sharesec</code> program. The format of ACLs is described in the section ACL FORMAT </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-a|--add=ACL</span></dt><dd><p>Add the ACEs specified to the ACL list. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-D|--delete</span></dt><dd><p>Delete the entire security descriptor. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-F|--force</span></dt><dd><p>Force storing the ACL. @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-l|--log-basename=logdirectory</span></dt><dd><p>Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension <code class="constant">".progname"</code> will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="ACL FORMAT"><a name="id2489748"></a><h2>ACL FORMAT</h2><p>The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483764"></a><h2>ACL FORMAT</h2><p>The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by either commas or newlines. An ACL entry is one of the following: </p><pre class="programlisting"> REVISION:<revision number> OWNER:<sid or name> @@ -54,16 +54,16 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. </p><p>The mask is a value which expresses the access right granted to the SID. It can be given as a decimal or hexadecimal value, or by using one of the following text strings which map to the NT - file permissions of the same name.</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>R</em></span> - Allow read access </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>W</em></span> - Allow write access</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>X</em></span> - Execute permission on the object</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>D</em></span> - Delete the object</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>P</em></span> - Change permissions</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>O</em></span> - Take ownership</p></li></ul></div><p>The following combined permissions can be specified:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>READ</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RX' - permissions</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>CHANGE</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RXWD' permissions - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>FULL</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RWXDPO' - permissions</p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXIT STATUS"><a name="id2487647"></a><h2>EXIT STATUS</h2><p>The <code class="literal">sharesec</code> program sets the exit status + file permissions of the same name.</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>R</em></span> - Allow read access </p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>W</em></span> - Allow write access</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>X</em></span> - Execute permission on the object</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>D</em></span> - Delete the object</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>P</em></span> - Change permissions</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>O</em></span> - Take ownership</p></li></ul></div><p>The following combined permissions can be specified:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>READ</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RX' + permissions</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>CHANGE</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RXWD' permissions + </p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>FULL</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RWXDPO' + permissions</p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481668"></a><h2>EXIT STATUS</h2><p>The <code class="literal">sharesec</code> program sets the exit status depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed. The exit status may be one of the following values. </p><p>If the operation succeeded, sharesec returns and exit status of 0. If <code class="literal">sharesec</code> couldn't connect to the specified server, or there was an error getting or setting the ACLs, an exit status of 1 is returned. If there was an error parsing any command line - arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2487680"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Add full access for SID + arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481700"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Add full access for SID <em class="parameter"><code>S-1-5-21-1866488690-1365729215-3963860297-17724</code></em> on <em class="parameter"><code>share</code></em>: </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. GROUP:(NULL SID) ACL:S-1-1-0:ALLOWED/0/0x101f01ff ACL:S-1-5-21-1866488690-1365729215-3963860297-17724:ALLOWED/0/FULL - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487728"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487739"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481749"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481760"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html index 3681731c40..a2db005732 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smb.conf</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smb.conf"><a name="smb.conf.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smb.conf — The configuration file for the Samba suite</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SYNOPSIS"><a name="id2528887"></a><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smb.conf</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smb.conf.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smb.conf — The configuration file for the Samba suite</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522905"></a><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><p> The <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file is a configuration file for the Samba suite. <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> contains runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file is designed to be configured and administered by the <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a> program. The complete description of the file format and possible parameters held within are here for reference purposes. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="FILE FORMAT"><a name="FILEFORMATSECT"></a><h2>FILE FORMAT</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="FILEFORMATSECT"></a><h2>FILE FORMAT</h2><p> The file consists of sections and parameters. A section begins with the name of the section in square brackets and continues until the next section begins. Sections contain parameters of the form: </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -18,17 +18,17 @@ and trailing whitespace in a parameter value is discarded. Internal whitespace within a parameter value is retained verbatim. </p><p> - Any line beginning with a semicolon (<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">;</span>”</span>) or a hash (<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">#</span>”</span>) + Any line beginning with a semicolon (“<span class="quote">;</span>”) or a hash (“<span class="quote">#</span>”) character is ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace. </p><p> - Any line ending in a <span class="quote">“<span class="quote"><code class="literal">\</code></span>”</span> is continued on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion. + Any line ending in a “<span class="quote"><code class="literal">\</code></span>” is continued on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion. </p><p> The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given as yes/no, 1/0 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean values, but is preserved in string values. Some items such as create masks are numeric. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SECTION DESCRIPTIONS"><a name="id2489374"></a><h2>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483389"></a><h2>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</h2><p> Each section in the configuration file (except for the [global] section) describes a shared resource (known as - a <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">share</span>”</span>). The section name is the name of the shared resource and the parameters within the + a “<span class="quote">share</span>”). The section name is the name of the shared resource and the parameters within the section define the shares attributes. </p><p> There are three special sections, [global], [homes] and [printers], which are described under @@ -69,10 +69,10 @@ <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE" target="_top">printable = yes</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok = yes</a> </pre><p> - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SPECIAL SECTIONS"><a name="id2487452"></a><h2>SPECIAL SECTIONS</h2><div class="refsect2" title="The [global] section"><a name="id2487457"></a><h3>The [global] section</h3><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481471"></a><h2>SPECIAL SECTIONS</h2><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481477"></a><h3>The [global] section</h3><p> Parameters in this section apply to the server as a whole, or are defaults for sections that do not specifically define certain items. See the notes under PARAMETERS for more information. - </p></div><div class="refsect2" title="The [homes] section"><a name="HOMESECT"></a><h3>The [homes] section</h3><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="HOMESECT"></a><h3>The [homes] section</h3><p> If a section called [homes] is included in the configuration file, services connecting clients to their home directories can be created on the fly by the server. </p><p> @@ -82,9 +82,9 @@ [homes] section. </p><p> Some modifications are then made to the newly created share: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p> + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p> The share name is changed from homes to the located username. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> If no path was given, the path is set to the user's home directory. </p></li></ul></div><p> If you decide to use a <span class="emphasis"><em>path =</em></span> line in your [homes] section, it may be useful @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ This is a fast and simple way to give a large number of clients access to their home directories with a minimum of fuss. </p><p> - A similar process occurs if the requested section name is <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">homes</span>”</span>, except that the share + A similar process occurs if the requested section name is “<span class="quote">homes</span>”, except that the share name is not changed to that of the requesting user. This method of using the [homes] section works well if different users share a client PC. </p><p> @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ The <span class="emphasis"><em>browseable</em></span> flag for auto home directories will be inherited from the global browseable flag, not the [homes] browseable flag. This is useful as it means setting <span class="emphasis"><em>browseable = no</em></span> in the [homes] section will hide the [homes] share but make any auto home directories visible. - </p></div><div class="refsect2" title="The [printers] section"><a name="PRINTERSSECT"></a><h3>The [printers] section</h3><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="PRINTERSSECT"></a><h3>The [printers] section</h3><p> This section works like [homes], but for printers. </p><p> If a [printers] section occurs in the configuration file, users are able to connect to any printer @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ [printers] section. </p><p> A few modifications are then made to the newly created share: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>The share name is set to the located printer name</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>If no printer name was given, the printer name is set to the located printer name</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>If the share does not permit guest access and no username was given, the username is set + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>The share name is set to the located printer name</p></li><li><p>If no printer name was given, the printer name is set to the located printer name</p></li><li><p>If the share does not permit guest access and no username was given, the username is set to the located printer name.</p></li></ul></div><p> The [printers] service MUST be printable - if you specify otherwise, the server will refuse to load the configuration file. @@ -156,11 +156,11 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... </p><p> An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the first entry of a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines, components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols (<code class="literal">|</code>). - </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> + </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are defined on the system you may be able to use <code class="literal">printcap name = lpstat</code> to automatically obtain a list of printers. See the <code class="literal">printcap name</code> option for more details. - </p></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="USERSHARES"><a name="id2487774"></a><h2>USERSHARES</h2><p>Starting with Samba version 3.0.23 the capability for non-root users to add, modify, and delete + </p></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481791"></a><h2>USERSHARES</h2><p>Starting with Samba version 3.0.23 the capability for non-root users to add, modify, and delete their own share definitions has been added. This capability is called <span class="emphasis"><em>usershares</em></span> and is controlled by a set of parameters in the [global] section of the smb.conf. The relevant parameters are : @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares to the global section of your <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. Members of the group foo may then manipulate the user defined shares - using the following commands.</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]]</span></dt><dd><p>To create or modify (overwrite) a user defined share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare delete sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To delete a user defined share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare list wildcard-sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To list user defined shares.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare info wildcard-sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To print information about user defined shares.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="PARAMETERS"><a name="id2488001"></a><h2>PARAMETERS</h2><p>Parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</p><p> + using the following commands.</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]]</span></dt><dd><p>To create or modify (overwrite) a user defined share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare delete sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To delete a user defined share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare list wildcard-sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To list user defined shares.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare info wildcard-sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To print information about user defined shares.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482018"></a><h2>PARAMETERS</h2><p>Parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</p><p> Some parameters are specific to the [global] section (e.g., <span class="emphasis"><em>security</em></span>). Some parameters are usable in all sections (e.g., <span class="emphasis"><em>create mask</em></span>). All others are permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the following descriptions the [homes] and [printers] sections will be @@ -196,9 +196,9 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares Parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may not create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer to the preferred synonym. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS"><a name="id2538515"></a><h2>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532531"></a><h2>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</h2><p> Many of the strings that are settable in the config file can take substitutions. For example the option - <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">path = /tmp/%u</span>”</span> is interpreted as <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">path = /tmp/john</span>”</span> if the user connected with the + “<span class="quote">path = /tmp/%u</span>” is interpreted as “<span class="quote">path = /tmp/john</span>” if the user connected with the username john. </p><p> These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, but there are some general substitutions @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares 139</code></em>. This will cause Samba to not listen on port 445 and will permit include functionality to function as it did with Samba 2.x. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">%L</span></dt><dd><p>the NetBIOS name of the server. This allows you to change your config based on what - the client calls you. Your server can have a <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">dual personality</span>”</span>. + the client calls you. Your server can have a “<span class="quote">dual personality</span>”. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">%M</span></dt><dd><p>the Internet name of the client machine. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">%R</span></dt><dd><p>the selected protocol level after protocol negotiation. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">%d</span></dt><dd><p>the process id of the current server @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares auto.map entry is split up as <code class="literal">%N:%p</code>.</p></dd></dl></div><p> There are some quite creative things that can be done with these substitutions and other <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> options. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="NAME MANGLING"><a name="NAMEMANGLINGSECT"></a><h2>NAME MANGLING</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="NAMEMANGLINGSECT"></a><h2>NAME MANGLING</h2><p> Samba supports <code class="literal">name mangling</code> so that DOS and Windows clients can use files that don't conform to the 8.3 format. It can also be set to adjust the case of 8.3 format filenames. </p><p> @@ -276,50 +276,50 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares options are set as follows, "case sensitive = yes", "case preserve = no", "short preserve case = no" then the "default case" option will be applied and will modify all filenames sent from the client when accessing this share. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION"><a name="VALIDATIONSECT"></a><h2>NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="VALIDATIONSECT"></a><h2>NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</h2><p> There are a number of ways in which a user can connect to a service. The server uses the following steps in determining if it will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the steps fail, the connection request is rejected. However, if one of the steps succeeds, the following steps are not checked. </p><p> - If the service is marked <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">guest only = yes</span>”</span> and the server is running with share-level - security (<span class="quote">“<span class="quote">security = share</span>”</span>, steps 1 to 5 are skipped. - </p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p> + If the service is marked “<span class="quote">guest only = yes</span>” and the server is running with share-level + security (“<span class="quote">security = share</span>”, steps 1 to 5 are skipped. + </p><div class="orderedlist"><ol type="1"><li><p> If the client has passed a username/password pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX system's password programs, the connection is made as that username. This includes the <code class="literal">\\server\service</code>%<em class="replaceable"><code>username</code></em> method of passing a username. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> If the client has previously registered a username with the system and now supplies a correct password for that username, the connection is allowed. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> The client's NetBIOS name and any previously used usernames are checked against the supplied password. If they match, the connection is allowed as the corresponding user. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> If the client has previously validated a username/password pair with the server and the client has passed the validation token, that username is used. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> If a <code class="literal">user = </code> field is given in the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file for the service and the client has supplied a password, and that password matches (according to the UNIX system's password checking) with one of the usernames from the <code class="literal">user =</code> field, the connection is made as the username in the <code class="literal">user =</code> line. If one of the usernames in the <code class="literal">user =</code> list begins with a <code class="literal">@</code>, that name expands to a list of names in the group of the same name. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> If the service is a guest service, a connection is made as the username given in the <code class="literal">guest account =</code> for the service, irrespective of the supplied password. - </p></li></ol></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="REGISTRY-BASED CONFIGURATION"><a name="id2539216"></a><h2>REGISTRY-BASED CONFIGURATION</h2><p> + </p></li></ol></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2533232"></a><h2>REGISTRY-BASED CONFIGURATION</h2><p> Starting with Samba version 3.2.0, the capability to store Samba configuration in the registry is available. The configuration is stored in the registry key <span class="emphasis"><em><code class="literal">HKLM\Software\Samba\smbconf</code></em></span>. There are two levels of registry configuration: - </p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>Share definitions stored in registry are used. + </p><div class="orderedlist"><ol type="1"><li><p>Share definitions stored in registry are used. This is triggered by setting the global parameter <em class="parameter"><code>registry shares</code></em> - to <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">yes</span>”</span> in <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span>. + to “<span class="quote">yes</span>” in <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span>. </p><p>The registry shares are loaded not at startup but on demand at runtime by <span class="emphasis"><em>smbd</em></span>. Shares defined in <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span> take priority over shares of the same name defined in - registry.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Global <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span> + registry.</p></li><li><p>Global <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span> options stored in registry are used. This can be activated in two different ways:</p><p>Firstly, a registry only configuration is triggered by setting @@ -360,19 +360,19 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares registry based configuration locally, i.e. directly accessing the database file, circumventing the server. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER"><a name="id2539391"></a><h2>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</h2><div class="section"><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="section" title="abort shutdown script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539402"></a> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2533407"></a><h2>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</h2><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533418"></a> abort shutdown script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539403"></a><a name="ABORTSHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> that +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533419"></a><a name="ABORTSHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> that should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHUTDOWNSCRIPT" target="_top">shutdown script</a>.</p><p>If the connected user posseses the <code class="constant">SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege</code>, right, this command will be run as root.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>abort shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal">""</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>abort shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/sbin/shutdown -c</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="access based share enum (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539481"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533498"></a> access based share enum (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539482"></a><a name="ACCESSBASEDSHAREENUM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533499"></a><a name="ACCESSBASEDSHAREENUM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for a service, then the share hosted by the service will only be visible to users who have read or write access to the share during share enumeration (for example net view \\sambaserver). This has @@ -381,10 +381,10 @@ access based share enum (S) descriptors on files contained on the share are not used in computing enumeration access rights.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>access based share enum</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="acl check permissions (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539530"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533546"></a> acl check permissions (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539531"></a><a name="ACLCHECKPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls what <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>does on receiving a protocol request of "open for delete" +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533547"></a><a name="ACLCHECKPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls what <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>does on receiving a protocol request of "open for delete" from a Windows client. If a Windows client doesn't have permissions to delete a file then they expect this to be denied at open time. POSIX systems normally only detect restrictions on delete by actually attempting to delete the file or directory. As Windows clients can (and do) "back out" a @@ -404,10 +404,10 @@ acl check permissions (S) with slightly different semantics was introduced in 3.0.20. That older version is not documented here. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl check permissions</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="acl compatibility (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539626"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533642"></a> acl compatibility (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539627"></a><a name="ACLCOMPATIBILITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies what OS ACL semantics should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533643"></a><a name="ACLCOMPATIBILITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies what OS ACL semantics should be compatible with. Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>winnt</em></span> for Windows NT 4, <span class="emphasis"><em>win2k</em></span> for Windows 2000 and above and <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>. If you specify <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, the value for this parameter @@ -416,10 +416,10 @@ acl compatibility (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl compatibility</code></em> = <code class="literal">win2k</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="acl group control (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539696"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533713"></a> acl group control (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539697"></a><a name="ACLGROUPCONTROL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533714"></a><a name="ACLGROUPCONTROL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> In a POSIX filesystem, only the owner of a file or directory and the superuser can modify the permissions and ACLs on a file. If this parameter is set, then Samba overrides this restriction, and also allows the <span class="emphasis"><em>primary group owner</em></span> of a file or directory to modify the permissions and ACLs @@ -446,10 +446,10 @@ acl group control (S) <em class="parameter"><code>dos filemode</code></em> option. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl group control</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="acl map full control (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539792"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533809"></a> acl map full control (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539793"></a><a name="ACLMAPFULLCONTROL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533810"></a><a name="ACLMAPFULLCONTROL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>maps a POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" (read/write/execute), the maximum allowed POSIX permission set, into a Windows ACL of "FULL CONTROL". If this parameter is set to true any POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" will be returned in a Windows ACL as "FULL CONTROL", is this parameter is set to false any @@ -457,10 +457,10 @@ acl map full control (S) execute. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl map full control</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add group script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539843"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533860"></a> add group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539844"></a><a name="ADDGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533861"></a><a name="ADDGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the full pathname to a script that will be run <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a new group is requested. It will expand any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> to the group name passed. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools. The script is free to create a group with @@ -470,10 +470,10 @@ add group script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/groupadd %g</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add machine script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539918"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533935"></a> add machine script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539919"></a><a name="ADDMACHINESCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533936"></a><a name="ADDMACHINESCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a machine is added to Samba's domain and a Unix account matching the machine's name appended with a "$" does not @@ -484,22 +484,22 @@ add machine script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add machine script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/adduser -n -g machines -c Machine -d /var/lib/nobody -s /bin/false %u</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add port command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539997"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534014"></a> add port command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539998"></a><a name="ADDPORTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Samba 3.0.23 introduced support for adding printer ports +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534015"></a><a name="ADDPORTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Samba 3.0.23 introduced support for adding printer ports remotely using the Windows "Add Standard TCP/IP Port Wizard". This option defines an external program to be executed when smbd receives a request to add a new Port to the system. - The script is passed two parameters:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>port name</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>device URI</code></em></p></li></ul></div><p>The deviceURI is in the for of socket://<hostname>[:<portnumber>] + The script is passed two parameters:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>port name</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>device URI</code></em></p></li></ul></div><p>The deviceURI is in the for of socket://<hostname>[:<portnumber>] or lpd://<hostname>/<queuename>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add port command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add port command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/samba/scripts/addport.sh</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="addprinter command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540082"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534096"></a> addprinter command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540083"></a><a name="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534097"></a><a name="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the "Printers..." folder displayed a share listing. The APW @@ -513,7 +513,7 @@ addprinter command (G) to the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file in order that it can be shared by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>.</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>addprinter command</code></em> is automatically invoked with the following parameter (in - order):</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>printer name</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>share name</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>port name</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>driver name</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>location</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>Windows 9x driver location</code></em></p></li></ul></div><p>All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent + order):</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>printer name</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>share name</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>port name</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>driver name</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>location</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>Windows 9x driver location</code></em></p></li></ul></div><p>All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent by the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception. The "Windows 9x driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility only. The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers @@ -530,10 +530,10 @@ addprinter command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>addprinter command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/addprinter</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add share command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540270"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534284"></a> add share command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540271"></a><a name="ADDSHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534286"></a><a name="ADDSHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The <em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> is used to define an external program or script which will add a new service definition to @@ -549,13 +549,13 @@ add share command (G) </p><p> When executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will automatically invoke the <em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> with five parameters. - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location of the global <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>shareName</code></em> - the name of the new share. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>pathName</code></em> - path to an **existing** + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location of the global <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file. + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>shareName</code></em> - the name of the new share. + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>pathName</code></em> - path to an **existing** directory on disk. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> - comment string to associate with the new + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> - comment string to associate with the new share. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>max + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> Number of maximum simultaneous connections to this share. @@ -565,10 +565,10 @@ add share command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/bin/addshare</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add user script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540455"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534471"></a> add user script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540456"></a><a name="ADDUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534472"></a><a name="ADDUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the full pathname to a script that will be run <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> under special circumstances described below. @@ -603,10 +603,10 @@ add user script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add user script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/add_user %u</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="add user to group script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540666"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534682"></a> add user to group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540667"></a><a name="ADDUSERTOGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534683"></a><a name="ADDUSERTOGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Full path to the script that will be called when a user is added to a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools. It will be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span>. Any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> will be replaced with the group name and @@ -618,20 +618,20 @@ add user to group script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add user to group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/adduser %u %g</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="administrative share (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540753"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534769"></a> administrative share (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540754"></a><a name="ADMINISTRATIVESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> for +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534770"></a><a name="ADMINISTRATIVESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> for a share, then the share will be an administrative share. The Administrative Shares are the default network shares created by all Windows NT-based operating systems. These are shares like C$, D$ or ADMIN$. The type of these shares is STYPE_DISKTREE_HIDDEN.</p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> for more information about this option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>administrative share</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="admin users (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540811"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534827"></a> admin users (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540812"></a><a name="ADMINUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users who will be granted +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534828"></a><a name="ADMINUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users who will be granted administrative privileges on the share. This means that they will do all file operations as the super-user (root).</p><p>You should use this option very carefully, as any user in this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, @@ -640,20 +640,20 @@ admin users (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>admin users</code></em> = <code class="literal">jason</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="afs share (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540883"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534900"></a> afs share (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540884"></a><a name="AFSSHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether special AFS features are enabled +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534901"></a><a name="AFSSHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether special AFS features are enabled for this share. If enabled, it assumes that the directory exported via the <em class="parameter"><code>path</code></em> parameter is a local AFS import. The special AFS features include the attempt to hand-craft an AFS token if you enabled --with-fake-kaserver in configure. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>afs share</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="afs username map (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540931"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534947"></a> afs username map (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540932"></a><a name="AFSUSERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If you are using the fake kaserver AFS feature, you might +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534948"></a><a name="AFSUSERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If you are using the fake kaserver AFS feature, you might want to hand-craft the usernames you are creating tokens for. For example this is necessary if you have users from several domain in your AFS Protection Database. One possible scheme to code users @@ -663,10 +663,10 @@ afs username map (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>afs username map</code></em> = <code class="literal">%u@afs.samba.org</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="aio read size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540993"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535009"></a> aio read size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540994"></a><a name="AIOREADSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535010"></a><a name="AIOREADSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will read from file asynchronously when size of request is bigger than this value. Note that it happens only for non-chained and non-chaining @@ -677,10 +677,10 @@ aio read size (S) # Use asynchronous I/O for reads bigger than 16KB request size</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="aio write behind (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541080"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535096"></a> aio write behind (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541081"></a><a name="AIOWRITEBEHIND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535098"></a><a name="AIOWRITEBEHIND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support, Samba will not wait until write requests are finished before returning the result to the client for files listed in this parameter. Instead, Samba will immediately return that the write @@ -695,10 +695,10 @@ aio write behind (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio write behind</code></em> = <code class="literal">/*.tmp/</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="aio write size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541159"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535175"></a> aio write size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541160"></a><a name="AIOWRITESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535176"></a><a name="AIOWRITESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will write to file asynchronously when size of request is bigger than this value. Note that it happens only for non-chained and non-chaining @@ -709,10 +709,10 @@ aio write size (S) # Use asynchronous I/O for writes bigger than 16KB request size</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="algorithmic rid base (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541245"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535261"></a> algorithmic rid base (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541246"></a><a name="ALGORITHMICRIDBASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This determines how Samba will use its +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535262"></a><a name="ALGORITHMICRIDBASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This determines how Samba will use its algorithmic mapping from uids/gid to the RIDs needed to construct NT Security Identifiers. </p><p>Setting this option to a larger value could be useful to sites @@ -727,10 +727,10 @@ algorithmic rid base (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>algorithmic rid base</code></em> = <code class="literal">100000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="allocation roundup size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541315"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535331"></a> allocation roundup size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541316"></a><a name="ALLOCATIONROUNDUPSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an administrator to tune the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535332"></a><a name="ALLOCATIONROUNDUPSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an administrator to tune the allocation size reported to Windows clients. The default size of 1Mb generally results in improved Windows client performance. However, rounding the allocation size may cause @@ -742,10 +742,10 @@ allocation roundup size (S) </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>allocation roundup size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0 # (to disable roundups)</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="allow trusted domains (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541379"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535395"></a> allow trusted domains (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541380"></a><a name="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535396"></a><a name="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option only takes effect when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> option is set to <code class="constant">server</code>, <code class="constant">domain</code> or <code class="constant">ads</code>. If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from @@ -760,10 +760,10 @@ allow trusted domains (G) Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA. This can make implementing a security boundary difficult.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>allow trusted domains</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="announce as (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541452"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535468"></a> announce as (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541453"></a><a name="ANNOUNCEAS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what type of server <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535469"></a><a name="ANNOUNCEAS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what type of server <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse list. By default this is set to Windows NT. The valid options are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"), "NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, @@ -775,20 +775,20 @@ announce as (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>announce as</code></em> = <code class="literal">Win95</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="announce version (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541521"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535537"></a> announce version (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541522"></a><a name="ANNOUNCEVERSION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the major and minor version numbers +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535538"></a><a name="ANNOUNCEVERSION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the major and minor version numbers that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server. The default is 4.9. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>announce version</code></em> = <code class="literal">4.9</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>announce version</code></em> = <code class="literal">2.0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="auth methods (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541578"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535594"></a> auth methods (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541579"></a><a name="AUTHMETHODS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535595"></a><a name="AUTHMETHODS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows the administrator to chose what authentication methods <code class="literal">smbd</code> will use when authenticating a user. This option defaults to sensible values based on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a>. This should be considered a developer option and used only in rare circumstances. In the majority (if not all) @@ -809,18 +809,18 @@ auth methods (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>auth methods</code></em> = <code class="literal">guest sam winbind</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="available (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541684"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535700"></a> available (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541685"></a><a name="AVAILABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535701"></a><a name="AVAILABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If <em class="parameter"><code>available = no</code></em>, then <span class="emphasis"><em>ALL</em></span> attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are logged.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>available</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="bind interfaces only (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541731"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535747"></a> bind interfaces only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541732"></a><a name="BINDINTERFACESONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter allows the Samba admin +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535748"></a><a name="BINDINTERFACESONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter allows the Samba admin to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests. It affects file service <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and name service <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> in a slightly different ways.</p><p> For name service it causes <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to bind to ports 137 and 138 on the @@ -861,10 +861,10 @@ bind interfaces only (G) from starting/stopping/restarting <code class="literal">smbd</code> and <code class="literal">nmbd</code>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>bind interfaces only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="blocking locks (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542058"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536075"></a> blocking locks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542059"></a><a name="BLOCKINGLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls the behavior +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536076"></a><a name="BLOCKINGLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when given a request by a client to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the request has a time limit associated with it.</p><p>If this parameter is set and the lock range requested @@ -875,10 +875,10 @@ blocking locks (S) will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range cannot be obtained.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>blocking locks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="block size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542122"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536139"></a> block size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542124"></a><a name="BLOCKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when reporting disk free +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536140"></a><a name="BLOCKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when reporting disk free sizes. By default, this reports a disk block size of 1024 bytes. </p><p>Changing this parameter may have some effect on the efficiency of client writes, this is not yet confirmed. This @@ -892,27 +892,27 @@ block size (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>block size</code></em> = <code class="literal">4096</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="browsable"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542200"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536217"></a> <a name="BROWSABLE"></a>browsable -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542202"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#BROWSEABLE">browseable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="browseable (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542227"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536218"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#BROWSEABLE">browseable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536244"></a> browseable (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542228"></a><a name="BROWSEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether this share is seen in +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536245"></a><a name="BROWSEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>browseable</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="browse list (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542266"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536282"></a> browse list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542267"></a><a name="BROWSELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will serve a browse list to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536284"></a><a name="BROWSELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will serve a browse list to a client doing a <code class="literal">NetServerEnum</code> call. Normally set to <code class="constant">yes</code>. You should never need to change this.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>browse list</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cache directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542321"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536337"></a> cache directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542322"></a><a name="CACHEDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Usually, most of the TDB files are stored in the <em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em>. Since Samba 3.4.0, it is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536338"></a><a name="CACHEDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Usually, most of the TDB files are stored in the <em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em>. Since Samba 3.4.0, it is possible to differentiate between TDB files with persistent data and TDB files with non-persistent data using the <em class="parameter"><code>state directory</code></em> and the @@ -923,25 +923,25 @@ cache directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cache directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/samba/locks/cache</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="casesignames"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542397"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536414"></a> <a name="CASESIGNAMES"></a>casesignames -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542398"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#CASESENSITIVE">case sensitive</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="case sensitive (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542424"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536415"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#CASESENSITIVE">case sensitive</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536440"></a> case sensitive (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542425"></a><a name="CASESENSITIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>See the discussion in the section <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>case sensitive</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536442"></a><a name="CASESENSITIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>See the discussion in the section <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>case sensitive</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="change notify (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542471"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536487"></a> change notify (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542472"></a><a name="CHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should reply +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536488"></a><a name="CHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should reply to a client's file change notify requests. </p><p>You should never need to change this parameter</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>change notify</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="change share command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542514"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536530"></a> change share command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542515"></a><a name="CHANGESHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536531"></a><a name="CHANGESHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The <em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> is used to define an external program or script which will modify an existing service definition in <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. @@ -956,15 +956,15 @@ program or script which will modify an existing service definition in <code clas </p><p> When executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will automatically invoke the <em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> with five parameters. - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location of the global <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>shareName</code></em> - the name of the new + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>shareName</code></em> - the name of the new share. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>pathName</code></em> - path to an **existing** + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>pathName</code></em> - path to an **existing** directory on disk. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> - comment string to associate + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> - comment string to associate with the new share. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>max + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> Number of maximum simultaneous connections to this share. @@ -976,10 +976,10 @@ program or script which will modify an existing service definition in <code clas </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/bin/changeshare</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="check password script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542692"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536709"></a> check password script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542693"></a><a name="CHECKPASSWORDSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to check password +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536710"></a><a name="CHECKPASSWORDSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to check password complexity. The password is sent to the program's standard input.</p><p>The program must return 0 on a good password, or any other value if the password is bad. In case the password is considered weak (the program does not return 0) the @@ -988,10 +988,10 @@ check password script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>check password script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/sbin/crackcheck</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client lanman auth (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542766"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536782"></a> client lanman auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542767"></a><a name="CLIENTLANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> and other samba client +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536783"></a><a name="CLIENTLANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> and other samba client tools will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the weaker LANMAN password hash. If disabled, only server which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000, Samba, etc... but not @@ -1002,10 +1002,10 @@ client lanman auth (G) auth</code> parameter is enabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be attempted.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client lanman auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client ldap sasl wrapping (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542842"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536858"></a> client ldap sasl wrapping (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542843"></a><a name="CLIENTLDAPSASLWRAPPING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536859"></a><a name="CLIENTLDAPSASLWRAPPING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTLDAPSASLWRAPPING" target="_top">client ldap sasl wrapping</a> defines whether ldap traffic will be signed or signed and encrypted (sealed). Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>plain</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>sign</em></span> @@ -1033,10 +1033,10 @@ client ldap sasl wrapping (G) <span class="emphasis"><em>seal</em></span>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client ldap sasl wrapping</code></em> = <code class="literal">plain</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client ntlmv2 auth (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542957"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536974"></a> client ntlmv2 auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542958"></a><a name="CLIENTNTLMV2AUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536975"></a><a name="CLIENTNTLMV2AUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the NTLMv2 encrypted password response.</p><p>If enabled, only an NTLMv2 and LMv2 response (both much more secure than earlier versions) will be sent. Many servers @@ -1048,16 +1048,16 @@ client ntlmv2 auth (G) those following 'best practice' security polices) only allow NTLMv2 responses, and not the weaker LM or NTLM.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client ntlmv2 auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client plaintext auth (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543045"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537061"></a> client plaintext auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543046"></a><a name="CLIENTPLAINTEXTAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies whether a client should send a plaintext +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537062"></a><a name="CLIENTPLAINTEXTAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies whether a client should send a plaintext password if the server does not support encrypted passwords.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client plaintext auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client schannel (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543084"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537100"></a> client schannel (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543085"></a><a name="CLIENTSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537101"></a><a name="CLIENTSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether the client offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel. <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL" target="_top">client schannel = no</a> does not offer the schannel, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL" target="_top">client schannel = auto</a> offers the schannel but does not @@ -1067,10 +1067,10 @@ client schannel (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client schannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client signing (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543168"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537184"></a> client signing (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543169"></a><a name="CLIENTSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB signing. Possible values +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537185"></a><a name="CLIENTSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB signing. Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>mandatory</em></span> and <span class="emphasis"><em>disabled</em></span>. </p><p>When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced. @@ -1078,19 +1078,19 @@ client signing (G) to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client signing</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="client use spnego (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543222"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537239"></a> client use spnego (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543224"></a><a name="CLIENTUSESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This variable controls whether Samba clients will try +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537240"></a><a name="CLIENTUSESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This variable controls whether Samba clients will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with supporting servers (including WindowsXP, Windows2000 and Samba 3.0) to agree upon an authentication mechanism. This enables Kerberos authentication in particular.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client use spnego</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cluster addresses (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543264"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537281"></a> cluster addresses (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543266"></a><a name="CLUSTERADDRESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With this parameter you can add additional addresses +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537282"></a><a name="CLUSTERADDRESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With this parameter you can add additional addresses nmbd will register with a WINS server. These addresses are not necessarily present on all nodes simultaneously, but they will be registered with the WINS server so that clients can contact @@ -1099,20 +1099,20 @@ cluster addresses (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cluster addresses</code></em> = <code class="literal">10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.3</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="clustering (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543320"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537337"></a> clustering (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543322"></a><a name="CLUSTERING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should contact +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537338"></a><a name="CLUSTERING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should contact ctdb for accessing its tdb files and use ctdb as a backend for its messaging backend. </p><p>Set this parameter to <code class="literal">yes</code> only if you have a cluster setup with ctdb running. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>clustering</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="comment (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543369"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537386"></a> comment (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543370"></a><a name="COMMENT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a text field that is seen next to a share +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537387"></a><a name="COMMENT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a text field that is seen next to a share when a client does a queries the server, either via the network neighborhood or via <code class="literal">net view</code> to list what shares are available.</p><p>If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the @@ -1121,10 +1121,10 @@ comment (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> = <code class="literal">Fred's Files</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="config backend (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543444"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537460"></a> config backend (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543445"></a><a name="CONFIGBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537461"></a><a name="CONFIGBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls the backend for storing the configuration. Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>file</em></span> (the default) and <span class="emphasis"><em>registry</em></span>. @@ -1142,10 +1142,10 @@ config backend (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>config backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">registry</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="config file (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543533"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537549"></a> config file (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543534"></a><a name="CONFIGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the config file +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537550"></a><a name="CONFIGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the config file to use, instead of the default (usually <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>). There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set in the config file!</p><p>For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed @@ -1155,10 +1155,10 @@ config file (G) (allowing you to special case the config files of just a few clients).</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>config file</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="copy (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543598"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537614"></a> copy (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543599"></a><a name="COPY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows you to "clone" service +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537616"></a><a name="COPY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows you to "clone" service entries. The specified service is simply duplicated under the current service's name. Any parameters specified in the current section will override those in the section being copied.</p><p>This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and @@ -1168,13 +1168,13 @@ copy (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>copy</code></em> = <code class="literal">otherservice</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="create mode"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543660"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537677"></a> <a name="CREATEMODE"></a>create mode -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543662"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#CREATEMASK">create mask</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="create mask (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543687"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537678"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#CREATEMASK">create mask</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537704"></a> create mask (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543688"></a><a name="CREATEMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537705"></a><a name="CREATEMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> When a file is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> set here will @@ -1195,10 +1195,10 @@ create mask (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>create mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0775</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="csc policy (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543809"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537825"></a> csc policy (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543810"></a><a name="CSCPOLICY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537826"></a><a name="CSCPOLICY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This stands for <span class="emphasis"><em>client-side caching policy</em></span>, and specifies how clients capable of offline caching will cache the files in the share. The valid values are: manual, documents, programs, disable. </p><p> @@ -1210,10 +1210,10 @@ csc policy (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>csc policy</code></em> = <code class="literal">programs</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ctdbd socket (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543884"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537900"></a> ctdbd socket (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543885"></a><a name="CTDBDSOCKET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If you set <code class="literal">clustering=yes</code>, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537902"></a><a name="CTDBDSOCKET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If you set <code class="literal">clustering=yes</code>, you need to tell Samba where ctdbd listens on its unix domain socket. The default path as of ctdb 1.0 is /tmp/ctdb.socket which you have to explicitly set for Samba in smb.conf. @@ -1221,10 +1221,10 @@ ctdbd socket (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ctdbd socket</code></em> = <code class="literal">/tmp/ctdb.socket</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cups connection timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543944"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537960"></a> cups connection timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543945"></a><a name="CUPSCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537961"></a><a name="CUPSCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">cups</code>. </p><p> If set, this option specifies the number of seconds that smbd will wait @@ -1234,10 +1234,10 @@ cups connection timeout (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups connection timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">60</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cups options (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544016"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538032"></a> cups options (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544017"></a><a name="CUPSOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538033"></a><a name="CUPSOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">cups</code>. Its value is a free form string of options passed directly to the cups library. @@ -1259,10 +1259,10 @@ cups options (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups options</code></em> = <code class="literal">"raw media=a4"</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="cups server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2487373"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2481393"></a> cups server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2487374"></a><a name="CUPSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2481394"></a><a name="CUPSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">cups</code>. </p><p> If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS <code class="filename">client.conf</code>. This is @@ -1276,10 +1276,10 @@ cups server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups server</code></em> = <code class="literal">mycupsserver:1631</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="deadtime (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544360"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538376"></a> deadtime (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544361"></a><a name="DEADTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538377"></a><a name="DEADTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes effect if the number of open files is zero.</p><p>This is useful to stop a server's resources being @@ -1291,10 +1291,10 @@ deadtime (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>deadtime</code></em> = <code class="literal">15</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug class (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544437"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538453"></a> debug class (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544438"></a><a name="DEBUGCLASS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538454"></a><a name="DEBUGCLASS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> With this boolean parameter enabled, the debug class (DBGC_CLASS) will be displayed in the debug header. </p><p> @@ -1302,20 +1302,20 @@ debug class (G) section about <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGLEVEL" target="_top">log level</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug class</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug hires timestamp (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544488"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538504"></a> debug hires timestamp (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544489"></a><a name="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538506"></a><a name="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp message header when turned on. </p><p> Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug hires timestamp</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug pid (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544543"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538559"></a> debug pid (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544544"></a><a name="DEBUGPID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538560"></a><a name="DEBUGPID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> When using only one log file for more then one forked <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>-process there may be hard to follow which process outputs which message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on. @@ -1323,10 +1323,10 @@ debug pid (G) Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug pid</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug prefix timestamp (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544605"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538621"></a> debug prefix timestamp (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544606"></a><a name="DEBUGPREFIXTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538622"></a><a name="DEBUGPREFIXTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> With this option enabled, the timestamp message header is prefixed to the debug message without the filename and function information that is included with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> parameter. This gives timestamps to the messages without adding an additional line. @@ -1334,32 +1334,32 @@ debug prefix timestamp (G) Note that this parameter overrides the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> parameter. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug prefix timestamp</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="timestamp logs"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544668"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538684"></a> <a name="TIMESTAMPLOGS"></a>timestamp logs -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544669"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug timestamp (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544695"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538686"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538711"></a> debug timestamp (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544696"></a><a name="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538712"></a><a name="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Samba debug log messages are timestamped by default. If you are running at a high <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGLEVEL" target="_top">debug level</a> these timestamps can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping to be turned off. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug timestamp</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debug uid (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544743"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538760"></a> debug uid (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544744"></a><a name="DEBUGUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538761"></a><a name="DEBUGUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers in the log file if turned on. </p><p> Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug uid</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dedicated keytab file (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544797"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538814"></a> dedicated keytab file (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544798"></a><a name="DEDICATEDKEYTABFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538815"></a><a name="DEDICATEDKEYTABFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Specifies the path to the kerberos keytab file when <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#KERBEROSMETHOD" target="_top">kerberos method</a> is set to "dedicated keytab". @@ -1367,16 +1367,16 @@ dedicated keytab file (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dedicated keytab file</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/etc/krb5.keytab</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="default case (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544860"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538876"></a> default case (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544861"></a><a name="DEFAULTCASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538877"></a><a name="DEFAULTCASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>. Also note the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHORTPRESERVECASE" target="_top">short preserve case</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default case</code></em> = <code class="literal">lower</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="default devmode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544914"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538930"></a> default devmode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544915"></a><a name="DEFAULTDEVMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only applicable to <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE" target="_top">printable</a> services. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538931"></a><a name="DEFAULTDEVMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only applicable to <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE" target="_top">printable</a> services. When smbd is serving Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba server has a Device Mode which defines things such as paper size and orientation and duplex settings. The device mode can only correctly be @@ -1399,13 +1399,13 @@ default devmode (S) see the <a class="ulink" href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/" target="_top">MSDN documentation</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default devmode</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="default"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545002"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539018"></a> <a name="DEFAULT"></a>default -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545003"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DEFAULTSERVICE">default service</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="default service (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545029"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539019"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DEFAULTSERVICE">default service</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539045"></a> default service (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545030"></a><a name="DEFAULTSERVICE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a service +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539046"></a><a name="DEFAULTSERVICE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot be found. Note that the square brackets are <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> given in the parameter value (see example below).</p><p>There is no default value for this parameter. If this @@ -1419,10 +1419,10 @@ default service (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default service</code></em> = <code class="literal">pub</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="defer sharing violations (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545130"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539146"></a> defer sharing violations (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545131"></a><a name="DEFERSHARINGVIOLATIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539148"></a><a name="DEFERSHARINGVIOLATIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Windows allows specifying how a file will be shared with other processes when it is opened. Sharing violations occur when a file is opened by a different process using options that violate @@ -1435,19 +1435,19 @@ defer sharing violations (G) designed to enable Samba to more correctly emulate Windows. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>defer sharing violations</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete group script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545185"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539201"></a> delete group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545186"></a><a name="DELETEGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the full pathname to a script that will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539202"></a><a name="DELETEGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the full pathname to a script that will be run <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a group is requested to be deleted. It will expand any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> to the group name passed. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete group script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="deleteprinter command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545241"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539258"></a> deleteprinter command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545242"></a><a name="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539259"></a><a name="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now possible to delete a printer at run time by issuing the DeletePrinter() RPC call.</p><p>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be @@ -1465,18 +1465,18 @@ deleteprinter command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>deleteprinter command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/removeprinter</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete readonly (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545369"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539385"></a> delete readonly (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545370"></a><a name="DELETEREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539386"></a><a name="DELETEREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted. This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.</p><p>This option may be useful for running applications such as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete readonly</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete share command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545414"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539430"></a> delete share command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545415"></a><a name="DELETESHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539431"></a><a name="DELETESHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The <em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> is used to define an external program or script which will remove an existing service definition from @@ -1491,9 +1491,9 @@ delete share command (G) </p><p> When executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will automatically invoke the <em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> with two parameters. - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location of the global <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>shareName</code></em> - the name of + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>shareName</code></em> - the name of the existing service. </p></li></ul></div><p> This parameter is only used to remove file shares. To delete printer shares, @@ -1502,10 +1502,10 @@ delete share command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/bin/delshare</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete user from group script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545566"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539582"></a> delete user from group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545567"></a><a name="DELETEUSERFROMGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Full path to the script that will be called when +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539583"></a><a name="DELETEUSERFROMGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Full path to the script that will be called when a user is removed from a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools. It will be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span>. Any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> will be replaced with the group name and @@ -1514,10 +1514,10 @@ delete user from group script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete user from group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/deluser %u %g</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete user script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545645"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539662"></a> delete user script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545646"></a><a name="DELETEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the full pathname to a script that will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539663"></a><a name="DELETEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when managing users with remote RPC (NT) tools. </p><p>This script is called when a remote client removes a user @@ -1526,10 +1526,10 @@ delete user script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete user script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/del_user %u</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="delete veto files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545722"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539738"></a> delete veto files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545723"></a><a name="DELETEVETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used when Samba is attempting to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539739"></a><a name="DELETEVETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used when Samba is attempting to delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOFILES" target="_top">veto files</a> option). If this option is set to <code class="constant">no</code> (the default) then if a vetoed @@ -1543,10 +1543,10 @@ delete veto files (S) directories to be transparently deleted when the parent directory is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete veto files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dfree cache time (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545807"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539824"></a> dfree cache time (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545808"></a><a name="DFREECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539825"></a><a name="DFREECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The <em class="parameter"><code>dfree cache time</code></em> should only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the @@ -1559,10 +1559,10 @@ dfree cache time (S) By default this parameter is zero, meaning no caching will be done. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dfree cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">dfree cache time = 60</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dfree command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545880"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539896"></a> dfree command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545881"></a><a name="DFREECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539897"></a><a name="DFREECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The <em class="parameter"><code>dfree command</code></em> setting should only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" @@ -1600,13 +1600,13 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $(NF-4),$(NF-2)}' By default internal routines for determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dfree command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/dfree</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="directory mode"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546001"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540018"></a> <a name="DIRECTORYMODE"></a>directory mode -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546002"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DIRECTORYMASK">directory mask</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="directory mask (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546028"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540019"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DIRECTORYMASK">directory mask</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540045"></a> directory mask (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546029"></a><a name="DIRECTORYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is the octal modes which are +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540046"></a><a name="DIRECTORYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories.</p><p>When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, @@ -1624,18 +1624,18 @@ directory mask (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0775</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="directory name cache size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546134"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540150"></a> directory name cache size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546135"></a><a name="DIRECTORYNAMECACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540151"></a><a name="DIRECTORYNAMECACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the the size of the directory name cache. It will be needed to turn this off for *BSD systems. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory name cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">100</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="directory security mask (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546173"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540190"></a> directory security mask (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546174"></a><a name="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540191"></a><a name="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits will be set when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.</p><p> @@ -1655,19 +1655,19 @@ directory security mask (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory security mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0700</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="disable netbios (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546274"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540290"></a> disable netbios (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546275"></a><a name="DISABLENETBIOS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540291"></a><a name="DISABLENETBIOS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support in Samba. Netbios is the only available form of browsing in - all windows versions except for 2000 and XP. </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Clients that only support netbios won't be able to + all windows versions except for 2000 and XP. </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Clients that only support netbios won't be able to see your samba server when netbios support is disabled. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>disable netbios</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="disable spoolss (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546320"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540336"></a> disable spoolss (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546321"></a><a name="DISABLESPOOLSS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Enabling this parameter will disable Samba's support +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540337"></a><a name="DISABLESPOOLSS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Enabling this parameter will disable Samba's support for the SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC's and will yield identical behavior as Samba 2.0.x. Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using Lanman style printing commands. Windows 9x/ME will be unaffected by @@ -1679,10 +1679,10 @@ disable spoolss (G) <span class="emphasis"><em>Be very careful about enabling this parameter.</em></span> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>disable spoolss</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="display charset (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546371"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540387"></a> display charset (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546372"></a><a name="DISPLAYCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540388"></a><a name="DISPLAYCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Specifies the charset that samba will use to print messages to stdout and stderr. The default value is "LOCALE", which means automatically set, depending on the current locale. The value should generally be the same as the value of the parameter @@ -1691,10 +1691,10 @@ display charset (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>display charset</code></em> = <code class="literal">UTF8</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dmapi support (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546437"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540454"></a> dmapi support (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546438"></a><a name="DMAPISUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should use DMAPI to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540455"></a><a name="DMAPISUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should use DMAPI to determine whether a file is offline or not. This would typically be used in conjunction with a hierarchical storage system that automatically migrates files to tape. @@ -1709,10 +1709,10 @@ dmapi support (S) </p><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dmapi support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dns proxy (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546496"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540512"></a> dns proxy (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546497"></a><a name="DNSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies that <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server and +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540514"></a><a name="DNSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies that <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of the name-querying client.</p><p>Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 @@ -1721,10 +1721,10 @@ dns proxy (G) DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking action.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dns proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="domain logons (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546560"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540576"></a> domain logons (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546561"></a><a name="DOMAINLOGONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540577"></a><a name="DOMAINLOGONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, the Samba server will provide the netlogon service for Windows 9X network logons for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> it is in. @@ -1734,10 +1734,10 @@ domain logons (G) Samba HOWTO Collection. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>domain logons</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="domain master (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546613"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540629"></a> domain master (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546614"></a><a name="DOMAINMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540630"></a><a name="DOMAINMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Tell <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> to enable WAN-wide browse list collation. Setting this option causes <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a domain master browser for its given @@ -1763,10 +1763,10 @@ domain master (G) Samba will function as a BDC. In general, this parameter should be set to 'No' only on a BDC. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>domain master</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dont descend (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546804"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540820"></a> dont descend (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546805"></a><a name="DONTDESCEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>There are certain directories on some systems +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540822"></a><a name="DONTDESCEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>There are certain directories on some systems (e.g., the <code class="filename">/proc</code> tree under Linux) that are either not of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive). This parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list of directories @@ -1777,18 +1777,18 @@ dont descend (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dont descend</code></em> = <code class="literal">/proc,/dev</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dos charset (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546882"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540899"></a> dos charset (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546883"></a><a name="DOSCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>DOS SMB clients assume the server has +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540900"></a><a name="DOSCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>DOS SMB clients assume the server has the same charset as they do. This option specifies which charset Samba should talk to DOS clients. </p><p>The default depends on which charsets you have installed. Samba tries to use charset 850 but falls back to ASCII in - case it is not available. Run <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a> to check the default on your system.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dos filemode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546924"></a> + case it is not available. Run <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a> to check the default on your system.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540940"></a> dos filemode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546925"></a><a name="DOSFILEMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The default behavior in Samba is to provide +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540941"></a><a name="DOSFILEMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The default behavior in Samba is to provide UNIX-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is able to change the permissions on it. However, this behavior is often confusing to DOS/Windows users. Enabling this parameter @@ -1799,10 +1799,10 @@ dos filemode (S) the group is only granted read access. Ownership of the file/directory may also be changed.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dos filemode</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dos filetime resolution (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546970"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540986"></a> dos filetime resolution (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546971"></a><a name="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540988"></a><a name="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest granularity on time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second @@ -1817,10 +1817,10 @@ dos filetime resolution (S) this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is happy.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dos filetime resolution</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="dos filetimes (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547034"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541050"></a> dos filetimes (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547035"></a><a name="DOSFILETIMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541051"></a><a name="DOSFILETIMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a file they can change the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics, only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp. By default, Samba runs with POSIX semantics and refuses to change the @@ -1834,20 +1834,20 @@ dos filetimes (S) shared between users. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dos filetimes</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ea support (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547099"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541116"></a> ea support (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547100"></a><a name="EASUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will allow clients to attempt to store OS/2 style Extended +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541117"></a><a name="EASUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will allow clients to attempt to store OS/2 style Extended attributes on a share. In order to enable this parameter the underlying filesystem exported by the share must support extended attributes (such as provided on XFS and EXT3 on Linux, with the correct kernel patches). On Linux the filesystem must have been mounted with the mount option user_xattr in order for extended attributes to work, also extended attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ea support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enable asu support (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547161"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541177"></a> enable asu support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547162"></a><a name="ENABLEASUSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Hosts running the "Advanced Server for Unix (ASU)" product +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541178"></a><a name="ENABLEASUSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Hosts running the "Advanced Server for Unix (ASU)" product require some special accomodations such as creating a builtin [ADMIN$] share that only supports IPC connections. The has been the default behavior in smbd for many years. However, certain Microsoft applications @@ -1855,20 +1855,20 @@ enable asu support (G) an [ADMIN$} file share. Disabling this parameter allows for creating an [ADMIN$] file share in smb.conf.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable asu support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enable core files (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547205"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541222"></a> enable core files (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547206"></a><a name="ENABLECOREFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether core dumps should be written +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541223"></a><a name="ENABLECOREFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether core dumps should be written on internal exits. Normally set to <code class="constant">yes</code>. You should never need to change this. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable core files</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable core files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enable privileges (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547264"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541280"></a> enable privileges (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547265"></a><a name="ENABLEPRIVILEGES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541281"></a><a name="ENABLEPRIVILEGES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls whether or not smbd will honor privileges assigned to specific SIDs via either <code class="literal">net rpc rights</code> or one of the Windows user and group manager tools. This parameter is enabled by default. It can be disabled to prevent members of the Domain Admins group from being able to @@ -1881,15 +1881,15 @@ enable privileges (G) Please read the extended description provided in the Samba HOWTO documentation. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable privileges</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enable spoolss (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547324"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541340"></a> enable spoolss (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547325"></a><a name="ENABLESPOOLSS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Inverted synonym for <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DISABLESPOOLSS" target="_top">disable spoolss</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable spoolss</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541342"></a><a name="ENABLESPOOLSS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Inverted synonym for <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DISABLESPOOLSS" target="_top">disable spoolss</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable spoolss</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="encrypt passwords (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547370"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541387"></a> encrypt passwords (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547371"></a><a name="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541388"></a><a name="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords unless a registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in @@ -1912,10 +1912,10 @@ encrypt passwords (G) causes <code class="literal">smbd</code> to authenticate against another server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>encrypt passwords</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enhanced browsing (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547474"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541490"></a> enhanced browsing (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547475"></a><a name="ENHANCEDBROWSING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option enables a couple of enhancements to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541491"></a><a name="ENHANCEDBROWSING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option enables a couple of enhancements to cross-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations. </p><p>The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular @@ -1928,10 +1928,10 @@ enhanced browsing (G) to stay around forever which can be annoying.</p><p>In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes cross-subnet browse propagation much more reliable.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enhanced browsing</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="enumports command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547535"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541552"></a> enumports command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547536"></a><a name="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541553"></a><a name="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign to UNIX hosts. Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of a local port (i.e. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port @@ -1948,10 +1948,10 @@ enumports command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enumports command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/listports</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="eventlog list (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547616"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541632"></a> eventlog list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547617"></a><a name="EVENTLOGLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of log names that Samba will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541633"></a><a name="EVENTLOGLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of log names that Samba will report to the Microsoft EventViewer utility. The listed eventlogs will be associated with tdb file on disk in the <code class="filename">$(lockdir)/eventlog</code>. @@ -1964,10 +1964,10 @@ eventlog list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>eventlog list</code></em> = <code class="literal">Security Application Syslog Apache</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="fake directory create times (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547689"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541705"></a> fake directory create times (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547690"></a><a name="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541706"></a><a name="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create time for all files and directories. This is not the same as the ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep. Setting @@ -1989,10 +1989,10 @@ fake directory create times (S) ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build will proceed as expected.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>fake directory create times</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="fake oplocks (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547756"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541773"></a> fake oplocks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547758"></a><a name="FAKEOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541774"></a><a name="FAKEOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively @@ -2008,10 +2008,10 @@ fake oplocks (S) files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption. Use this option carefully!</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>fake oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="follow symlinks (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547846"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541864"></a> follow symlinks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547847"></a><a name="FOLLOWSYMLINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541865"></a><a name="FOLLOWSYMLINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter allows the Samba administrator to stop <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> from following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this parameter to <code class="constant">no</code> prevents any file or directory that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an error). This option is very useful to stop users from adding a symbolic @@ -2021,10 +2021,10 @@ follow symlinks (S) This option is enabled (i.e. <code class="literal">smbd</code> will follow symbolic links) by default. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>follow symlinks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force create mode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547921"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541939"></a> force create mode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547922"></a><a name="FORCECREATEMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541940"></a><a name="FORCECREATEMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will <span class="emphasis"><em>always</em></span> be set on a file created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a file that is being created. The default for this parameter is (in octal) @@ -2036,10 +2036,10 @@ force create mode (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force create mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">0755</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force directory mode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548002"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542020"></a> force directory mode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548003"></a><a name="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542021"></a><a name="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will <span class="emphasis"><em>always</em></span> be set on a directory created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a directory that is being created. The default for this @@ -2052,10 +2052,10 @@ force directory mode (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force directory mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">0755</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force directory security mode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548083"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542101"></a> force directory security mode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548084"></a><a name="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542102"></a><a name="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box. </p><p> @@ -2068,7 +2068,7 @@ force directory security mode (S) </p><p> If not set explicitly this parameter is 0000, which allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory without restrictions. - </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> + </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> Users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it set as 0000. @@ -2076,13 +2076,13 @@ force directory security mode (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force directory security mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">700</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="group"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548187"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542205"></a> <a name="GROUP"></a>group -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548188"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#FORCEGROUP">force group</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force group (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548220"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542206"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#FORCEGROUP">force group</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542238"></a> force group (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548221"></a><a name="FORCEGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542239"></a><a name="FORCEGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting to this service. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring that all access to files on service will use the named group for @@ -2106,10 +2106,10 @@ force group (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force group</code></em> = <code class="literal">agroup</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force printername (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544133"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538149"></a> force printername (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544134"></a><a name="FORCEPRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When printing from Windows NT (or later), +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538150"></a><a name="FORCEPRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When printing from Windows NT (or later), each printer in <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> has two associated names which can be used by the client. The first is the sharename (or shortname) defined in smb.conf. This @@ -2132,10 +2132,10 @@ force printername (S) not be able to delete printer connections from their local Printers folder.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force printername</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force security mode (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544224"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538240"></a> force security mode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544225"></a><a name="FORCESECURITYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538241"></a><a name="FORCESECURITYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box. </p><p> @@ -2155,10 +2155,10 @@ force security mode (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force security mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">700</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force unknown acl user (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544326"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538342"></a> force unknown acl user (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544327"></a><a name="FORCEUNKNOWNACLUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538343"></a><a name="FORCEUNKNOWNACLUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If this parameter is set, a Windows NT ACL that contains an unknown SID (security descriptor, or representation of a user or group id) as the owner or group owner of the file will be silently mapped into the current UNIX uid or gid of the currently connected user. @@ -2172,10 +2172,10 @@ force unknown acl user (S) Try using this parameter when XCOPY /O gives an ACCESS_DENIED error. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force unknown acl user</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="force user (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548864"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542882"></a> force user (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548865"></a><a name="FORCEUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542883"></a><a name="FORCEUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service. This is useful for sharing files. You should also use it carefully as using it incorrectly can cause security problems.</p><p>This user name only gets used once a connection is established. @@ -2189,10 +2189,10 @@ force user (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force user</code></em> = <code class="literal">auser</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="fstype (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548940"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542958"></a> fstype (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548941"></a><a name="FSTYPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542959"></a><a name="FSTYPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter allows the administrator to configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share is using that is reported by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a client queries the filesystem type for a share. The default type is <code class="constant">NTFS</code> for compatibility @@ -2202,10 +2202,10 @@ fstype (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>fstype</code></em> = <code class="literal">Samba</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="get quota command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549022"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543040"></a> get quota command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549023"></a><a name="GETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">get quota command</code> should only be used +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543041"></a><a name="GETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">get quota command</code> should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use.</p><p>This option is only available you have compiled Samba with the <code class="literal">--with-sys-quotas</code> option or on Linux with @@ -2213,23 +2213,23 @@ get quota command (G) was found in the system.</p><p>This parameter should specify the path to a script that queries the quota information for the specified user/group for the partition that - the specified directory is on.</p><p>Such a script should take 3 arguments:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>directory</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>type of query</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>uid of user or gid of group</p></li></ul></div><p>The type of query can be one of :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>1 - user quotas</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>2 - user default quotas (uid = -1)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>3 - group quotas</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>4 - group default quotas (gid = -1)</p></li></ul></div><p>This script should print one line as output with spaces between the arguments. The arguments are: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 1 - quota flags (0 = no quotas, 1 = quotas enabled, 2 = quotas enabled and enforced)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 2 - number of currently used blocks</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 3 - the softlimit number of blocks</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 4 - the hardlimit number of blocks</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 5 - currently used number of inodes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 6 - the softlimit number of inodes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 7 - the hardlimit number of inodes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Arg 8(optional) - the number of bytes in a block(default is 1024)</p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>get quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> + the specified directory is on.</p><p>Such a script should take 3 arguments:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>directory</p></li><li><p>type of query</p></li><li><p>uid of user or gid of group</p></li></ul></div><p>The type of query can be one of :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>1 - user quotas</p></li><li><p>2 - user default quotas (uid = -1)</p></li><li><p>3 - group quotas</p></li><li><p>4 - group default quotas (gid = -1)</p></li></ul></div><p>This script should print one line as output with spaces between the arguments. The arguments are: + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>Arg 1 - quota flags (0 = no quotas, 1 = quotas enabled, 2 = quotas enabled and enforced)</p></li><li><p>Arg 2 - number of currently used blocks</p></li><li><p>Arg 3 - the softlimit number of blocks</p></li><li><p>Arg 4 - the hardlimit number of blocks</p></li><li><p>Arg 5 - currently used number of inodes</p></li><li><p>Arg 6 - the softlimit number of inodes</p></li><li><p>Arg 7 - the hardlimit number of inodes</p></li><li><p>Arg 8(optional) - the number of bytes in a block(default is 1024)</p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>get quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>get quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/sbin/query_quota</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="getwd cache (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549208"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543227"></a> getwd cache (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549210"></a><a name="GETWDCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543228"></a><a name="GETWDCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDESMBCONFOPTIONS" target="_top">wide smbconfoptions</a> parameter is set to <code class="constant">no</code>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>getwd cache</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="guest account (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549269"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543287"></a> guest account (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549270"></a><a name="GUESTACCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a username which will be used for access +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543288"></a><a name="GUESTACCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a username which will be used for access to services which are specified as <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok</a> (see below). Whatever privileges this user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service. This user must exist in the password file, but does not require @@ -2247,40 +2247,40 @@ guest account (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>guest account</code></em> = <code class="literal">ftp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="public"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549377"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543395"></a> <a name="PUBLIC"></a>public -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549378"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#GUESTOK">guest ok</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="guest ok (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549408"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543396"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#GUESTOK">guest ok</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543426"></a> guest ok (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549409"></a><a name="GUESTOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543427"></a><a name="GUESTOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for a service, then no password is required to connect to the service. Privileges will be those of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>.</p><p>This paramater nullifies the benifits of setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#RESTRICTANONYMOUS" target="_top">restrict anonymous = 2</a> </p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> for more information about this option. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>guest ok</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="only guest"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549496"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543514"></a> <a name="ONLYGUEST"></a>only guest -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549497"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#GUESTONLY">guest only</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="guest only (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549529"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543515"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#GUESTONLY">guest only</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543547"></a> guest only (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549530"></a><a name="GUESTONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543548"></a><a name="GUESTONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted. This parameter will have no effect if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok</a> is not set for the service.</p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> for more information about this option. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>guest only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hide dot files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549601"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543620"></a> hide dot files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549602"></a><a name="HIDEDOTFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543621"></a><a name="HIDEDOTFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether files starting with a dot appear as hidden files.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide dot files</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hide files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549644"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543662"></a> hide files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549645"></a><a name="HIDEFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of files or directories that are not +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543663"></a><a name="HIDEFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of files or directories that are not visible but are accessible. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied to any files or directories that match.</p><p>Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*' @@ -2302,32 +2302,32 @@ hide files = /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/ </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide files</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # no file are hidden</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hide special files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549733"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543751"></a> hide special files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549734"></a><a name="HIDESPECIALFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543752"></a><a name="HIDESPECIALFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter prevents clients from seeing special files such as sockets, devices and fifo's in directory listings. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide special files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hide unreadable (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549776"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543794"></a> hide unreadable (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549777"></a><a name="HIDEUNREADABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter prevents clients from seeing the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543795"></a><a name="HIDEUNREADABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be read. Defaults to off.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide unreadable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hide unwriteable files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549818"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543837"></a> hide unwriteable files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549819"></a><a name="HIDEUNWRITEABLEFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543838"></a><a name="HIDEUNWRITEABLEFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be written to. Defaults to off. Note that unwriteable directories are shown as usual. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide unwriteable files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="homedir map (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549863"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543881"></a> homedir map (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549864"></a><a name="HOMEDIRMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543882"></a><a name="HOMEDIRMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NISHOMEDIR" target="_top">nis homedir</a> is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> is also acting as a Win95/98 <em class="parameter"><code>logon server</code></em> then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's home directory should be extracted. At present, only the Sun auto.home map format is understood. The form of the map is: @@ -2336,16 +2336,16 @@ homedir map (G) </pre><p> and the program will extract the servername from before the first ':'. There should probably be a better parsing system that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another automounter) maps. - </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> + </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> A working NIS client is required on the system for this option to work. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>homedir map</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>homedir map</code></em> = <code class="literal">amd.homedir</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="host msdfs (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549976"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543994"></a> host msdfs (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549977"></a><a name="HOSTMSDFS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543995"></a><a name="HOSTMSDFS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server. </p><p> @@ -2353,10 +2353,10 @@ host msdfs (G) setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to the MSFDS chapter in the book Samba3-HOWTO. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>host msdfs</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hostname lookups (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550040"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544058"></a> hostname lookups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550041"></a><a name="HOSTNAMELOOKUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies whether samba should use (expensive) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544059"></a><a name="HOSTNAMELOOKUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies whether samba should use (expensive) hostname lookups or use the ip addresses instead. An example place where hostname lookups are currently used is when checking the <code class="literal">hosts deny</code> and <code class="literal">hosts allow</code>. @@ -2364,13 +2364,13 @@ hostname lookups (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hostname lookups</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="allow hosts"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550114"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544132"></a> <a name="ALLOWHOSTS"></a>allow hosts -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550115"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#HOSTSALLOW">hosts allow</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hosts allow (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550146"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544133"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#HOSTSALLOW">hosts allow</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544164"></a> hosts allow (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550147"></a><a name="HOSTSALLOW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A synonym for this parameter is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ALLOWHOSTS" target="_top">allow hosts</a>.</p><p>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544165"></a><a name="HOSTSALLOW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A synonym for this parameter is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ALLOWHOSTS" target="_top">allow hosts</a>.</p><p>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited set of hosts which are permitted to access a service.</p><p>If specified in the [global] section then it will apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual service has a different setting.</p><p>You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For @@ -2384,19 +2384,19 @@ hosts allow (S) by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups. The <span class="emphasis"><em>EXCEPT</em></span> keyword can also be used to limit a wildcard list. The following examples may provide some help:</p><p>Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.*; except one</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66</code></p><p>Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0</code></p><p>Example 3: allow a couple of hosts</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur</code></p><p>Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but - deny access from one particular host</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = @foonet</code></p><p><code class="literal">hosts deny = pirate</code></p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.</p></div><p>See <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a> for a way of testing your host access + deny access from one particular host</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = @foonet</code></p><p><code class="literal">hosts deny = pirate</code></p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords.</p></div><p>See <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a> for a way of testing your host access to see if it does what you expect.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hosts allow</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # none (i.e., all hosts permitted access)</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hosts allow</code></em> = <code class="literal">150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="deny hosts"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550348"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544366"></a> <a name="DENYHOSTS"></a>deny hosts -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550349"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#HOSTSDENY">hosts deny</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="hosts deny (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550379"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544367"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#HOSTSDENY">hosts deny</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544398"></a> hosts deny (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550380"></a><a name="HOSTSDENY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The opposite of <em class="parameter"><code>hosts allow</code></em> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544399"></a><a name="HOSTSDENY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The opposite of <em class="parameter"><code>hosts allow</code></em> - hosts listed here are <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> permitted access to services unless the specific services have their own lists to override this one. Where the lists conflict, the <em class="parameter"><code>allow</code></em> @@ -2410,10 +2410,10 @@ hosts deny (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hosts deny</code></em> = <code class="literal">150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap alloc backend (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550481"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544500"></a> idmap alloc backend (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550482"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544501"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap alloc backend provides a plugin interface for Winbind to use when allocating Unix uids/gids for Windows SIDs. This option refers to the name of the idmap module which will provide the id allocation @@ -2430,18 +2430,18 @@ idmap alloc backend (G) Also refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCCONFIG" target="_top">idmap alloc config</a> option. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap alloc backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">tdb</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap alloc config (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550587"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544605"></a> idmap alloc config (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550588"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544606"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap alloc config prefix provides a means of managing settings for the backend defined by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCBACKEND" target="_top">idmap alloc backend</a> parameter. Refer to the man page for each idmap plugin regarding specific configuration details. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap backend (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550631"></a> + </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544649"></a> idmap backend (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550632"></a><a name="IDMAPBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544650"></a><a name="IDMAPBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap backend provides a plugin interface for Winbind to use varying backends to store SID/uid/gid mapping tables. </p><p> @@ -2462,17 +2462,17 @@ idmap backend (G) and ad (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a>). </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">tdb</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550803"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544821"></a> idmap cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550804"></a><a name="IDMAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544822"></a><a name="IDMAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's idmap interface will cache positive SID/uid/gid query results. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">604800 (one week)</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap config (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550847"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544865"></a> idmap config (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550848"></a><a name="IDMAPCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544866"></a><a name="IDMAPCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap config prefix provides a means of managing each trusted domain separately. The idmap config prefix should be followed by the name of the domain, a colon, and a setting specific to the chosen @@ -2504,13 +2504,13 @@ idmap config (G) idmap config CORP : backend = ad idmap config CORP : range = 1000-999999 - </pre><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind gid"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550980"></a> + </pre><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544998"></a> <a name="WINBINDGID"></a>winbind gid -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550981"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPGID">idmap gid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap gid (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551012"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544999"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPGID">idmap gid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545030"></a> idmap gid (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551013"></a><a name="IDMAPGID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545031"></a><a name="IDMAPGID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for the purpose of mapping UNX groups to NT group SIDs. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can @@ -2520,20 +2520,20 @@ idmap gid (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap gid</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000-20000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap negative cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551098"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545116"></a> idmap negative cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551099"></a><a name="IDMAPNEGATIVECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545117"></a><a name="IDMAPNEGATIVECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's idmap interface will cache negative SID/uid/gid query results. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap negative cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">120</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind uid"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551142"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545161"></a> <a name="WINBINDUID"></a>winbind uid -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551143"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPUID">idmap uid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="idmap uid (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551173"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545162"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPUID">idmap uid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545192"></a> idmap uid (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551174"></a><a name="IDMAPUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545193"></a><a name="IDMAPUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap uid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are allocated for use in mapping UNIX users to NT user SIDs. This range of ids should have no existing local @@ -2543,10 +2543,10 @@ idmap uid (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap uid</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000-20000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="include (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551260"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545278"></a> include (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551261"></a><a name="INCLUDE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545279"></a><a name="INCLUDE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This allows you to include one config file inside another. The file is included literally, as though typed in place. </p><p> @@ -2564,10 +2564,10 @@ include (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>include</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="inherit acls (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551360"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545379"></a> inherit acls (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551362"></a><a name="INHERITACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545380"></a><a name="INHERITACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls exist on parent directories, they are always honored when creating a new file or subdirectory in these parent directories. The default behavior is to use the unix mode specified when creating the directory. @@ -2575,10 +2575,10 @@ inherit acls (S) default directory acls are propagated. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit acls</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="inherit owner (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551407"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545426"></a> inherit owner (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551408"></a><a name="INHERITOWNER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The ownership of new files and directories +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545427"></a><a name="INHERITOWNER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The ownership of new files and directories is normally governed by effective uid of the connected user. This option allows the Samba administrator to specify that the ownership for new files and directories should be controlled @@ -2587,10 +2587,10 @@ inherit owner (S) delete them and to ensure that newly create files in a user's roaming profile directory are actually owner by the user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit owner</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="inherit permissions (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551461"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545479"></a> inherit permissions (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551462"></a><a name="INHERITPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545480"></a><a name="INHERITPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK" target="_top">directory mask</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE" target="_top">force create mode</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" target="_top">force directory mode</a> but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this. </p><p>New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, @@ -2602,10 +2602,10 @@ inherit permissions (S) many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] share to be used flexibly by each user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit permissions</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="init logon delayed hosts (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551610"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545628"></a> init logon delayed hosts (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551611"></a><a name="INITLOGONDELAYEDHOSTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545629"></a><a name="INITLOGONDELAYEDHOSTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter takes a list of host names, addresses or networks for which the initial samlogon reply should be delayed (so other DCs get preferred by XP workstations if there are any). @@ -2616,28 +2616,28 @@ init logon delayed hosts (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delayed hosts</code></em> = <code class="literal">150.203.5. myhost.mynet.de</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="init logon delay (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551688"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545706"></a> init logon delay (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551689"></a><a name="INITLOGONDELAY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545707"></a><a name="INITLOGONDELAY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies a delay in milliseconds for the hosts configured for delayed initial samlogon with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INITLOGONDELAYEDHOSTS" target="_top">init logon delayed hosts</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delay</code></em> = <code class="literal">100</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="interfaces (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551742"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545760"></a> interfaces (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551743"></a><a name="INTERFACES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to override the default +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545761"></a><a name="INTERFACES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to override the default network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name registration and other NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NBT) traffic. By default Samba will query the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any interfaces except 127.0.0.1 that are broadcast capable.</p><p>The option takes a list of interface strings. Each string - can be in any of the following forms:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>a network interface name (such as eth0). + can be in any of the following forms:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>a network interface name (such as eth0). This may include shell-like wildcards so eth* will match - any interface starting with the substring "eth"</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>an IP address. In this case the netmask is + any interface starting with the substring "eth"</p></li><li><p>an IP address. In this case the netmask is determined from the list of interfaces obtained from the - kernel</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>an IP/mask pair. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>a broadcast/mask pair.</p></li></ul></div><p>The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such + kernel</p></li><li><p>an IP/mask pair. </p></li><li><p>a broadcast/mask pair.</p></li></ul></div><p>The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted decimal form.</p><p>The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via @@ -2652,10 +2652,10 @@ interfaces (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>interfaces</code></em> = <code class="literal">eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="invalid users (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551859"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545877"></a> invalid users (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551860"></a><a name="INVALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users that should not be allowed +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545878"></a><a name="INVALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this service. This is really a <span class="emphasis"><em>paranoid</em></span> check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach your security.</p><p>A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS @@ -2675,10 +2675,10 @@ invalid users (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>invalid users</code></em> = <code class="literal">root fred admin @wheel</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="iprint server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551973"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545992"></a> iprint server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551974"></a><a name="IPRINTSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545993"></a><a name="IPRINTSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">iprint</code>. </p><p> If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS <code class="filename">client.conf</code>. This is @@ -2687,10 +2687,10 @@ iprint server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>iprint server</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYCUPSSERVER</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="keepalive (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552060"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546078"></a> keepalive (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552061"></a><a name="KEEPALIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546079"></a><a name="KEEPALIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of seconds between <em class="parameter"><code>keepalive</code></em> packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether @@ -2700,15 +2700,15 @@ Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties.</p><p>Defa </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>keepalive</code></em> = <code class="literal">600</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="kerberos method (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552147"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546165"></a> kerberos method (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552148"></a><a name="KERBEROSMETHOD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546166"></a><a name="KERBEROSMETHOD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Controls how kerberos tickets are verified. - </p><p>Valid options are:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>secrets only - use only the secrets.tdb for - ticket verification (default)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>system keytab - use only the system keytab - for ticket verification</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>dedicated keytab - use a dedicated keytab - for ticket verification</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>secrets and keytab - use the secrets.tdb + </p><p>Valid options are:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>secrets only - use only the secrets.tdb for + ticket verification (default)</p></li><li><p>system keytab - use only the system keytab + for ticket verification</p></li><li><p>dedicated keytab - use a dedicated keytab + for ticket verification</p></li><li><p>secrets and keytab - use the secrets.tdb first, then the system keytab</p></li></ul></div><p> The major difference between "system keytab" and "dedicated keytab" is that the latter method relies on kerberos to find the @@ -2720,20 +2720,20 @@ kerberos method (G) specify the location of the keytab file. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>kerberos method</code></em> = <code class="literal">secrets only</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="kernel change notify (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552243"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546262"></a> kernel change notify (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552244"></a><a name="KERNELCHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546263"></a><a name="KERNELCHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the kernel for change notifications in directories so that SMB clients can refresh whenever the data on the server changes. </p><p>This parameter is only used when your kernel supports change notification to user programs using the inotify interface. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>kernel change notify</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="kernel oplocks (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552293"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546312"></a> kernel oplocks (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552294"></a><a name="KERNELOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>For UNIXes that support kernel based <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546313"></a><a name="KERNELOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>For UNIXes that support kernel based <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a> (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter allows the use of them to be turned on or off.</p><p>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <em class="parameter"><code>oplocks </code></em> to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation @@ -2743,10 +2743,10 @@ kernel oplocks (G) to a no-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support. You should never need to touch this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>kernel oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lanman auth (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552382"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546400"></a> lanman auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552383"></a><a name="LANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546401"></a><a name="LANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to authenticate users or permit password changes using the LANMAN password hash. If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000 clients, smbclient, but not @@ -2763,22 +2763,22 @@ lanman auth (G) permited. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to use it.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lanman auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="large readwrite (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552474"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546493"></a> large readwrite (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552475"></a><a name="LARGEREADWRITE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546494"></a><a name="LARGEREADWRITE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> supports the new 64k - streaming read and write varient SMB requests introduced with + streaming read and write variant SMB requests introduced with Windows 2000. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs this requires Samba to be running on a 64-bit capable operating system such as IRIX, Solaris or a Linux 2.4 kernel. Can improve performance by 10% with Windows 2000 clients. Defaults to on. Not as tested as some other Samba code paths.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>large readwrite</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap admin dn (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552531"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546549"></a> ldap admin dn (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552532"></a><a name="LDAPADMINDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546550"></a><a name="LDAPADMINDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a> defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact the ldap server when retreiving user account information. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a> is used in conjunction with the admin dn password stored in the <code class="filename">private/secrets.tdb</code> @@ -2786,10 +2786,10 @@ ldap admin dn (G) man page for more information on how to accomplish this. </p><p> The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a> requires a fully specified DN. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> is not appended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a>. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap connection timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552640"></a> + </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546658"></a> ldap connection timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552641"></a><a name="LDAPCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546659"></a><a name="LDAPCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter tells the LDAP library calls which timeout in seconds they should honor during initial connection establishments to LDAP servers. It is very useful in failover scenarios in particular. If one or more LDAP @@ -2801,10 +2801,10 @@ ldap connection timeout (G) and not establishing an initial connection. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap connection timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap debug level (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552705"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546723"></a> ldap debug level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552706"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546724"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls the debug level of the LDAP library calls. In the case of OpenLDAP, it is the same bit-field as understood by the server and documented in the @@ -2821,10 +2821,10 @@ ldap debug level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug level</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap debug threshold (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552793"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546811"></a> ldap debug threshold (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552794"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGTHRESHOLD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546812"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGTHRESHOLD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls the Samba debug level at which the ldap library debug output is printed in the Samba logs. See the description of @@ -2833,28 +2833,28 @@ ldap debug threshold (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug threshold</code></em> = <code class="literal">5</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap delete dn (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552861"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546879"></a> ldap delete dn (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552862"></a><a name="LDAPDELETEDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies whether a delete +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546880"></a><a name="LDAPDELETEDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies whether a delete operation in the ldapsam deletes the complete entry or only the attributes specific to Samba. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap delete dn</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap group suffix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552905"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546923"></a> ldap group suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552906"></a><a name="LDAPGROUPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the suffix that is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546924"></a><a name="LDAPGROUPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the suffix that is used for groups when these are added to the LDAP directory. If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap group suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap group suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Groups</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap idmap suffix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552988"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547007"></a> ldap idmap suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552990"></a><a name="LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547008"></a><a name="LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameters specifies the suffix that is used when storing idmap mappings. If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. @@ -2862,10 +2862,10 @@ ldap idmap suffix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap idmap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Idmap</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap machine suffix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553071"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547089"></a> ldap machine suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553072"></a><a name="LDAPMACHINESUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547090"></a><a name="LDAPMACHINESUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> It specifies where machines should be added to the ldap tree. If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. @@ -2873,10 +2873,10 @@ ldap machine suffix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap machine suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Computers</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap page size (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553153"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547172"></a> ldap page size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553154"></a><a name="LDAPPAGESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547173"></a><a name="LDAPPAGESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the number of entries per page. </p><p>If the LDAP server supports paged results, clients can request subsets of search results (pages) instead of the entire list. @@ -2885,24 +2885,24 @@ ldap page size (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap page size</code></em> = <code class="literal">512</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap passwd sync (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553220"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547238"></a> ldap passwd sync (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553221"></a><a name="LDAPPASSWDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547239"></a><a name="LDAPPASSWDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option is used to define whether or not Samba should sync the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes for normal accounts (NOT for workstation, server or domain trusts) on a password change via SAMBA. </p><p> The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPPASSWDSYNC" target="_top">ldap passwd sync</a> can be set to one of three values: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>Yes</code></em> = Try - to update the LDAP, NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>No</code></em> = Update NT and - LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>Only</code></em> = Only update + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>Yes</code></em> = Try + to update the LDAP, NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>No</code></em> = Update NT and + LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>Only</code></em> = Only update the LDAP password and let the LDAP server do the rest.</p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap passwd sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap replication sleep (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553321"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547339"></a> ldap replication sleep (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553322"></a><a name="LDAPREPLICATIONSLEEP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547340"></a><a name="LDAPREPLICATIONSLEEP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> When Samba is asked to write to a read-only LDAP replica, we are redirected to talk to the read-write master server. This server then replicates our changes back to the 'local' server, however the replication might take some seconds, especially over slow links. Certain client activities, particularly domain joins, can become confused by the 'success' @@ -2915,10 +2915,10 @@ ldap replication sleep (G) The value is specified in milliseconds, the maximum value is 5000 (5 seconds). </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap replication sleep</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldapsam:editposix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553385"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547403"></a> ldapsam:editposix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553386"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:EDITPOSIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547404"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:EDITPOSIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Editposix is an option that leverages ldapsam:trusted to make it simpler to manage a domain controller eliminating the need to set up custom scripts to add and manage the posix users and groups. This option will instead directly manipulate the ldap tree to create, remove and modify user and group entries. @@ -2996,10 +2996,10 @@ ldapsam:editposix (G) </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldapsam:editposix</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldapsam:trusted (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553510"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547529"></a> ldapsam:trusted (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553512"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:TRUSTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547530"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:TRUSTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> By default, Samba as a Domain Controller with an LDAP backend needs to use the Unix-style NSS subsystem to access user and group information. Due to the way Unix stores user information in /etc/passwd and /etc/group this inevitably leads to inefficiencies. One important question a user needs to know is the list of groups he @@ -3017,10 +3017,10 @@ ldapsam:trusted (G) is easily achieved. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldapsam:trusted</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap ssl ads (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553599"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547618"></a> ldap ssl ads (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553600"></a><a name="LDAPSSLADS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547619"></a><a name="LDAPSSLADS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL when connecting to the ldap server using <span class="emphasis"><em>ads</em></span> methods. Rpc methods are not affected by this parameter. Please note, that @@ -3030,10 +3030,10 @@ ldap ssl ads (G) for more information on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL" target="_top">ldap ssl</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap ssl ads</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap ssl (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553685"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547703"></a> ldap ssl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553686"></a><a name="LDAPSSL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547704"></a><a name="LDAPSSL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL when connecting to the ldap server This is <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> related to Samba's previous SSL support which was enabled by specifying the @@ -3044,8 +3044,8 @@ ldap ssl (G) <em class="parameter"><code>Start_tls</code></em> <span class="emphasis"><em>or</em></span> by specifying <em class="parameter"><code>ldaps://</code></em> in the URL argument of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSDBBACKEND" target="_top">passdb backend</a>.</p><p>The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL" target="_top">ldap ssl</a> can be set to one of - two values:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>Off</code></em> = Never - use SSL when querying the directory.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>start tls</code></em> = Use + two values:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>Off</code></em> = Never + use SSL when querying the directory.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>start tls</code></em> = Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server.</p></li></ul></div><p> Please note that this parameter does only affect <span class="emphasis"><em>rpc</em></span> @@ -3058,10 +3058,10 @@ ldap ssl (G) for more information on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSLADS" target="_top">ldap ssl ads</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap ssl</code></em> = <code class="literal">start tls</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap suffix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553878"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547896"></a> ldap suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553879"></a><a name="LDAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the base for all ldap suffixes and for storing the sambaDomain object.</p><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547897"></a><a name="LDAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the base for all ldap suffixes and for storing the sambaDomain object.</p><p> The ldap suffix will be appended to the values specified for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPUSERSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap user suffix</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPGROUPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap group suffix</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPMACHINESUFFIX" target="_top">ldap machine suffix</a>, and the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap idmap suffix</a>. Each of these should be given only a DN relative to the @@ -3070,17 +3070,17 @@ ldap suffix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">dc=samba,dc=org</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554001"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548019"></a> ldap timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554002"></a><a name="LDAPTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548020"></a><a name="LDAPTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter defines the number of seconds that Samba should use as timeout for LDAP operations. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">15</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ldap user suffix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554043"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548061"></a> ldap user suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554044"></a><a name="LDAPUSERSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548062"></a><a name="LDAPUSERSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies where users are added to the tree. If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. @@ -3088,10 +3088,10 @@ ldap user suffix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap user suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=people</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="level2 oplocks (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554125"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548143"></a> level2 oplocks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554126"></a><a name="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether Samba supports +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548144"></a><a name="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether Samba supports level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share.</p><p>Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead @@ -3111,10 +3111,10 @@ level2 oplocks (S) parameter must be set to <code class="constant">yes</code> on this share in order for this parameter to have any effect.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>level2 oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lm announce (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554232"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548250"></a> lm announce (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554233"></a><a name="LMANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will produce Lanman announce +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548251"></a><a name="LMANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will produce Lanman announce broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have three values, <code class="constant">yes</code>, <code class="constant">no</code>, or @@ -3130,10 +3130,10 @@ lm announce (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm announce</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lm interval (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554354"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548372"></a> lm interval (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554355"></a><a name="LMINTERVAL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548373"></a><a name="LMINTERVAL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMANNOUNCE" target="_top">lm announce</a> parameter) then this parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be @@ -3143,18 +3143,18 @@ lm interval (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm interval</code></em> = <code class="literal">120</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="load printers (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554438"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548456"></a> load printers (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554439"></a><a name="LOADPRINTERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A boolean variable that controls whether all +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548457"></a><a name="LOADPRINTERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default. See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERS" target="_top">printers</a> section for more details.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>load printers</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="local master (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554494"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548512"></a> local master (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554495"></a><a name="LOCALMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to try and become a local master browser +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548514"></a><a name="LOCALMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to try and become a local master browser on a subnet. If set to <code class="constant">no</code> then <code class="literal"> nmbd</code> will not attempt to become a local master browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By @@ -3164,13 +3164,13 @@ local master (G) will <span class="emphasis"><em>participate</em></span> in elections for local master browser.</p><p>Setting this value to <code class="constant">no</code> will cause <code class="literal">nmbd</code> <span class="emphasis"><em>never</em></span> to become a local master browser.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>local master</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lock dir"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554594"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548612"></a> <a name="LOCKDIR"></a>lock dir -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554595"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOCKDIRECTORY">lock directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lock directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554626"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548613"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOCKDIRECTORY">lock directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548644"></a> lock directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554627"></a><a name="LOCKDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the directory where lock +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548645"></a><a name="LOCKDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed. The lock files are used to implement the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXCONNECTIONS" target="_top">max connections</a> option. </p><p> @@ -3180,10 +3180,10 @@ lock directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/samba/locks</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="locking (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554705"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548723"></a> locking (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554706"></a><a name="LOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether or not locking will be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548724"></a><a name="LOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server in response to lock requests from the client.</p><p>If <code class="literal">locking = no</code>, all lock and unlock requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report @@ -3193,18 +3193,18 @@ locking (S) CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of <code class="constant">no</code> is not really recommended even in this case.</p><p>Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption. - You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lock spin count (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554780"></a> + You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548798"></a> lock spin count (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554781"></a><a name="LOCKSPINCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter has been made inoperative in Samba 3.0.24. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548800"></a><a name="LOCKSPINCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter has been made inoperative in Samba 3.0.24. The functionality it contolled is now controlled by the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKSPINTIME" target="_top">lock spin time</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock spin count</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lock spin time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554836"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548854"></a> lock spin time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554837"></a><a name="LOCKSPINTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The time in microseconds that smbd should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548855"></a><a name="LOCKSPINTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The time in microseconds that smbd should keep waiting to see if a failed lock request can be granted. This parameter has changed in default value from Samba 3.0.23 from 10 to 200. The associated @@ -3212,36 +3212,36 @@ lock spin time (G) no longer used in Samba 3.0.24. You should not need to change the value of this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock spin time</code></em> = <code class="literal">200</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="log file (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554894"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548912"></a> log file (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554895"></a><a name="LOGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548913"></a><a name="LOGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to override the name of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file). </p><p> This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate log files for each user or machine. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log file</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/var/log.%m</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="debuglevel"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554947"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548965"></a> <a name="DEBUGLEVEL"></a>debuglevel -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554948"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOGLEVEL">log level</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="log level (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554978"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548966"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOGLEVEL">log level</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548996"></a> log level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554979"></a><a name="LOGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548997"></a><a name="LOGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The value of the parameter (a astring) allows the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file. </p><p>This parameter has been extended since the 2.2.x series, now it allows to specify the debug level for multiple debug classes. This is to give greater flexibility in the configuration of the system. The following debug classes are currently implemented: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>all</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>tdb</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>printdrivers</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>lanman</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>smb</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>rpc_parse</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>rpc_srv</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>rpc_cli</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>passdb</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>sam</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>auth</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>winbind</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>vfs</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>idmap</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>quota</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>acls</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>locking</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>dmapi</code></em></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>registry</code></em></p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log level</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>all</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>tdb</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>printdrivers</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>lanman</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>smb</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>rpc_parse</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>rpc_srv</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>rpc_cli</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>passdb</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>sam</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>auth</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>winbind</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>vfs</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>idmap</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>quota</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>acls</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>locking</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>dmapi</code></em></p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>registry</code></em></p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log level</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log level</code></em> = <code class="literal">3 passdb:5 auth:10 winbind:2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="logon drive (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555211"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549229"></a> logon drive (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555212"></a><a name="LOGONDRIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549230"></a><a name="LOGONDRIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory will be connected (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME" target="_top">logon home</a>) and is only used by NT Workstations. @@ -3251,10 +3251,10 @@ logon drive (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon drive</code></em> = <code class="literal">h:</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="logon home (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555286"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549304"></a> logon home (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555287"></a><a name="LOGONHOME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549305"></a><a name="LOGONHOME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the home directory location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC. It allows you to do </p><p> @@ -3285,10 +3285,10 @@ logon home (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon home</code></em> = <code class="literal">\\remote_smb_server\%U</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="logon path (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555451"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549469"></a> logon path (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555452"></a><a name="LOGONPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549470"></a><a name="LOGONPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the directory where roaming profiles (Desktop, NTuser.dat, etc) are stored. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles. To find out how to handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the @@ -3310,8 +3310,8 @@ logon path (G) this parameter to \\%N\homes\profile_path will cause problems). </p><p> This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine. - </p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p> - Do not quote the value. Setting this as <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">\\%N\profile\%U</span>”</span> + </p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p> + Do not quote the value. Setting this as “<span class="quote">\\%N\profile\%U</span>” will break profile handling. Where the tdbsam or ldapsam passdb backend is used, at the time the user account is created the value configured for this parameter is written to the passdb backend and that value will @@ -3332,10 +3332,10 @@ logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon path</code></em> = <code class="literal">\\%N\%U\profile</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="logon script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555620"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549638"></a> logon script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555621"></a><a name="LOGONSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549639"></a><a name="LOGONSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the batch file (<code class="filename">.bat</code>) or NT command file (<code class="filename">.cmd</code>) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully logs in. The file must contain the DOS style CR/LF line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is recommended. @@ -3366,10 +3366,10 @@ logon script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon script</code></em> = <code class="literal">scripts\%U.bat</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lppause command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555789"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549807"></a> lppause command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555790"></a><a name="LPPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549808"></a><a name="LPPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to pause the print job. One way @@ -3393,10 +3393,10 @@ lppause command (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lppause command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lpq cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555937"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549955"></a> lpq cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555938"></a><a name="LPQCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls how long lpq info will be cached +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549956"></a><a name="LPQCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the <code class="literal">lpq</code> command being called too often. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the <code class="literal"> lpq</code> command used by the system, so if you use different @@ -3409,10 +3409,10 @@ lpq cache time (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpq cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">10</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lpq command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556056"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550074"></a> lpq command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556057"></a><a name="LPQCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550075"></a><a name="LPQCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to obtain <code class="literal">lpq </code>-style printer status information.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer @@ -3434,10 +3434,10 @@ lpq command (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpq -P%p</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lpresume command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556182"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550200"></a> lpresume command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556183"></a><a name="LPRESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550201"></a><a name="LPRESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to resume the print job. See @@ -3450,10 +3450,10 @@ lpresume command (S) parameter is <code class="constant">SYSV</code>, in which case the default is:</p><p><code class="literal">lp -i %p-%j -H resume</code></p><p>or if the value of the <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> parameter is <code class="constant">SOFTQ</code>, then the default is:</p><p><code class="literal">qstat -s -j%j -r</code></p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpresume command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="lprm command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556335"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550353"></a> lprm command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556336"></a><a name="LPRMCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550354"></a><a name="LPRMCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to delete a print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name is put in its place. A <em class="parameter"><code>%j</code></em> is replaced with @@ -3470,10 +3470,10 @@ lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lprm command</code></em> = <code class="literal"> determined by printing parameter</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="machine password timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556423"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550441"></a> machine password timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556424"></a><a name="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550442"></a><a name="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = domain</a> parameter) then periodically a running smbd process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT PASSWORD stored in the TDB called <code class="filename">private/secrets.tdb </code>. This parameter specifies how often this password will be changed, in seconds. The default is one @@ -3483,22 +3483,22 @@ machine password timeout (G) and the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = domain</a> parameter. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>machine password timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">604800</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="magic output (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556510"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550528"></a> magic output (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556512"></a><a name="MAGICOUTPUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550530"></a><a name="MAGICOUTPUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output created by a magic script (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAGICSCRIPT" target="_top">magic script</a> parameter below). - </p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>If two clients use the same <em class="parameter"><code>magic script + </p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>If two clients use the same <em class="parameter"><code>magic script </code></em> in the same directory the output file content is undefined. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic output</code></em> = <code class="literal"><magic script name>.out</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic output</code></em> = <code class="literal">myfile.txt</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="magic script (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556594"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550612"></a> magic script (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556596"></a><a name="MAGICSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550614"></a><a name="MAGICSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed. This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and executed on behalf of the connected user.</p><p>Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon @@ -3514,23 +3514,23 @@ magic script (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic script</code></em> = <code class="literal">user.csh</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="mangled names (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556700"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550718"></a> mangled names (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556701"></a><a name="MANGLEDNAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550719"></a><a name="MANGLEDNAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</p><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a> for - details on how to control the mangling process.</p><p>If mangling is used then the mangling method is as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters + details on how to control the mangling process.</p><p>If mangling is used then the mangling method is as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters - of the mangled name.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled + of the mangled name.</p></li><li><p>A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the original root name (i.e., the original filename minus its final extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three characters.</p><p>Note that the character to use may be specified using the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MANGLINGCHAR" target="_top">mangling char</a> - option, if you don't like '~'.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be + option, if you don't like '~'.</p></li><li><p>Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be presented as DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as its extension regardless of actual original extension (that's three @@ -3542,10 +3542,10 @@ mangled names (S) from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names do not change between sessions.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangled names</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="mangle prefix (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556837"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550855"></a> mangle prefix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556838"></a><a name="MANGLEPREFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the number of prefix +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550856"></a><a name="MANGLEPREFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the number of prefix characters from the original name used when generating the mangled names. A larger value will give a weaker hash and therefore more name collisions. The minimum @@ -3555,20 +3555,20 @@ mangle prefix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangle prefix</code></em> = <code class="literal">4</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="mangling char (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556904"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550922"></a> mangling char (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556905"></a><a name="MANGLINGCHAR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what character is used as +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550923"></a><a name="MANGLINGCHAR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what character is used as the <span class="emphasis"><em>magic</em></span> character in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>. The default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer. This is effective only when mangling method is hash.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling char</code></em> = <code class="literal">~</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling char</code></em> = <code class="literal">^</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="mangling method (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556981"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550999"></a> mangling method (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556982"></a><a name="MANGLINGMETHOD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the algorithm used for the generating +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551000"></a><a name="MANGLINGMETHOD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the algorithm used for the generating the mangled names. Can take two different values, "hash" and "hash2". "hash" is the algorithm that was used used in Samba for many years and was the default in Samba 2.2.x "hash2" is @@ -3579,10 +3579,10 @@ mangling method (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling method</code></em> = <code class="literal">hash</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map acl inherit (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557048"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551066"></a> map acl inherit (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557049"></a><a name="MAPACLINHERIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map the 'inherit' and 'protected' +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551067"></a><a name="MAPACLINHERIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map the 'inherit' and 'protected' access control entry flags stored in Windows ACLs into an extended attribute called user.SAMBA_PAI. This parameter only takes effect if Samba is being run on a platform that supports extended attributes (Linux and IRIX so far) and @@ -3590,10 +3590,10 @@ map acl inherit (S) POSIX ACL mapping code. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map acl inherit</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map archive (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557105"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551123"></a> map archive (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557106"></a><a name="MAPARCHIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551124"></a><a name="MAPARCHIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit is set when a file has been modified since its last backup. One @@ -3606,26 +3606,26 @@ map archive (S) <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map archive</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map hidden (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557181"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551199"></a> map hidden (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557182"></a><a name="MAPHIDDEN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551200"></a><a name="MAPHIDDEN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit. </p><p> Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> to be set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 001). See the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> for details. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map read only (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557238"></a> + </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551256"></a> map read only (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557239"></a><a name="MAPREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551257"></a><a name="MAPREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls how the DOS read only attribute should be mapped from a UNIX filesystem. </p><p> This parameter can take three different values, which tell <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> how to display the read only attribute on files, where either <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES" target="_top">store dos attributes</a> is set to <code class="constant">No</code>, or no extended attribute is present. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES" target="_top">store dos attributes</a> is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> then this parameter is <span class="emphasis"><em>ignored</em></span>. This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version 3.0.21. - </p><p>The three settings are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p> + </p><p>The three settings are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p> <code class="constant">Yes</code> - The read only DOS attribute is mapped to the inverse of the user or owner write bit in the unix permission mode set. If the owner write bit is not set, the read only attribute is reported as being set on the file. @@ -3633,20 +3633,20 @@ map read only (S) others write bits to zero. Write bits set in an ACL are ignored by Samba. If the read only DOS attribute is unset, Samba simply sets the write bit of the owner to one. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="constant">Permissions</code> - The read only DOS attribute is mapped to the effective permissions of the connecting user, as evaluated by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> by reading the unix permissions and POSIX ACL (if present). If the connecting user does not have permission to modify the file, the read only attribute is reported as being set on the file. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="constant">No</code> - The read only DOS attribute is unaffected by permissions, and can only be set by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES" target="_top">store dos attributes</a> method. This may be useful for exporting mounted CDs. </p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map read only</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map system (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557395"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551413"></a> map system (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557396"></a><a name="MAPSYSTEM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551414"></a><a name="MAPSYSTEM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit. </p><p> Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> to be set such that the group @@ -3654,20 +3654,20 @@ map system (S) <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map system</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map to guest (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557464"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551482"></a> map to guest (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557465"></a><a name="MAPTOGUEST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only useful in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">SECURITY = +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551483"></a><a name="MAPTOGUEST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only useful in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">SECURITY = security</a> modes other than <em class="parameter"><code>security = share</code></em> and <em class="parameter"><code>security = server</code></em> - i.e. <code class="constant">user</code>, and <code class="constant">domain</code>.</p><p>This parameter can take four different values, which tell <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> what to do with user - login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way.</p><p>The four settings are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">Never</code> - Means user login + login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way.</p><p>The four settings are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="constant">Never</code> - Means user login requests with an invalid password are rejected. This is the - default.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">Bad User</code> - Means user + default.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">Bad User</code> - Means user logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and - mapped into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">Bad Password</code> - Means user logins + mapped into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">Bad Password</code> - Means user logins with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>. Note that this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing @@ -3676,7 +3676,7 @@ map to guest (G) they should - there will have been no message given to them that they got their password wrong. Helpdesk services will <span class="emphasis"><em>hate</em></span> you if you set the <em class="parameter"><code>map to - guest</code></em> parameter this way :-).</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">Bad Uid</code> - Is only applicable when Samba is configured + guest</code></em> parameter this way :-).</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">Bad Uid</code> - Is only applicable when Samba is configured in some type of domain mode security (security = {domain|ads}) and means that user logins which are successfully authenticated but which have no valid Unix user account (and smbd is unable to create one) should be mapped to the defined @@ -3699,10 +3699,10 @@ map to guest (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map to guest</code></em> = <code class="literal">Bad User</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="map untrusted to domain (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557704"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551722"></a> map untrusted to domain (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557705"></a><a name="MAPUNTRUSTEDTODOMAIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551723"></a><a name="MAPUNTRUSTEDTODOMAIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If a client connects to smbd using an untrusted domain name, such as BOGUS\user, smbd replaces the BOGUS domain with it's SAM name before attempting to authenticate that user. In the case where smbd is acting as @@ -3720,10 +3720,10 @@ map untrusted to domain (G) effect. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map untrusted to domain</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max connections (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557771"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551789"></a> max connections (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557772"></a><a name="MAXCONNECTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551790"></a><a name="MAXCONNECTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited. If <em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if this number of connections to the service are already open. A value of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made.</p><p>Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The lock files will be stored in @@ -3731,10 +3731,10 @@ max connections (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> = <code class="literal">10</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max disk size (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557857"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551875"></a> max disk size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557858"></a><a name="MAXDISKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to put an upper limit +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551876"></a><a name="MAXDISKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to put an upper limit on the apparent size of disks. If you set this option to 100 then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in size.</p><p>Note that this option does not limit the amount of @@ -3748,10 +3748,10 @@ max disk size (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max disk size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max log size (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557949"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551967"></a> max log size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557950"></a><a name="MAXLOGSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551968"></a><a name="MAXLOGSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log file should grow to. Samba periodically checks the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding a <code class="filename">.old</code> extension. @@ -3760,17 +3760,17 @@ max log size (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max log size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max mux (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558020"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552038"></a> max mux (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558021"></a><a name="MAXMUX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552039"></a><a name="MAXMUX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max mux</code></em> = <code class="literal">50</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max open files (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558063"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552081"></a> max open files (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558064"></a><a name="MAXOPENFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552082"></a><a name="MAXOPENFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of open files that one <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> file serving process may have open for a client at any one time. The default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses @@ -3778,38 +3778,38 @@ max open files (G) by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max open files</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max print jobs (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558123"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552141"></a> max print jobs (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558124"></a><a name="MAXPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552142"></a><a name="MAXPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment. If this number is exceeded, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will remote "Out of Space" to the client. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">5000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="protocol"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558193"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552212"></a> <a name="PROTOCOL"></a>protocol -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558194"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max protocol (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558226"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552213"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552244"></a> max protocol (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558227"></a><a name="MAXPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest - protocol level that will be supported by the server.</p><p>Possible values are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">CORE</code>: Earliest version. No - concept of user names.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">COREPLUS</code>: Slight improvements on - CORE for efficiency.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">LANMAN1</code>: First <span class="emphasis"><em> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552246"></a><a name="MAXPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest + protocol level that will be supported by the server.</p><p>Possible values are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="constant">CORE</code>: Earliest version. No + concept of user names.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">COREPLUS</code>: Slight improvements on + CORE for efficiency.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">LANMAN1</code>: First <span class="emphasis"><em> modern</em></span> version of the protocol. Long filename - support.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">LANMAN2</code>: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">NT1</code>: Current up to date version of the protocol. + support.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">LANMAN2</code>: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">NT1</code>: Current up to date version of the protocol. Used by Windows NT. Known as CIFS.</p></li></ul></div><p>Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate protocol.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">NT1</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">LANMAN1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max reported print jobs (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558351"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552370"></a> max reported print jobs (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558352"></a><a name="MAXREPORTEDPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552371"></a><a name="MAXREPORTEDPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs displayed in a port monitor for Samba printer queue at any given moment. If this number is exceeded, the excess jobs will not be shown. A value of zero means there is no limit on the number of @@ -3818,10 +3818,10 @@ max reported print jobs (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max reported print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max smbd processes (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558415"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552434"></a> max smbd processes (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558416"></a><a name="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> processes concurrently running on a system and is intended +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552435"></a><a name="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> processes concurrently running on a system and is intended as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this number of connections. Remember that under normal operating conditions, each user will have an <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> associated with him or her to handle connections to all @@ -3829,10 +3829,10 @@ max smbd processes (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max smbd processes</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max stat cache size (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558497"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552515"></a> max stat cache size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558498"></a><a name="MAXSTATCACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the size in memory of any +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552516"></a><a name="MAXSTATCACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the size in memory of any <em class="parameter"><code>stat cache</code></em> being used to speed up case insensitive name mappings. It represents the number of kilobyte (1024) units the stat cache can use. @@ -3843,27 +3843,27 @@ max stat cache size (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max stat cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">100</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max ttl (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558566"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552584"></a> max ttl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558567"></a><a name="MAXTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> what the default 'time to live' +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552585"></a><a name="MAXTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when <code class="literal">nmbd</code> is requesting a name using either a broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 3 days.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">259200</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max wins ttl (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558625"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552643"></a> max wins ttl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558626"></a><a name="MAXWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552644"></a><a name="MAXWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT" target="_top">wins support = yes</a>) what the maximum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max wins ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">518400</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="max xmit (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558696"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552714"></a> max xmit (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558697"></a><a name="MAXXMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum packet size +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552716"></a><a name="MAXXMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum packet size that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 16644, which matches the behavior of Windows 2000. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems. You should never need to change this parameter from its default value. @@ -3871,10 +3871,10 @@ max xmit (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max xmit</code></em> = <code class="literal">8192</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="message command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558759"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552777"></a> message command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558760"></a><a name="MESSAGECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what command to run when the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552778"></a><a name="MESSAGECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what command to run when the server receives a WinPopup style message.</p><p>This would normally be a command that would deliver the message somehow. How this is to be done is up to your imagination.</p><p>An example is: @@ -3890,9 +3890,9 @@ message command (G) The command takes the standard substitutions, although <em class="parameter"><code> %u</code></em> won't work (<em class="parameter"><code>%U</code></em> may be better in this case).</p><p>Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional - ones apply. In particular:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%s</code></em> = the filename containing - the message.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%t</code></em> = the destination that - the message was sent to (probably the server name).</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%f</code></em> = who the message + ones apply. In particular:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>%s</code></em> = the filename containing + the message.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>%t</code></em> = the destination that + the message was sent to (probably the server name).</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>%f</code></em> = who the message is from.</p></li></ul></div><p>You could make this command send mail, or whatever else takes your fancy. Please let us know of any really interesting ideas you have.</p><p> @@ -3913,20 +3913,20 @@ message command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>message command</code></em> = <code class="literal">csh -c 'xedit %s; rm %s' &</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="min print space (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558969"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552987"></a> min print space (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558970"></a><a name="MINPRINTSPACE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the minimum amount of free disk +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552988"></a><a name="MINPRINTSPACE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be available before a user will be able to spool a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which means a user can always spool a print job.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min print space</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min print space</code></em> = <code class="literal">2000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="min protocol (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559032"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553050"></a> min protocol (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559033"></a><a name="MINPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553051"></a><a name="MINPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support. Please refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXPROTOCOL" target="_top">max protocol</a> parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description @@ -3938,10 +3938,10 @@ min protocol (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">NT1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="min receivefile size (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559130"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553149"></a> min receivefile size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559132"></a><a name="MINRECEIVEFILESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option changes the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when processing SMBwriteX calls. Any incoming +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553150"></a><a name="MINRECEIVEFILESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option changes the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when processing SMBwriteX calls. Any incoming SMBwriteX call on a non-signed SMB/CIFS connection greater than this value will not be processed in the normal way but will be passed to any underlying kernel recvfile or splice system call (if there is no such call Samba will emulate in user space). This allows zero-copy writes directly from network @@ -3950,19 +3950,19 @@ but user testing is recommended. If set to zero Samba processes SMBwriteX calls normal way. To enable POSIX large write support (SMB/CIFS writes up to 16Mb) this option must be nonzero. The maximum value is 128k. Values greater than 128k will be silently set to 128k.</p><p>Note this option will have NO EFFECT if set on a SMB signed connection.</p><p>The default is zero, which diables this option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min receivefile size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="min wins ttl (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559200"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553218"></a> min wins ttl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559201"></a><a name="MINWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553219"></a><a name="MINWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT" target="_top">wins support = yes</a>) what the minimum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 6 hours (21600 seconds).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min wins ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">21600</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="msdfs proxy (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559270"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553288"></a> msdfs proxy (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559271"></a><a name="MSDFSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter indicates that the share is a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553290"></a><a name="MSDFSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter indicates that the share is a stand-in for another CIFS share whose location is specified by the value of the parameter. When clients attempt to connect to this share, they are redirected to the proxied share using @@ -3970,10 +3970,10 @@ msdfs proxy (S) <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT" target="_top">msdfs root</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTMSDFS" target="_top">host msdfs</a> options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">\otherserver\someshare</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="msdfs root (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559348"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553366"></a> msdfs root (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559349"></a><a name="MSDFSROOT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, Samba treats the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553368"></a><a name="MSDFSROOT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic @@ -3981,39 +3981,39 @@ msdfs root (S) and so on. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to the MSDFS chapter in the Samba3-HOWTO book.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs root</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="name cache timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559404"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553422"></a> name cache timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559405"></a><a name="NAMECACHETIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the number of seconds it takes before +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553423"></a><a name="NAMECACHETIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the number of seconds it takes before entries in samba's hostname resolve cache time out. If the timeout is set to 0. the caching is disabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name cache timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">660</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name cache timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="name resolve order (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559465"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553483"></a> name resolve order (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559466"></a><a name="NAMERESOLVEORDER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used by the programs in the Samba +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553484"></a><a name="NAMERESOLVEORDER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses. Its main purpose to is to control how netbios name resolution is performed. The option takes a space separated string of name resolution options.</p><p>The options are: "lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They cause names to be - resolved as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p> + resolved as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p> <code class="constant">lmhosts</code> : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the manpage for lmhosts for details) then any name type matches for lookup. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="constant">host</code> : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system <code class="filename">/etc/hosts </code>, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the <code class="filename">/etc/nsswitch.conf</code> file. Note that this method is used only if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type or 0x1c (domain controllers). The latter case is only useful for active directory domains and results in a DNS query for the SRV RR entry matching _ldap._tcp.domain. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">wins</code> : Query a name with + </p></li><li><p><code class="constant">wins</code> : Query a name with the IP address listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSERVER" target="_top">WINSSERVER</a> parameter. If no WINS server has - been specified this method will be ignored.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">bcast</code> : Do a broadcast on + been specified this method will be ignored.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">bcast</code> : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally @@ -4025,10 +4025,10 @@ name resolve order (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name resolve order</code></em> = <code class="literal">lmhosts bcast host</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="netbios aliases (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559667"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553685"></a> netbios aliases (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559668"></a><a name="NETBIOSALIASES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553686"></a><a name="NETBIOSALIASES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will advertise as additional names by which the Samba server is known. This allows one machine to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If a machine is acting as a browse server or logon server none of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon @@ -4038,10 +4038,10 @@ netbios aliases (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios aliases</code></em> = <code class="literal">TEST TEST1 TEST2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="netbios name (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559733"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553751"></a> netbios name (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559734"></a><a name="NETBIOSNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553752"></a><a name="NETBIOSNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known. By default it is the same as the first component of the host's DNS name. If a machine is a browse server or logon server this name (or the first component of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are advertised under. @@ -4054,17 +4054,17 @@ netbios name (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios name</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYNAME</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="netbios scope (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559814"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553833"></a> netbios scope (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559816"></a><a name="NETBIOSSCOPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553834"></a><a name="NETBIOSSCOPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will operate under. This should not be set unless every machine on your LAN also sets this value.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios scope</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="nis homedir (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559857"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553875"></a> nis homedir (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559858"></a><a name="NISHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553876"></a><a name="NISHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote server. </p><p>When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory @@ -4083,20 +4083,20 @@ nis homedir (G) NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also be a logon server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nis homedir</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="nt acl support (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559943"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553961"></a> nt acl support (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559944"></a><a name="NTACLSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553962"></a><a name="NTACLSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists. The UNIX permissions considered are the the traditional UNIX owner and group permissions, as well as POSIX ACLs set on any files or directories. This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases prior to 2.2.2.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt acl support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="ntlm auth (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559998"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554016"></a> ntlm auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559999"></a><a name="NTLMAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554017"></a><a name="NTLMAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to authenticate users using the NTLM encrypted password response. If disabled, either the lanman password hash or an NTLMv2 response will need to be sent by the client.</p><p>If this option, and <code class="literal">lanman @@ -4104,33 +4104,33 @@ ntlm auth (G) permited. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to use it.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ntlm auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="nt pipe support (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560062"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554080"></a> nt pipe support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560063"></a><a name="NTPIPESUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554081"></a><a name="NTPIPESUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will allow Windows NT clients to connect to the NT SMB specific <code class="constant">IPC$</code> pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left alone.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt pipe support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="nt status support (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560118"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554136"></a> nt status support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560119"></a><a name="NTSTATUSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will negotiate NT specific status +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554137"></a><a name="NTSTATUSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will negotiate NT specific status support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients. This is a developer debugging option and should be left alone. If this option is set to <code class="constant">no</code> then Samba offers exactly the same DOS error codes that versions prior to Samba 2.2.3 reported.</p><p>You should not need to ever disable this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt status support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="null passwords (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560179"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554197"></a> null passwords (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560180"></a><a name="NULLPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords. </p><p>See also <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>null passwords</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554198"></a><a name="NULLPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords. </p><p>See also <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>null passwords</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="obey pam restrictions (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560233"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554251"></a> obey pam restrictions (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560234"></a><a name="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba 3.0 is configured to enable PAM support +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554252"></a><a name="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba 3.0 is configured to enable PAM support (i.e. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account and session management directives. The default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only @@ -4140,10 +4140,10 @@ obey pam restrictions (G) authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>obey pam restrictions</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="only user (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560297"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554315"></a> only user (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560298"></a><a name="ONLYUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean option that controls whether +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554316"></a><a name="ONLYUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean option that controls whether connections with usernames not in the <em class="parameter"><code>user</code></em> list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a client can supply a username to be used by the server. Enabling @@ -4156,22 +4156,22 @@ only user (S) will be just the service name, which for home directories is the name of the user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>only user</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="oplock break wait time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560386"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554404"></a> oplock break wait time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560387"></a><a name="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554405"></a><a name="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock break request, then the network client can fail and not respond to the break request. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break request to such (broken) clients. - </p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p> + </p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p> DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplock break wait time</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="oplock contention limit (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560441"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554459"></a> oplock contention limit (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560442"></a><a name="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554460"></a><a name="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a <span class="emphasis"><em>very</em></span> advanced <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> tuning option to improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple client contention for the same file. </p><p> @@ -4179,14 +4179,14 @@ oplock contention limit (S) approximate number of clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this limit. This causes <code class="literal">smbd</code> to behave in a similar way to Windows NT. - </p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p> + </p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p> DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplock contention limit</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="oplocks (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560523"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554542"></a> oplocks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560524"></a><a name="OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554543"></a><a name="OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean option tells <code class="literal">smbd</code> whether to issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve @@ -4203,10 +4203,10 @@ oplocks (S) <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#KERNELOPLOCKS" target="_top">kernel oplocks</a> parameter for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="os2 driver map (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560609"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554627"></a> os2 driver map (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560610"></a><a name="OS2DRIVERMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The parameter is used to define the absolute +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554628"></a><a name="OS2DRIVERMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The parameter is used to define the absolute path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver names to OS/2 printer driver names. The format is:</p><p><nt driver name> = <os2 driver name>.<device name></p><p>For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5 printer driver would appear as <code class="literal">HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP @@ -4216,10 +4216,10 @@ os2 driver map (G) details on OS/2 clients, please refer to chapter on other clients in the Samba3-HOWTO book. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>os2 driver map</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="os level (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560676"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554694"></a> os level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560677"></a><a name="OSLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554695"></a><a name="OSLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this parameter determines whether <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> in the local broadcast area. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em> @@ -4235,10 +4235,10 @@ os level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>os level</code></em> = <code class="literal">65</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="pam password change (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560776"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554794"></a> pam password change (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560777"></a><a name="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554795"></a><a name="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control flag for Samba. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in @@ -4246,20 +4246,20 @@ pam password change (G) It should be possible to enable this without changing your <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDCHAT" target="_top">passwd chat</a> parameter for most setups.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pam password change</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="panic action (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560848"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554867"></a> panic action (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560850"></a><a name="PANICACTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a Samba developer option that allows a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554868"></a><a name="PANICACTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a Samba developer option that allows a system command to be called when either <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> or <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> crashes. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that a problem occurred. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>panic action</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>panic action</code></em> = <code class="literal">"/bin/sleep 90000"</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="paranoid server security (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560924"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554942"></a> paranoid server security (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560925"></a><a name="PARANOIDSERVERSECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some version of NT 4.x allow non-guest +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554944"></a><a name="PARANOIDSERVERSECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some version of NT 4.x allow non-guest users with a bad passowrd. When this option is enabled, samba will not use a broken NT 4.x server as password server, but instead complain to the logs and exit. @@ -4267,21 +4267,21 @@ paranoid server security (G) this check, which involves deliberatly attempting a bad logon to the remote server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>paranoid server security</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passdb backend (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560976"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554994"></a> passdb backend (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560977"></a><a name="PASSDBBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the administrator to chose which backend +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554995"></a><a name="PASSDBBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the administrator to chose which backend will be used for storing user and possibly group information. This allows you to swap between different storage mechanisms without recompile. </p><p>The parameter value is divided into two parts, the backend's name, and a 'location' string that has meaning only to that particular backed. These are separated by a : character.</p><p>Available backends can include: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> - The old plaintext passdb + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> - The old plaintext passdb backend. Some Samba features will not work if this passdb backend is used. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">tdbsam</code> - The TDB based password storage + </p></li><li><p><code class="literal">tdbsam</code> - The TDB based password storage backend. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb - in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRIVATEDIR" target="_top">private dir</a> directory.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">ldapsam</code> - The LDAP based passdb + in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRIVATEDIR" target="_top">private dir</a> directory.</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">ldapsam</code> - The LDAP based passdb backend. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to <code class="literal">ldap://localhost</code>)</p><p>LDAP connections should be secured where possible. This may be done using either Start-TLS (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL" target="_top">ldap ssl</a>) or by @@ -4305,19 +4305,19 @@ or multi server LDAP URL with Netscape based LDAP library: passdb backend = ldapsam:"ldap://ldap-1.example.com ldap-2.example.com" </pre><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passdb backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">tdbsam</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passdb expand explicit (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561134"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555152"></a> passdb expand explicit (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561135"></a><a name="PASSDBEXPANDEXPLICIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555154"></a><a name="PASSDBEXPANDEXPLICIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls whether Samba substitutes %-macros in the passdb fields if they are explicitly set. We used to expand macros here, but this turned out to be a bug because the Windows client can expand a variable %G_osver% in which %G would have been substituted by the user's primary group. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passdb expand explicit</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passwd chat debug (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561181"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555199"></a> passwd chat debug (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561182"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555200"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in <span class="emphasis"><em>debug</em></span> mode. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed in the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> log with a @@ -4330,18 +4330,18 @@ passwd chat debug (G) <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" target="_top">pam password change</a> parameter is set. This parameter is off by default.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat debug</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passwd chat timeout (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561284"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555303"></a> passwd chat timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561286"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This integer specifies the number of seconds smbd will wait for an initial +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555304"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This integer specifies the number of seconds smbd will wait for an initial answer from a passwd chat script being run. Once the initial answer is received the subsequent answers must be received in one tenth of this time. The default it two seconds.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passwd chat (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561330"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555348"></a> passwd chat (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561331"></a><a name="PASSWDCHAT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This string controls the <span class="emphasis"><em>"chat"</em></span> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555349"></a><a name="PASSWDCHAT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This string controls the <span class="emphasis"><em>"chat"</em></span> conversation that takes places between <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and the local password changing program to change the user's password. The string describes a sequence of response-receive pairs that <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> uses to determine what to send to the @@ -4372,10 +4372,10 @@ passwd chat (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat</code></em> = <code class="literal">"*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password changed*"</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="passwd program (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561534"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555553"></a> passwd program (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561535"></a><a name="PASSWDPROGRAM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to set +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555554"></a><a name="PASSWDPROGRAM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords. Any occurrences of <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em> will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for existence before calling the password changing program.</p><p>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <span class="emphasis"><em>reasonable @@ -4396,10 +4396,10 @@ passwd program (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd program</code></em> = <code class="literal">/bin/passwd %u</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="password level (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561670"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555688"></a> password level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561671"></a><a name="PASSWORDLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some client/server combinations have difficulty +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555690"></a><a name="PASSWORDLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some client/server combinations have difficulty with mixed-case passwords. One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when @@ -4421,10 +4421,10 @@ password level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password level</code></em> = <code class="literal">4</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="password server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561807"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555825"></a> password server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561808"></a><a name="PASSWORDSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>By specifying the name of another SMB server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555826"></a><a name="PASSWORDSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>By specifying the name of another SMB server or Active Directory domain controller with this option, and using <code class="literal">security = [ads|domain|server]</code> it is possible to get Samba @@ -4439,7 +4439,7 @@ password server (G) parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMERESOLVEORDER" target="_top">name resolve order</a> and so may resolved by any method and order described in that parameter.</p><p>The password server must be a machine capable of using the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in - user level security mode.</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Using a password server means your UNIX box (running + user level security mode.</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Using a password server means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your password server. <span class="emphasis"><em>DO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</em></span>. </p></div><p>Never point a Samba server at itself for password serving. @@ -4468,13 +4468,13 @@ password server (G) this list by locating the closest DC.</p><p>If the <em class="parameter"><code>security</code></em> parameter is set to <code class="constant">server</code>, then there are different restrictions that <code class="literal">security = domain</code> doesn't - suffer from:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>You may list several password servers in + suffer from:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>You may list several password servers in the <em class="parameter"><code>password server</code></em> parameter, however if an <code class="literal">smbd</code> makes a connection to a password server, and then the password server fails, no more users will be able to be authenticated from this <code class="literal">smbd</code>. This is a restriction of the SMB/CIFS protocol when in <code class="literal">security = server - </code> mode and cannot be fixed in Samba.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>If you are using a Windows NT server as your + </code> mode and cannot be fixed in Samba.</p></li><li><p>If you are using a Windows NT server as your password server then you will have to ensure that your users are able to login from the Samba server, as when in <code class="literal"> security = server</code> mode the network logon will appear to @@ -4484,13 +4484,13 @@ password server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password server</code></em> = <code class="literal">windc.mydomain.com:389 192.168.1.101 *</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="directory"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562106"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556124"></a> <a name="DIRECTORY"></a>directory -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562107"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PATH">path</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="path (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562137"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556125"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PATH">path</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556155"></a> path (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562138"></a><a name="PATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a directory to which +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556156"></a><a name="PATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the service is to be given access. In the case of printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to being submitted to the host for printing.</p><p>For a printable service offering guest access, the service @@ -4507,25 +4507,25 @@ path (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>path</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home/fred</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="perfcount module (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562241"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556259"></a> perfcount module (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562242"></a><a name="PERFCOUNTMODULE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the perfcount backend to be used when monitoring SMB +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556260"></a><a name="PERFCOUNTMODULE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the perfcount backend to be used when monitoring SMB operations. Only one perfcount module may be used, and it must implement all of the apis contained in the smb_perfcount_handler structure defined in smb.h. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="pid directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562274"></a> + </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556293"></a> pid directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562276"></a><a name="PIDDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556294"></a><a name="PIDDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option specifies the directory where pid files will be placed. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pid directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/var/locks</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pid directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">pid directory = /var/run/</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="posix locking (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562334"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556352"></a> posix locking (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562335"></a><a name="POSIXLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556353"></a><a name="POSIXLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients. The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX locks. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are @@ -4533,10 +4533,10 @@ posix locking (S) method (e.g. NFS or local file access). You should never need to disable this parameter. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>posix locking</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="postexec (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562390"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556408"></a> postexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562391"></a><a name="POSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556409"></a><a name="POSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some systems.</p><p>An interesting example may be to unmount server @@ -4544,21 +4544,21 @@ postexec (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>postexec</code></em> = <code class="literal">echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preexec close (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562462"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556481"></a> preexec close (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562464"></a><a name="PREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556482"></a><a name="PREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PREEXEC" target="_top">preexec</a> should close the service being connected to. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preexec close</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="exec"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562518"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556536"></a> <a name="EXEC"></a>exec -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562519"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREEXEC">preexec</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preexec (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562549"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556537"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREEXEC">preexec</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556567"></a> preexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562550"></a><a name="PREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556568"></a><a name="PREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.</p><p>An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example:</p><p> @@ -4570,13 +4570,13 @@ preexec (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preexec</code></em> = <code class="literal">echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="prefered master"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562657"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556676"></a> <a name="PREFEREDMASTER"></a>prefered master -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562658"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREFERREDMASTER">preferred master</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preferred master (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562691"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556677"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREFERREDMASTER">preferred master</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556709"></a> preferred master (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562692"></a><a name="PREFERREDMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556710"></a><a name="PREFERREDMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> is a preferred master browser for its workgroup. </p><p> If this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, on startup, <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will force @@ -4590,22 +4590,22 @@ preferred master (G) capabilities. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preferred master</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preload modules (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562784"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556802"></a> preload modules (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562785"></a><a name="PRELOADMODULES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of paths to modules that should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556803"></a><a name="PRELOADMODULES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of paths to modules that should be loaded into smbd before a client connects. This improves the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload modules</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload modules</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="auto services"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562845"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556863"></a> <a name="AUTOSERVICES"></a>auto services -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562846"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRELOAD">preload</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preload (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562878"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556864"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRELOAD">preload</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556896"></a> preload (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562879"></a><a name="PRELOAD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of services that you want to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556897"></a><a name="PRELOAD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be visible.</p><p> @@ -4616,33 +4616,33 @@ preload (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload</code></em> = <code class="literal">fred lp colorlp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="preserve case (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562956"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556974"></a> preserve case (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562957"></a><a name="PRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556975"></a><a name="PRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULTCASE" target="_top">default case</a>. </p><p> See the section on <a class="link" href="#NAMEMANGLINGSECT" title="NAME MANGLING">NAME MANGLING</a> for a fuller discussion. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preserve case</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="print ok"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563022"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557040"></a> <a name="PRINTOK"></a>print ok -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563023"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTABLE">printable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printable (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563053"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557041"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTABLE">printable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557071"></a> printable (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563054"></a><a name="PRINTABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557072"></a><a name="PRINTABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory specified for the service. </p><p>Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling of print data. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a> parameter controls only non-printing access to the resource.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printcap cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563116"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557135"></a> printcap cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563118"></a><a name="PRINTCAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the number of seconds before the printing +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557136"></a><a name="PRINTCAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the number of seconds before the printing subsystem is again asked for the known printers. If the value is greater than 60 the initial waiting time is set to 60 seconds to allow an earlier first rescan of the printing subsystem. @@ -4652,13 +4652,13 @@ printcap cache time (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">600</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printcap"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563185"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557203"></a> <a name="PRINTCAP"></a>printcap -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563186"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTCAPNAME">printcap name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printcap name (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563218"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557204"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTCAPNAME">printcap name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557236"></a> printcap name (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563219"></a><a name="PRINTCAPNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557237"></a><a name="PRINTCAPNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually <code class="filename"> /etc/printcap</code>). See the discussion of the <a class="link" href="#PRINTERSSECT" title="The [printers] section">[printers]</a> section above for reasons why you might want to do this. </p><p> @@ -4686,17 +4686,17 @@ print5|My Printer 5 </pre><p> where the '|' separates aliases of a printer. The fact that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba that it's a comment. - </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> + </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> Under AIX the default printcap name is <code class="filename">/etc/qconfig</code>. Samba will assume the file is in AIX <code class="filename">qconfig</code> format if the string <code class="filename">qconfig</code> appears in the printcap filename. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap name</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/printcap</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap name</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/myprintcap</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="print command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563403"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557421"></a> print command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563404"></a><a name="PRINTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>After a print job has finished spooling to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557422"></a><a name="PRINTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command will be used via a <code class="literal">system()</code> call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there @@ -4738,10 +4738,10 @@ print command (S) and if SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any manually set print command will be ignored.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>print command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printer admin (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563672"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557691"></a> printer admin (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563674"></a><a name="PRINTERADMIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557692"></a><a name="PRINTERADMIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This lists users who can do anything to printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC (usually using a NT workstation). @@ -4757,13 +4757,13 @@ printer admin (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer admin</code></em> = <code class="literal">admin, @staff</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printer"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563742"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557760"></a> <a name="PRINTER"></a>printer -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563743"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTERNAME">printer name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printer name (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563773"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557761"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTERNAME">printer name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557791"></a> printer name (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563774"></a><a name="PRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557792"></a><a name="PRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent. </p><p> @@ -4776,10 +4776,10 @@ printer name (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer name</code></em> = <code class="literal">laserwriter</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printing (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563861"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557879"></a> printing (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563862"></a><a name="PRINTING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters controls how printer status information is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557880"></a><a name="PRINTING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted on your system. It also affects the default values for the <em class="parameter"><code>print command</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lppause command </code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lpresume command</code></em>, and <em class="parameter"><code>lprm command</code></em> if specified in the [global] section.</p><p>Currently nine printing styles are supported. They are @@ -4796,27 +4796,27 @@ printing (S) [printers]</a> section.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> = <code class="literal">Depends on the operating system, see <code class="literal">testparm -v.</code></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="printjob username (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564014"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558032"></a> printjob username (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564015"></a><a name="PRINTJOBUSERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies which user information will be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558033"></a><a name="PRINTJOBUSERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies which user information will be passed to the printing system. Usually, the username is sent, but in some cases, e.g. the domain prefix is useful, too.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printjob username</code></em> = <code class="literal">%U</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printjob username</code></em> = <code class="literal">%D\%U</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="private dir (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564076"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558094"></a> private dir (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564077"></a><a name="PRIVATEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters defines the directory +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558095"></a><a name="PRIVATEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters defines the directory smbd will use for storing such files as <code class="filename">smbpasswd</code> and <code class="filename">secrets.tdb</code>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>private dir</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/private</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="profile acls (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564130"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558148"></a> profile acls (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564131"></a><a name="PROFILEACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558149"></a><a name="PROFILEACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter was added to fix the problems that people have been having with storing user profiles on Samba shares from Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients. New versions of Windows 2000 or Windows XP service @@ -4844,10 +4844,10 @@ profile acls (S) tree to the owning user. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>profile acls</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="queuepause command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564202"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558221"></a> queuepause command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564204"></a><a name="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558222"></a><a name="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.</p><p>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, @@ -4858,10 +4858,10 @@ queuepause command (S) path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>queuepause command</code></em> = <code class="literal">disable %p</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="queueresume command (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564279"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558297"></a> queueresume command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564280"></a><a name="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558298"></a><a name="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue. It is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the previous parameter (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND" target="_top">queuepause command</a>).</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes @@ -4876,10 +4876,10 @@ queueresume command (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>queueresume command</code></em> = <code class="literal">enable %p</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="read list (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564382"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558400"></a> read list (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564383"></a><a name="READLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558401"></a><a name="READLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will not be given write access, no matter what the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a> option is set to. The list can include group names using the syntax described in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INVALIDUSERS" target="_top">invalid users</a> @@ -4889,19 +4889,19 @@ read list (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read list</code></em> = <code class="literal">mary, @students</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="read only (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564482"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558500"></a> read only (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564483"></a><a name="READONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>An inverted synonym is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITEABLE" target="_top">writeable</a>.</p><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then users +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558501"></a><a name="READONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>An inverted synonym is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITEABLE" target="_top">writeable</a>.</p><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then users of a service may not create or modify files in the service's directory.</p><p>Note that a printable service (<code class="literal">printable = yes</code>) will <span class="emphasis"><em>ALWAYS</em></span> allow writing to the directory (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read only</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="read raw (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564559"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558577"></a> read raw (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564560"></a><a name="READRAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558578"></a><a name="READRAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data to clients.</p><p>If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in one packet. This typically provides a major performance benefit. @@ -4910,20 +4910,20 @@ read raw (G) sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads.</p><p>In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool and left severely alone.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read raw</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="realm (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564619"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558637"></a> realm (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564620"></a><a name="REALM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the kerberos realm to use. The realm is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558638"></a><a name="REALM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the kerberos realm to use. The realm is used as the ADS equivalent of the NT4 <code class="literal">domain</code>. It is usually set to the DNS name of the kerberos server. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>realm</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>realm</code></em> = <code class="literal">mysambabox.mycompany.com</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="registry shares (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564684"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558702"></a> registry shares (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564685"></a><a name="REGISTRYSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558703"></a><a name="REGISTRYSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This turns on or off support for share definitions read from registry. Shares defined in <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span> take precedence over shares with the same name defined in @@ -4938,10 +4938,10 @@ registry shares (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>registry shares</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="remote announce (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564770"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558788"></a> remote announce (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564771"></a><a name="REMOTEANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558789"></a><a name="REMOTEANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to setup <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to periodically announce itself to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name. </p><p> @@ -4965,10 +4965,10 @@ remote announce (G) See the chapter on Network Browsing in the Samba-HOWTO book. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>remote announce</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="remote browse sync (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564875"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558894"></a> remote browse sync (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564876"></a><a name="REMOTEBROWSESYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558895"></a><a name="REMOTEBROWSESYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to setup <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to periodically request synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to @@ -5000,17 +5000,17 @@ remote browse sync (G) each network has its own WINS server. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>remote browse sync</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="rename user script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564993"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559011"></a> rename user script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564994"></a><a name="RENAMEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559012"></a><a name="RENAMEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the full pathname to a script that will be run as root by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> under special circumstances described below. </p><p> When a user with admin authority or SeAddUserPrivilege rights renames a user (e.g.: from the NT4 User Manager for Domains), this script will be run to rename the POSIX user. Two variables, <code class="literal">%uold</code> and <code class="literal">%unew</code>, will be substituted with the old and new usernames, respectively. The script should return 0 upon successful completion, and nonzero otherwise. - </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> + </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> The script has all responsibility to rename all the necessary data that is accessible in this posix method. This can mean different requirements for different backends. The tdbsam and smbpasswd backends will take care of the contents of their respective files, so the script is responsible only for changing the POSIX username, and @@ -5021,10 +5021,10 @@ rename user script (G) needs to change for other applications using the same directory. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>rename user script</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="reset on zero vc (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565083"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559102"></a> reset on zero vc (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565084"></a><a name="RESETONZEROVC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559103"></a><a name="RESETONZEROVC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean option controls whether an incoming session setup should kill other connections coming from the same IP. This matches the default Windows 2003 behaviour. @@ -5043,10 +5043,10 @@ reset on zero vc (G) </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>reset on zero vc</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="restrict anonymous (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565148"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559166"></a> restrict anonymous (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565149"></a><a name="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The setting of this parameter determines whether user and +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559167"></a><a name="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The setting of this parameter determines whether user and group list information is returned for an anonymous connection. and mirrors the effects of the </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -5064,21 +5064,21 @@ HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\ The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 1 is dubious, as user and group list information can be obtained using other means. - </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> + </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 2 is removed by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok = yes</a> on any share. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>restrict anonymous</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565232"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559250"></a> <a name="ROOT"></a>root -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565233"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root dir"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565265"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559251"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559283"></a> <a name="ROOTDIR"></a>root dir -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565266"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565296"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559284"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559314"></a> root directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565297"></a><a name="ROOTDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The server will <code class="literal">chroot()</code> (i.e. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559316"></a><a name="ROOTDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The server will <code class="literal">chroot()</code> (i.e. Change its root directory) to this directory on startup. This is not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries. @@ -5101,34 +5101,34 @@ root directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/homes/smb</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root postexec (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565420"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559438"></a> root postexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565421"></a><a name="ROOTPOSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559440"></a><a name="ROOTPOSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>postexec</code></em> parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for unmounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root postexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root preexec close (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565469"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559487"></a> root preexec close (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565470"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec close +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559488"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec close </code></em> parameter except that the command is run as root.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root preexec close</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="root preexec (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565517"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559536"></a> root preexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565518"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559537"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec</code></em> parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a connection is opened. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root preexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="security mask (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565566"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559584"></a> security mask (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565567"></a><a name="SECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559585"></a><a name="SECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits will be set when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box. </p><p> @@ -5147,10 +5147,10 @@ security mask (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>security mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0770</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="security (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565672"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559690"></a> security (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565673"></a><a name="SECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option affects how clients respond to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559691"></a><a name="SECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the most important settings in the <code class="filename"> smb.conf</code> file.</p><p>The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to protocol negotiations with <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide @@ -5189,19 +5189,19 @@ security (G) in share level security, <code class="literal">smbd</code> uses several techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf of the client.</p><p>A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given - client password is constructed using the following methods :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTONLY" target="_top">guest only</a> parameter is set, then all the other + client password is constructed using the following methods :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTONLY" target="_top">guest only</a> parameter is set, then all the other stages are missed and only the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a> username is checked. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Is a username is sent with the share connection + </p></li><li><p>Is a username is sent with the share connection request, then this username (after mapping - see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP" target="_top">username map</a>), is added as a potential username. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>If the client did a previous <span class="emphasis"><em>logon + </p></li><li><p>If the client did a previous <span class="emphasis"><em>logon </em></span> request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The name of the service the client requested is + </p></li><li><p>The name of the service the client requested is added as a potential username. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The NetBIOS name of the client is added to + </p></li><li><p>The NetBIOS name of the client is added to the list as a potential username. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Any users on the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USER" target="_top">user</a> list are added as potential usernames. + </p></li><li><p>Any users on the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USER" target="_top">user</a> list are added as potential usernames. </p></li></ul></div><p>If the <em class="parameter"><code>guest only</code></em> parameter is not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password. The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the @@ -5247,7 +5247,7 @@ security (G) server does not support them. However note that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid <code class="filename">smbpasswd</code> file to check users against. See the chapter about the User Database in the Samba HOWTO Collection for details on how to set this up. -</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This mode of operation has +</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This mode of operation has significant pitfalls since it is more vulnerable to man-in-the-middle attacks and server impersonation. In particular, this mode of operation can cause significant resource consuption on @@ -5255,7 +5255,7 @@ security (G) of the user's session. Furthermore, if this connection is lost, there is no way to reestablish it, and futher authentications to the Samba server may fail (from a single client, till it disconnects). - </p></div><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>From the client's point of + </p></div><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>From the client's point of view, <code class="literal">security = server</code> is the same as <code class="literal">security = user</code>. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does @@ -5274,10 +5274,10 @@ security (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>security</code></em> = <code class="literal">DOMAIN</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="server schannel (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566551"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560569"></a> server schannel (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566552"></a><a name="SERVERSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560570"></a><a name="SERVERSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel. <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL" target="_top">server schannel = no</a> does not offer the schannel, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL" target="_top">server schannel = auto</a> offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL" target="_top">server schannel = yes</a> denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel. This is only the case for Windows NT4 before SP4. @@ -5288,20 +5288,20 @@ server schannel (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server schannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="server signing (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566667"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560685"></a> server signing (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566668"></a><a name="SERVERSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB signing. Possible values +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560686"></a><a name="SERVERSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the client is allowed or required to use SMB signing. Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>mandatory</em></span> and <span class="emphasis"><em>disabled</em></span>. </p><p>When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced. When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server signing</code></em> = <code class="literal">Disabled</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="server string (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566728"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560746"></a> server string (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566729"></a><a name="SERVERSTRING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560747"></a><a name="SERVERSTRING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection in <code class="literal">net view</code>. It can be any string that you wish to show to your users.</p><p>It also sets what will appear in browse lists next to the machine name.</p><p>A <em class="parameter"><code>%v</code></em> will be replaced with the Samba @@ -5310,10 +5310,10 @@ server string (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server string</code></em> = <code class="literal">University of GNUs Samba Server</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="set directory (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566819"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560837"></a> set directory (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566820"></a><a name="SETDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560838"></a><a name="SETDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If <code class="literal">set directory = no</code>, then users of the service may not use the setdir command to change directory. </p><p> @@ -5322,10 +5322,10 @@ set directory (S) for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="set primary group script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566879"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560897"></a> set primary group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566880"></a><a name="SETPRIMARYGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560898"></a><a name="SETPRIMARYGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a primary group in addition to the auxiliary groups. This script sets the primary group in the unix userdatase when an administrator sets the primary group from the windows user @@ -5337,23 +5337,23 @@ set primary group script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set primary group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/usermod -g '%g' '%u'</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="set quota command (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566961"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560979"></a> set quota command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566962"></a><a name="SETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">set quota command</code> should only be used +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560980"></a><a name="SETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">set quota command</code> should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use.</p><p>This option is only available if Samba was configured with the argument <code class="literal">--with-sys-quotas</code> or on linux when <code class="literal">./configure --with-quotas</code> was used and a working quota api was found in the system. Most packages are configured with these options already.</p><p>This parameter should specify the path to a script that - can set quota for the specified arguments.</p><p>The specified script should take the following arguments:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>1 - quota type - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="circle"><li class="listitem"><p>1 - user quotas</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>2 - user default quotas (uid = -1)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>3 - group quotas</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>4 - group default quotas (gid = -1)</p></li></ul></div></li><li class="listitem"><p>2 - id (uid for user, gid for group, -1 if N/A)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>3 - quota state (0 = disable, 1 = enable, 2 = enable and enforce)</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>4 - block softlimit</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>5 - block hardlimit</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>6 - inode softlimit</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>7 - inode hardlimit</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>8(optional) - block size, defaults to 1024</p></li></ul></div><p>The script should output at least one line of data on success. And nothing on failure.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> + can set quota for the specified arguments.</p><p>The specified script should take the following arguments:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>1 - quota type + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="circle"><li><p>1 - user quotas</p></li><li><p>2 - user default quotas (uid = -1)</p></li><li><p>3 - group quotas</p></li><li><p>4 - group default quotas (gid = -1)</p></li></ul></div></li><li><p>2 - id (uid for user, gid for group, -1 if N/A)</p></li><li><p>3 - quota state (0 = disable, 1 = enable, 2 = enable and enforce)</p></li><li><p>4 - block softlimit</p></li><li><p>5 - block hardlimit</p></li><li><p>6 - inode softlimit</p></li><li><p>7 - inode hardlimit</p></li><li><p>8(optional) - block size, defaults to 1024</p></li></ul></div><p>The script should output at least one line of data on success. And nothing on failure.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/sbin/set_quota</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="share:fake_fscaps (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567124"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561142"></a> share:fake_fscaps (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567126"></a><a name="SHARE:FAKE_FSCAPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561144"></a><a name="SHARE:FAKE_FSCAPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is needed to support some special application that makes QFSINFO calls to check whether we set the SPARSE_FILES bit (0x40). If this bit is not set that particular application @@ -5363,10 +5363,10 @@ share:fake_fscaps (G) decimal values to specify the bitmask you need to fake. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>share:fake_fscaps</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="share modes (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567184"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561202"></a> share modes (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567185"></a><a name="SHAREMODES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This enables or disables the honoring of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561203"></a><a name="SHAREMODES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This enables or disables the honoring of the <em class="parameter"><code>share modes</code></em> during a file open. These modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access to a file.</p><p>This is a deprecated option from old versions of @@ -5378,20 +5378,20 @@ share modes (S) by default.</p><p>You should <span class="emphasis"><em>NEVER</em></span> turn this parameter off as many Windows applications will break if you do so.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>share modes</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="short preserve case (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567261"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561279"></a> short preserve case (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567262"></a><a name="SHORTPRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561280"></a><a name="SHORTPRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULTCASE" target="_top">default case</a>. This option can be use with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRESERVECASE" target="_top">preserve case = yes</a> to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowered. </p><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="#NAMEMANGLINGSECT" title="NAME MANGLING">NAME MANGLING</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>short preserve case</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="show add printer wizard (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567340"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561358"></a> show add printer wizard (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567341"></a><a name="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561359"></a><a name="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will appear on Samba hosts in the share listing. Normally this folder will contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW). However, it is @@ -5406,21 +5406,21 @@ show add printer wizard (G) icon will not be displayed.</p><p>Disabling the <em class="parameter"><code>show add printer wizard</code></em> parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server to fail. Thus the APW icon will never be displayed. -</p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This does not prevent the same user from having +</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This does not prevent the same user from having administrative privilege on an individual printer.</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>show add printer wizard</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="shutdown script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567423"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561441"></a> shutdown script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567424"></a><a name="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561442"></a><a name="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> that should start a shutdown procedure.</p><p>If the connected user posseses the <code class="constant">SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege</code>, - right, this command will be run as root.</p><p>The %z %t %r %f variables are expanded as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%z</code></em> will be substituted with the - shutdown message sent to the server.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%t</code></em> will be substituted with the + right, this command will be run as root.</p><p>The %z %t %r %f variables are expanded as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>%z</code></em> will be substituted with the + shutdown message sent to the server.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>%t</code></em> will be substituted with the number of seconds to wait before effectively starting the - shutdown procedure.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%r</code></em> will be substituted with the + shutdown procedure.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>%r</code></em> will be substituted with the switch <span class="emphasis"><em>-r</em></span>. It means reboot after shutdown - for NT.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>%f</code></em> will be substituted with the + for NT.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>%f</code></em> will be substituted with the switch <span class="emphasis"><em>-f</em></span>. It means force the shutdown even if applications do not respond for NT.</p></li></ul></div><p>Shutdown script example: </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -5437,10 +5437,10 @@ let "time++" </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="smb encrypt (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567577"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561595"></a> smb encrypt (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567578"></a><a name="SMBENCRYPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a new feature introduced with Samba 3.2 and above. It is an +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561596"></a><a name="SMBENCRYPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a new feature introduced with Samba 3.2 and above. It is an extension to the SMB/CIFS protocol negotiated as part of the UNIX extensions. SMB encryption uses the GSSAPI (SSPI on Windows) ability to encrypt and sign every request/response in a SMB protocol stream. When @@ -5468,10 +5468,10 @@ smb encrypt (S) When set to mandatory, SMB encryption is required and if set to disabled, SMB encryption can not be negotiated.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb encrypt</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="smb passwd file (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567683"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561701"></a> smb passwd file (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567684"></a><a name="SMBPASSWDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561702"></a><a name="SMBPASSWDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By default the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba.</p><p> An example of use is: </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -5479,15 +5479,15 @@ smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb passwd file</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/private/smbpasswd</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="smb ports (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567736"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561754"></a> smb ports (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567737"></a><a name="SMBPORTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb ports</code></em> = <code class="literal">445 139</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561755"></a><a name="SMBPORTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb ports</code></em> = <code class="literal">445 139</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="socket address (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567778"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561796"></a> socket address (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567779"></a><a name="SOCKETADDRESS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to control what +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561797"></a><a name="SOCKETADDRESS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to control what address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each with a different configuration.</p><p>Setting this option should never be necessary on usual Samba @@ -5496,10 +5496,10 @@ socket address (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket address</code></em> = <code class="literal">192.168.2.20</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="socket options (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567848"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561866"></a> socket options (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567849"></a><a name="SOCKETOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to set socket options +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561867"></a><a name="SOCKETOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to set socket options to be used when talking with the client.</p><p>Socket options are controls on the networking layer of the operating systems which allow the connection to be tuned.</p><p>This option will typically be used to tune your Samba server @@ -5515,7 +5515,7 @@ socket options (G) send the patch to <a class="ulink" href="mailto:samba-technical@samba.org" target="_top"> samba-technical@samba.org</a>.</p><p>Any of the supported socket options may be combined in any way you like, as long as your OS allows it.</p><p>This is the list of socket options currently settable - using this option:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>SO_KEEPALIVE</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_REUSEADDR</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_BROADCAST</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>TCP_NODELAY</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>IPTOS_LOWDELAY</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>IPTOS_THROUGHPUT</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_SNDBUF *</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_RCVBUF *</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_SNDLOWAT *</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>SO_RCVLOWAT *</p></li></ul></div><p>Those marked with a <span class="emphasis"><em>'*'</em></span> take an integer + using this option:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>SO_KEEPALIVE</p></li><li><p>SO_REUSEADDR</p></li><li><p>SO_BROADCAST</p></li><li><p>TCP_NODELAY</p></li><li><p>IPTOS_LOWDELAY</p></li><li><p>IPTOS_THROUGHPUT</p></li><li><p>SO_SNDBUF *</p></li><li><p>SO_RCVBUF *</p></li><li><p>SO_SNDLOWAT *</p></li><li><p>SO_RCVLOWAT *</p></li></ul></div><p>Those marked with a <span class="emphasis"><em>'*'</em></span> take an integer argument. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you don't specify 1 or 0.</p><p>To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION = VALUE @@ -5527,17 +5527,17 @@ socket options (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket options</code></em> = <code class="literal">IPTOS_LOWDELAY</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="stat cache (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568059"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562077"></a> stat cache (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568060"></a><a name="STATCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will use a cache in order to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562078"></a><a name="STATCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will use a cache in order to speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need to change this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>stat cache</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="state directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568110"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562128"></a> state directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568111"></a><a name="STATEDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Usually, most of the TDB files are stored in the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562129"></a><a name="STATEDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Usually, most of the TDB files are stored in the <em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em>. Since Samba 3.4.0, it is possible to differentiate between TDB files with persistent data and TDB files with non-persistent data using @@ -5549,10 +5549,10 @@ state directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>state directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/samba/locks/state</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="store dos attributes (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568196"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562214"></a> store dos attributes (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568197"></a><a name="STOREDOSATTRIBUTES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562215"></a><a name="STOREDOSATTRIBUTES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If this parameter is set Samba attempts to first read DOS attributes (SYSTEM, HIDDEN, ARCHIVE or READ-ONLY) from a filesystem extended attribute, before mapping DOS attributes to UNIX permission bits (such as occurs with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN" target="_top">map hidden</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPREADONLY" target="_top">map readonly</a>). When set, DOS @@ -5564,10 +5564,10 @@ store dos attributes (S) extended attributes to work, also extended attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>store dos attributes</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="strict allocate (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568318"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562335"></a> strict allocate (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568319"></a><a name="STRICTALLOCATE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls the handling of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562336"></a><a name="STRICTALLOCATE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls the handling of disk space allocation in the server. When this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real disk storage blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour @@ -5579,10 +5579,10 @@ strict allocate (S) out of quota messages on systems that are restricting the disk quota of users.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict allocate</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="strict locking (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568388"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562405"></a> strict locking (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568389"></a><a name="STRICTLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562406"></a><a name="STRICTLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is an enumerated type that controls the handling of file locking in the server. When this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist. This can be slow on some systems. @@ -5598,10 +5598,10 @@ strict locking (S) <code class="literal">strict locking = no</code> is acceptable. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict locking</code></em> = <code class="literal">Auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="strict sync (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568467"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562485"></a> strict sync (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568468"></a><a name="STRICTSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562486"></a><a name="STRICTSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing a sync to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that all outstanding data in @@ -5615,10 +5615,10 @@ strict sync (S) addition, this fixes many performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98 explorer shell file copies.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="svcctl list (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568532"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562550"></a> svcctl list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568533"></a><a name="SVCCTLLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of init scripts that smbd +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562551"></a><a name="SVCCTLLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of init scripts that smbd will use for starting and stopping Unix services via the Win32 ServiceControl API. This allows Windows administrators to utilize the MS Management Console plug-ins to manage a @@ -5631,10 +5631,10 @@ svcctl list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>svcctl list</code></em> = <code class="literal">cups postfix portmap httpd</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="sync always (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568618"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562635"></a> sync always (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568619"></a><a name="SYNCALWAYS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562636"></a><a name="SYNCALWAYS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always be written to stable storage before the write call returns. If this is <code class="constant">no</code> then the server will be guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can @@ -5645,19 +5645,19 @@ sync always (S) <code class="constant">yes</code> in order for this parameter to have any effect.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>sync always</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="syslog only (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568689"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562707"></a> syslog only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568690"></a><a name="SYSLOGONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562708"></a><a name="SYSLOGONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to the debug log files. There still will be some logging to log.[sn]mbd even if <span class="emphasis"><em>syslog only</em></span> is enabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>syslog only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="syslog (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568736"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562754"></a> syslog (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568738"></a><a name="SYSLOG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562756"></a><a name="SYSLOG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog <code class="constant">LOG_ERR</code>, debug level one maps onto <code class="constant">LOG_WARNING</code>, debug level two maps onto <code class="constant">LOG_NOTICE</code>, @@ -5668,10 +5668,10 @@ syslog (G) logging to log.[sn]mbd even if <span class="emphasis"><em>syslog only</em></span> is enabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>syslog</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="template homedir (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568807"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562825"></a> template homedir (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568808"></a><a name="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562826"></a><a name="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user. If the string <em class="parameter"><code>%D</code></em> is present it @@ -5679,31 +5679,31 @@ template homedir (G) string <em class="parameter"><code>%U</code></em> is present it is substituted with the user's Windows NT user name.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>template homedir</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home/%D/%U</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="template shell (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568873"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562891"></a> template shell (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568874"></a><a name="TEMPLATESHELL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562892"></a><a name="TEMPLATESHELL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon uses this - parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="time offset (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568912"></a> + parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562930"></a> time offset (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568913"></a><a name="TIMEOFFSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562931"></a><a name="TIMEOFFSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add to the normal GMT to local time conversion. This is useful if you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight saving time handling.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time offset</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time offset</code></em> = <code class="literal">60</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="time server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2568972"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562990"></a> time server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2568973"></a><a name="TIMESERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> advertises itself as a time server to Windows +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562991"></a><a name="TIMESERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> advertises itself as a time server to Windows clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time server</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="unix charset (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569022"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563040"></a> unix charset (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569023"></a><a name="UNIXCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the charset the unix machine +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563041"></a><a name="UNIXCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the charset the unix machine Samba runs on uses. Samba needs to know this in order to be able to convert text to the charsets other SMB clients use. </p><p>This is also the charset Samba will use when specifying arguments @@ -5712,20 +5712,23 @@ unix charset (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix charset</code></em> = <code class="literal">ASCII</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="unix extensions (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569088"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563106"></a> unix extensions (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569089"></a><a name="UNIXEXTENSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563107"></a><a name="UNIXEXTENSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba implements the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP. These extensions enable Samba to better serve UNIX CIFS clients by supporting features such as symbolic links, hard links, etc... These extensions require a similarly enabled client, and are of - no current use to Windows clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix extensions</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> + no current use to Windows clients.</p><p> + Note if this parameter is turned on, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDELINKS" target="_top">wide links</a> + parameter will automatically be disabled. + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix extensions</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="unix password sync (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569136"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563171"></a> unix password sync (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569137"></a><a name="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563172"></a><a name="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed. If this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> the program specified in the <em class="parameter"><code>passwd @@ -5734,10 +5737,10 @@ unix password sync (G) old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no access to the old password cleartext, only the new).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix password sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="update encrypted (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569197"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563232"></a> update encrypted (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569198"></a><a name="UPDATEENCRYPTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563233"></a><a name="UPDATEENCRYPTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter allows a user logging on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed) password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as they log on. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext password over the @@ -5755,10 +5758,10 @@ update encrypted (G) passwords. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>update encrypted</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="use client driver (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569315"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563350"></a> use client driver (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569316"></a><a name="USECLIENTDRIVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563351"></a><a name="USECLIENTDRIVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 clients. It has no effect on Windows 95/98/ME clients. When serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing a valid printer driver on the Samba host, the client will be required @@ -5783,10 +5786,10 @@ use client driver (S) on a print share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba server.</em></span></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use client driver</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="use mmap (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569396"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563431"></a> use mmap (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569397"></a><a name="USEMMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563432"></a><a name="USEMMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can depend on mmap working correctly on the running system. Samba requires a coherent mmap/read-write system memory cache. Currently only HPUX does not have such a coherent cache, and so this parameter is set to <code class="constant">no</code> by @@ -5795,10 +5798,10 @@ use mmap (G) the tdb internal code. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use mmap</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="username level (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569448"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563483"></a> username level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569449"></a><a name="USERNAMELEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563484"></a><a name="USERNAMELEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the @@ -5813,10 +5816,10 @@ username level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username level</code></em> = <code class="literal">5</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="username map script (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569530"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563565"></a> username map script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569531"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This script is a mutually exclusive alternative to the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563566"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This script is a mutually exclusive alternative to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP" target="_top">username map</a> parameter. This parameter specifies and external program or script that must accept a single command line option (the username transmitted in the authentication @@ -5827,10 +5830,10 @@ username map script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/samba/scripts/mapusers.sh</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="username map (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569607"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563642"></a> username map (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569608"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563643"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to specify a file containing a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server. This can be used for several purposes. The most common is to map usernames that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX box uses. The other is to map multiple users to a single username so that they @@ -5914,16 +5917,16 @@ username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # no username map</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="user"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569892"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563921"></a> <a name="USER"></a>user -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569893"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="users"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569924"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563922"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563953"></a> <a name="USERS"></a>users -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569925"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="username (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2569956"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563954"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563985"></a> username (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2569957"></a><a name="USERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563986"></a><a name="USERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against each username in turn (left to right).</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case @@ -5961,28 +5964,28 @@ username (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> = <code class="literal">fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare allow guests (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570126"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564155"></a> usershare allow guests (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570127"></a><a name="USERSHAREALLOWGUESTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether user defined shares are allowed +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564156"></a><a name="USERSHAREALLOWGUESTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether user defined shares are allowed to be accessed by non-authenticated users or not. It is the equivalent of allowing people who can create a share the option of setting <em class="parameter"><code>guest ok = yes</code></em> in a share definition. Due to its security sensitive nature, the default is set to off.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare allow guests</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare max shares (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570179"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564208"></a> usershare max shares (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570180"></a><a name="USERSHAREMAXSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of user defined shares +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564209"></a><a name="USERSHAREMAXSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of user defined shares that are allowed to be created by users belonging to the group owning the usershare directory. If set to zero (the default) user defined shares are ignored. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare max shares</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare owner only (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570224"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564253"></a> usershare owner only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570225"></a><a name="USERSHAREOWNERONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether the pathname exported by +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564254"></a><a name="USERSHAREOWNERONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether the pathname exported by a user defined shares must be owned by the user creating the user defined share or not. If set to True (the default) then smbd checks that the directory path being shared is owned by @@ -5992,10 +5995,10 @@ usershare owner only (G) regardless of who owns it. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare owner only</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare path (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570274"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564303"></a> usershare path (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570275"></a><a name="USERSHAREPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the absolute path of the directory on the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564304"></a><a name="USERSHAREPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the absolute path of the directory on the filesystem used to store the user defined share definition files. This directory must be owned by root, and have no access for other, and be writable only by the group owner. In addition the @@ -6016,10 +6019,10 @@ usershare path (G) In this case, only members of the group "power_users" can create user defined shares. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare path</code></em> = <code class="literal">NULL</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare prefix allow list (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570345"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564374"></a> usershare prefix allow list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570346"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXALLOWLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564375"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXALLOWLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames the root of which are allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions. If the pathname to be exported doesn't start with one of the strings in this list, the user defined share will not be allowed. This allows the Samba @@ -6034,10 +6037,10 @@ usershare prefix allow list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare prefix allow list</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home /data /space</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare prefix deny list (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570418"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564447"></a> usershare prefix deny list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570419"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXDENYLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564448"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXDENYLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames the root of which are NOT allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions. If the pathname exported starts with one of the strings in this list the user defined share will not be allowed. Any pathname not @@ -6053,10 +6056,10 @@ usershare prefix deny list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare prefix deny list</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc /dev /private</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="usershare template share (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570492"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564521"></a> usershare template share (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570493"></a><a name="USERSHARETEMPLATESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>User defined shares only have limited possible parameters +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564522"></a><a name="USERSHARETEMPLATESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>User defined shares only have limited possible parameters such as path, guest ok, etc. This parameter allows usershares to "cloned" from an existing share. If "usershare template share" is set to the name of an existing share, then all usershares @@ -6071,10 +6074,10 @@ usershare template share (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare template share</code></em> = <code class="literal">template_share</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="use sendfile (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570565"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564594"></a> use sendfile (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570566"></a><a name="USESENDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and the <code class="constant">sendfile()</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564595"></a><a name="USESENDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and the <code class="constant">sendfile()</code> system call is supported by the underlying operating system, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that are exclusively oplocked. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU's @@ -6083,10 +6086,10 @@ use sendfile (S) Windows 9x (using sendfile from Linux will cause these clients to fail). </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use sendfile</code></em> = <code class="literal">false</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="use spnego (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570623"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564652"></a> use spnego (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570624"></a><a name="USESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This variable controls controls whether samba will try +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564653"></a><a name="USESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This variable controls controls whether samba will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism. </p><p> @@ -6094,10 +6097,10 @@ use spnego (G) implementation, there is no reason this should ever be disabled.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use spnego</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="utmp directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570672"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564701"></a> utmp directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570673"></a><a name="UTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only available if Samba has +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564702"></a><a name="UTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal"> --with-utmp</code>. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that @@ -6109,10 +6112,10 @@ utmp directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>utmp directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/utmp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="utmp (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570750"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564779"></a> utmp (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570751"></a><a name="UTMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564780"></a><a name="UTMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal">--with-utmp</code>. If set to <code class="constant">yes</code> then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records @@ -6124,10 +6127,10 @@ utmp (G) to find this number. This may impede performance on large installations. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>utmp</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="valid users (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570813"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564842"></a> valid users (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570814"></a><a name="VALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564843"></a><a name="VALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&' are interpreted using the same rules as described in the <em class="parameter"><code>invalid users</code></em> parameter. @@ -6143,10 +6146,10 @@ valid users (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>valid users</code></em> = <code class="literal">greg, @pcusers</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="-valid (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570904"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564933"></a> -valid (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570905"></a><a name="-VALID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter indicates whether a share is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564934"></a><a name="-VALID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter indicates whether a share is valid and thus can be used. When this parameter is set to false, the share will be in no way visible nor accessible. </p><p> @@ -6155,10 +6158,10 @@ valid users (S) Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>-valid</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="veto files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2570954"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564983"></a> veto files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2570955"></a><a name="VETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564984"></a><a name="VETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible. Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards. @@ -6189,10 +6192,10 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>veto files</code></em> = <code class="literal">No files or directories are vetoed.</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="veto oplock files (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571073"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565102"></a> veto oplock files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571074"></a><a name="VETOOPLOCKFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565103"></a><a name="VETOOPLOCKFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is only valid when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a> parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that @@ -6213,42 +6216,47 @@ veto oplock files = /.*SEM/ </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>veto oplock files</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # No files are vetoed for oplock grants</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="vfs object"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571166"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565195"></a> <a name="VFSOBJECT"></a>vfs object -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571167"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#VFSOBJECTS">vfs objects</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="vfs objects (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571198"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565196"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#VFSOBJECTS">vfs objects</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565227"></a> vfs objects (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571199"></a><a name="VFSOBJECTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the backend names which +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565228"></a><a name="VFSOBJECTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the backend names which are used for Samba VFS I/O operations. By default, normal disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded with one or more VFS objects. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>vfs objects</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>vfs objects</code></em> = <code class="literal">extd_audit recycle</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="volume (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571258"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565287"></a> volume (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571259"></a><a name="VOLUME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the volume label +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565288"></a><a name="VOLUME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the volume label returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a particular volume label.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>volume</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # the name of the share</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wide links (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571301"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565330"></a> wide links (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571302"></a><a name="WIDELINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not links +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565332"></a><a name="WIDELINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only - to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported.</p><p>Note that setting this parameter can have a negative - effect on your server performance due to the extra system calls - that Samba has to do in order to perform the link checks.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wide links</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> + to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported.</p><p>Note: Turning this parameter on when UNIX extensions are enabled + will allow UNIX clients to create symbolic links on the share that + can point to files or directories outside restricted path exported + by the share definition. This can cause access to areas outside of + the share. Due to this problem, this parameter will be automatically + disabled (with a message in the log file) if the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXEXTENSIONS" target="_top">unix extensions</a> option is on. + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wide links</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind cache time (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571354"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565399"></a> winbind cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571355"></a><a name="WINBINDCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565400"></a><a name="WINBINDCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon will cache user and group information before querying a Windows NT server again.</p><p> @@ -6256,36 +6264,36 @@ winbind cache time (G) evaluated in real time unless the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDOFFLINELOGON" target="_top">winbind offline logon</a> option has been enabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">300</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind enum groups (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571425"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565470"></a> winbind enum groups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571426"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be necessary to suppress +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565471"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of groups through the <code class="literal">setgrent()</code>, <code class="literal">getgrent()</code> and <code class="literal">endgrent()</code> group of system calls. If the <em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum groups</code></em> parameter is <code class="constant">no</code>, calls to the <code class="literal">getgrent()</code> system - call will not return any data. </p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> + call will not return any data. </p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind enum users (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571516"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565560"></a> winbind enum users (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571517"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565561"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the <code class="literal">setpwent()</code>, <code class="literal">getpwent()</code> and <code class="literal">endpwent()</code> group of system calls. If the <em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum users</code></em> parameter is <code class="constant">no</code>, calls to the <code class="literal">getpwent</code> system call - will not return any data. </p><div class="warning" title="Warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>Turning off user + will not return any data. </p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>Turning off user enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly. For example, the finger program relies on having access to the full user list when searching for matching usernames. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum users</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind expand groups (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571609"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565654"></a> winbind expand groups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571610"></a><a name="WINBINDEXPANDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum depth that winbindd +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565655"></a><a name="WINBINDEXPANDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum depth that winbindd will traverse when flattening nested group memberships of Windows domain groups. This is different from the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS" target="_top">winbind nested groups</a> option @@ -6297,10 +6305,10 @@ winbind expand groups (G) must perform the group unrolling and will be unable to answer incoming NSS or authentication requests during this time.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind expand groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind nested groups (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571678"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565722"></a> winbind nested groups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571679"></a><a name="WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to yes, this parameter activates the support for nested +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565723"></a><a name="WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to yes, this parameter activates the support for nested groups. Nested groups are also called local groups or aliases. They work like their counterparts in Windows: Nested groups are defined locally on any machine (they are shared @@ -6308,10 +6316,10 @@ winbind nested groups (G) global groups from any trusted SAM. To be able to use nested groups, you need to run nss_winbind.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind nested groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind normalize names (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571736"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565773"></a> winbind normalize names (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571738"></a><a name="WINBINDNORMALIZENAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether winbindd will replace +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565774"></a><a name="WINBINDNORMALIZENAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether winbindd will replace whitespace in user and group names with an underscore (_) character. For example, whether the name "Space Kadet" should be replaced with the string "space_kadet". @@ -6325,23 +6333,23 @@ winbind normalize names (G) version. Please refer to the manpage for the configured idmap and nss_info plugin for the specifics on how to configure name aliasing for a specific configuration. Name aliasing takes - precendence (and is mutually exclusive) over the whitespace + precedence (and is mutually exclusive) over the whitespace replacement mechanism discussed previsouly. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind normalize names</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind normalize names</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind nss info (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571814"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565850"></a> winbind nss info (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571815"></a><a name="WINBINDNSSINFO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control how Winbind retrieves Name +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565852"></a><a name="WINBINDNSSINFO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control how Winbind retrieves Name Service Information to construct a user's home directory and login shell. Currently the following settings are available: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>template</code></em> + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>template</code></em> - The default, using the parameters of <em class="parameter"><code>template shell</code></em> and <em class="parameter"><code>template homedir</code></em>) - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code><sfu | rfc2307 ></code></em> + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code><sfu | rfc2307 ></code></em> - When Samba is running in security = ads and your Active Directory Domain Controller does support the Microsoft "Services for Unix" (SFU) LDAP schema, winbind can retrieve the login shell and the home @@ -6356,10 +6364,10 @@ winbind nss info (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind nss info</code></em> = <code class="literal">template sfu</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind offline logon (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2571934"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565970"></a> winbind offline logon (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2571935"></a><a name="WINBINDOFFLINELOGON"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565971"></a><a name="WINBINDOFFLINELOGON"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should allow to login with the <em class="parameter"><code>pam_winbind</code></em> module using Cached Credentials. If enabled, winbindd will store user credentials from successful logins encrypted in a local cache. @@ -6367,37 +6375,37 @@ winbind offline logon (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind offline logon</code></em> = <code class="literal">true</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind reconnect delay (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572003"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566039"></a> winbind reconnect delay (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572004"></a><a name="WINBINDRECONNECTDELAY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566040"></a><a name="WINBINDRECONNECTDELAY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon will wait between attempts to contact a Domain controller for a domain that is determined to be down or not contactable.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind reconnect delay</code></em> = <code class="literal">30</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind refresh tickets (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572056"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566092"></a> winbind refresh tickets (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572057"></a><a name="WINBINDREFRESHTICKETS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should refresh Kerberos Tickets +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566093"></a><a name="WINBINDREFRESHTICKETS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should refresh Kerberos Tickets retrieved using the <em class="parameter"><code>pam_winbind</code></em> module. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind refresh tickets</code></em> = <code class="literal">false</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind refresh tickets</code></em> = <code class="literal">true</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind rpc only (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572123"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566159"></a> winbind rpc only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572124"></a><a name="WINBINDRPCONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566160"></a><a name="WINBINDRPCONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Setting this parameter to <code class="literal">yes</code> forces winbindd to use RPC instead of LDAP to retrieve information from Domain Controllers. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind rpc only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind separator (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572172"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566208"></a> winbind separator (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572173"></a><a name="WINBINDSEPARATOR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an admin to define the character +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566209"></a><a name="WINBINDSEPARATOR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an admin to define the character used when listing a username of the form of <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN </code></em>\<em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em>. This parameter is only applicable when using the <code class="filename">pam_winbind.so</code> @@ -6408,10 +6416,10 @@ winbind separator (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind separator</code></em> = <code class="literal">+</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind trusted domains only (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572259"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566296"></a> winbind trusted domains only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572260"></a><a name="WINBINDTRUSTEDDOMAINSONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566297"></a><a name="WINBINDTRUSTEDDOMAINSONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is designed to allow Samba servers that are members of a Samba controlled domain to use UNIX accounts distributed via NIS, rsync, or LDAP as the uid's for winbindd users in the hosts primary domain. @@ -6422,10 +6430,10 @@ winbind trusted domains only (G) Refer to the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_nss.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_nss</span>(8)</span></a> man page for more information. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind trusted domains only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="winbind use default domain (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572326"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566363"></a> winbind use default domain (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572328"></a><a name="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566364"></a><a name="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon should operate on users without domain component in their username. Users without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd server's own @@ -6435,48 +6443,48 @@ winbind use default domain (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind use default domain</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wins hook (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572399"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566435"></a> wins hook (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572400"></a><a name="WINSHOOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba is running as a WINS server this +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566436"></a><a name="WINSHOOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba is running as a WINS server this allows you to call an external program for all changes to the WINS database. The primary use for this option is to allow the dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as dynamic DNS.</p><p>The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script - or executable that will be called as follows:</p><p><code class="literal">wins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list</code></p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>The first argument is the operation and is + or executable that will be called as follows:</p><p><code class="literal">wins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list</code></p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>The first argument is the operation and is one of "add", "delete", or "refresh". In most cases the operation can be ignored as the rest of the parameters provide sufficient information. Note that "refresh" may sometimes be called when the name has not previously been added, in that - case it should be treated as an add.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The second argument is the NetBIOS name. If the + case it should be treated as an add.</p></li><li><p>The second argument is the NetBIOS name. If the name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called. Legal names contain only letters, digits, hyphens, underscores - and periods.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The third argument is the NetBIOS name - type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) - for the name in seconds.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP + and periods.</p></li><li><p>The third argument is the NetBIOS name + type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number. </p></li><li><p>The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) + for the name in seconds.</p></li><li><p>The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP addresses currently registered for that name. If this list is empty then the name should be deleted.</p></li></ul></div><p>An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update program <code class="literal">nsupdate</code> is provided in the examples - directory of the Samba source code. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wins proxy (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572506"></a> + directory of the Samba source code. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566542"></a> wins proxy (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572507"></a><a name="WINSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will respond to broadcast name +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566543"></a><a name="WINSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will respond to broadcast name queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to set this to <code class="constant">yes</code> for some older clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wins server (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572560"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566597"></a> wins server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572562"></a><a name="WINSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566598"></a><a name="WINSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP address for preference) of the WINS server that <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> should register with. If you have a WINS server on your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</p><p>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a multi-subnetted network.</p><p>If you want to work in multiple namespaces, you can give every wins server a 'tag'. For each tag, only one (working) server will be queried for a name. The tag should be separated from the ip address by a colon. - </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>You need to set up Samba to point + </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>You need to set up Samba to point to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet browsing to work correctly.</p></div><p>See the chapter in the Samba3-HOWTO on Network Browsing.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins server</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> @@ -6488,19 +6496,19 @@ wins server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins server</code></em> = <code class="literal">192.9.200.1 192.168.2.61</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wins support (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572671"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566707"></a> wins support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572672"></a><a name="WINSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls if the <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566708"></a><a name="WINSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls if the <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should not set this to <code class="constant">yes</code> unless you have a multi-subnetted network and you wish a particular <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to be your WINS server. Note that you should <span class="emphasis"><em>NEVER</em></span> set this to <code class="constant">yes</code> on more than one machine in your network.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="workgroup (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572740"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566776"></a> workgroup (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572741"></a><a name="WORKGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what workgroup your server will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566778"></a><a name="WORKGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter also controls the Domain name used with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = domain</a> @@ -6508,18 +6516,18 @@ workgroup (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>workgroup</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYGROUP</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="writable"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572812"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566848"></a> <a name="WRITABLE"></a>writable -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572813"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#WRITEABLE">writeable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="writeable (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572843"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566849"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#WRITEABLE">writeable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566880"></a> writeable (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572844"></a><a name="WRITEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Inverted synonym for <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>writeable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566881"></a><a name="WRITEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Inverted synonym for <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>writeable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="write cache size (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572895"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2566931"></a> write cache size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572896"></a><a name="WRITECACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2566932"></a><a name="WRITECACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file (it does <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> do this for non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request @@ -6537,10 +6545,10 @@ write cache size (S) </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">262144 # for a 256k cache size per file</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="write list (S)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2572979"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567015"></a> write list (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2572980"></a><a name="WRITELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567016"></a><a name="WRITELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be given write access, no matter what the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a> option is set to. The list can @@ -6555,17 +6563,17 @@ write list (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write list</code></em> = <code class="literal">admin, root, @staff</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="write raw (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2573072"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567108"></a> write raw (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2573073"></a><a name="WRITERAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567109"></a><a name="WRITERAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients. You should never need to change this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write raw</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" title="wtmp directory (G)"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2573116"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2567152"></a> wtmp directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2573117"></a><a name="WTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2567153"></a><a name="WTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal"> --with-utmp</code>. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the wtmp or wtmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server. The difference with the utmp directory is the fact @@ -6577,7 +6585,7 @@ wtmp directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wtmp directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/log/wtmp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="WARNINGS"><a name="id2573200"></a><h2>WARNINGS</h2><p> +</p></dd></dl></div></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2567236"></a><h2>WARNINGS</h2><p> Although the configuration file permits service names to contain spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a problem - but be aware of the possibility. </p><p> @@ -6590,8 +6598,8 @@ wtmp directory (G) for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care when designing these sections. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool directories are correct. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2573250"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2573260"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> - <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmblookup.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmblookup</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testprns.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testprns</span>(1)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2573340"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2567286"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2567297"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> + <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmblookup.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmblookup</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testprns.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testprns</span>(1)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2567376"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. </p><p> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcacls.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcacls.1.html index 710fb3935d..54fe6c0eb3 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcacls.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcacls.1.html @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbcacls</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbcacls"><a name="smbcacls.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbcacls — Set or get ACLs on an NT file or directory names</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbcacls</code> {//server/share} {filename} [-D acls] [-M acls] [-a acls] [-S acls] [-C name] [-G name] [--numeric] [-t] [-U username] [-h] [-d]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489364"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">smbcacls</code> program manipulates NT Access Control - Lists (ACLs) on SMB file shares. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489515"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p>The following options are available to the <code class="literal">smbcacls</code> program. +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbcacls</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbcacls.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbcacls — Set or get ACLs on an NT file or directory names</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbcacls</code> {//server/share} {filename} [-D acls] [-M acls] [-a acls] [-S acls] [-C name] [-G name] [--numeric] [-t] [-U username] [-h] [-d]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483382"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">smbcacls</code> program manipulates NT Access Control + Lists (ACLs) on SMB file shares. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483531"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p>The following options are available to the <code class="literal">smbcacls</code> program. The format of ACLs is described in the section ACL FORMAT </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-a acls</span></dt><dd><p>Add the ACLs specified to the ACL list. Existing access control entries are unchanged. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-M acls</span></dt><dd><p>Modify the mask value (permissions) for the ACLs specified on the command line. An error will be printed for each @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-l|--log-basename=logdirectory</span></dt><dd><p>Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension <code class="constant">".progname"</code> will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="ACL FORMAT"><a name="id2487580"></a><h2>ACL FORMAT</h2><p>The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481600"></a><h2>ACL FORMAT</h2><p>The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by either commas or newlines. An ACL entry is one of the following: </p><pre class="programlisting"> REVISION:<revision number> OWNER:<sid or name> @@ -70,20 +70,20 @@ ACL:<sid or name>:<type>/<flags>/<mask> resides. The type, flags and mask values determine the type of access granted to the SID. </p><p>The type can be either ALLOWED or DENIED to allow/deny access to the SID. The flags values are generally zero for file ACLs and - either 9 or 2 for directory ACLs. Some common flags are: </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_OBJECT_INHERIT 0x1</code></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_CONTAINER_INHERIT 0x2</code></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT 0x4</code></p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_INHERIT_ONLY 0x8</code></p></li></ul></div><p>At present flags can only be specified as decimal or + either 9 or 2 for directory ACLs. Some common flags are: </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="constant">#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_OBJECT_INHERIT 0x1</code></p></li><li><p><code class="constant">#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_CONTAINER_INHERIT 0x2</code></p></li><li><p><code class="constant">#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT 0x4</code></p></li><li><p><code class="constant">#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_INHERIT_ONLY 0x8</code></p></li></ul></div><p>At present flags can only be specified as decimal or hexadecimal values.</p><p>The mask is a value which expresses the access right granted to the SID. It can be given as a decimal or hexadecimal value, or by using one of the following text strings which map to the NT - file permissions of the same name. </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>R</em></span> - Allow read access </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>W</em></span> - Allow write access</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>X</em></span> - Execute permission on the object</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>D</em></span> - Delete the object</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>P</em></span> - Change permissions</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>O</em></span> - Take ownership</p></li></ul></div><p>The following combined permissions can be specified:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>READ</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RX' - permissions</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>CHANGE</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RXWD' permissions - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>FULL</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RWXDPO' - permissions</p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXIT STATUS"><a name="id2487744"></a><h2>EXIT STATUS</h2><p>The <code class="literal">smbcacls</code> program sets the exit status + file permissions of the same name. </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>R</em></span> - Allow read access </p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>W</em></span> - Allow write access</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>X</em></span> - Execute permission on the object</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>D</em></span> - Delete the object</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>P</em></span> - Change permissions</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>O</em></span> - Take ownership</p></li></ul></div><p>The following combined permissions can be specified:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>READ</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RX' + permissions</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>CHANGE</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RXWD' permissions + </p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>FULL</em></span> - Equivalent to 'RWXDPO' + permissions</p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481764"></a><h2>EXIT STATUS</h2><p>The <code class="literal">smbcacls</code> program sets the exit status depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed. The exit status may be one of the following values. </p><p>If the operation succeeded, smbcacls returns and exit status of 0. If <code class="literal">smbcacls</code> couldn't connect to the specified server, or there was an error getting or setting the ACLs, an exit status of 1 is returned. If there was an error parsing any command line - arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487777"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487788"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481797"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481808"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p><code class="literal">smbcacls</code> was written by Andrew Tridgell diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbclient.1.html index cd4dfaae93..d278db2534 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbclient.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbclient.1.html @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbclient</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbclient"><a name="smbclient.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbclient — ftp-like client to access SMB/CIFS resources - on servers</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbclient</code> [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-e] [-L <netbios name>] [-U username] [-I destinationIP] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-g] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-k] [-P] [-c <command>]</p></div><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbclient</code> {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-e] [-D Directory] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-g] [-l log-basename] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan] [-k]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489738"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbclient</code> is a client that can +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbclient</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbclient.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbclient — ftp-like client to access SMB/CIFS resources + on servers</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbclient</code> [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-e] [-L <netbios name>] [-U username] [-I destinationIP] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-g] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-k] [-P] [-c <command>]</p></div><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbclient</code> {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-e] [-D Directory] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-g] [-l log-basename] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan] [-k]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483754"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbclient</code> is a client that can 'talk' to an SMB/CIFS server. It offers an interface similar to that of the ftp program (see <a class="citerefentry" href="ftp.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">ftp</span>(1)</span></a>). Operations include things like getting files from the server to the local machine, putting files from the local machine to the server, retrieving directory information from the server - and so on. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489777"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">servicename</span></dt><dd><p>servicename is the name of the service + and so on. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483794"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">servicename</span></dt><dd><p>servicename is the name of the service you want to use on the server. A service name takes the form <code class="filename">//server/service</code> where <em class="parameter"><code>server </code></em> is the NetBIOS name of the SMB/CIFS server @@ -40,21 +40,21 @@ suite to determine what naming services and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space-separated string of different name resolution options.</p><p>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They - cause names to be resolved as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">lmhosts</code>: Lookup an IP + cause names to be resolved as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="constant">lmhosts</code>: Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the <a class="citerefentry" href="lmhosts.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">lmhosts</span>(5)</span></a> for details) then - any name type matches for lookup.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">host</code>: Do a standard host + any name type matches for lookup.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">host</code>: Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system <code class="filename">/etc/hosts </code>, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution is operating system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the <code class="filename">/etc/nsswitch.conf</code> file). Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise - it is ignored.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">wins</code>: Query a name with + it is ignored.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">wins</code>: Query a name with the IP address listed in the <em class="parameter"><code>wins server</code></em> parameter. If no WINS server has - been specified this method will be ignored.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">bcast</code>: Do a broadcast on + been specified this method will be ignored.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">bcast</code>: Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the <em class="parameter"><code>interfaces</code></em> parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution @@ -161,6 +161,8 @@ option is also defined the password on the command line will be silently ingnored and no password will be used.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-k|--kerberos</span></dt><dd><p> Try to authenticate with kerberos. Only useful in an Active Directory environment. +</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-C|--use-ccache</span></dt><dd><p> +Try to use the credentials cached by winbind. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-A|--authentication-file=filename</span></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to specify a file from which to read the username and password used in the connection. The format of the file is @@ -204,48 +206,48 @@ the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> manual page for the list of valid options. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-T tar options</span></dt><dd><p>smbclient may be used to create <code class="literal">tar(1) </code> compatible backups of all the files on an SMB/CIFS share. The secondary tar flags that can be given to this option - are : </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>c</code></em> - Create a tar file on UNIX. + are : </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>c</code></em> - Create a tar file on UNIX. Must be followed by the name of a tar file, tape device or "-" for standard output. If using standard output you must turn the log level to its lowest value -d0 to avoid corrupting your tar file. This flag is mutually exclusive with the - <em class="parameter"><code>x</code></em> flag. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>x</code></em> - Extract (restore) a local + <em class="parameter"><code>x</code></em> flag. </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>x</code></em> - Extract (restore) a local tar file back to a share. Unless the -D option is given, the tar files will be restored from the top level of the share. Must be followed by the name of the tar file, device or "-" for standard input. Mutually exclusive with the <em class="parameter"><code>c</code></em> flag. Restored files have their creation times (mtime) set to the date saved in the tar file. Directories currently do not get - their creation dates restored properly. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>I</code></em> - Include files and directories. + their creation dates restored properly. </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>I</code></em> - Include files and directories. Is the default behavior when filenames are specified above. Causes files to be included in an extract or create (and therefore everything else to be excluded). See example below. Filename globbing - works in one of two ways. See <em class="parameter"><code>r</code></em> below. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>X</code></em> - Exclude files and directories. + works in one of two ways. See <em class="parameter"><code>r</code></em> below. </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>X</code></em> - Exclude files and directories. Causes files to be excluded from an extract or create. See example below. Filename globbing works in one of two ways now. - See <em class="parameter"><code>r</code></em> below. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>F</code></em> - File containing a list of files and directories. + See <em class="parameter"><code>r</code></em> below. </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>F</code></em> - File containing a list of files and directories. The <em class="parameter"><code>F</code></em> causes the name following the tarfile to create to be read as a filename that contains a list of files and directories to be included in an extract or create (and therefore everything else to be excluded). See example below. Filename globbing works in one of two ways. See <em class="parameter"><code>r</code></em> below. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>b</code></em> - Blocksize. Must be followed + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>b</code></em> - Blocksize. Must be followed by a valid (greater than zero) blocksize. Causes tar file to be written out in blocksize*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>g</code></em> - Incremental. Only back up + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>g</code></em> - Incremental. Only back up files that have the archive bit set. Useful only with the - <em class="parameter"><code>c</code></em> flag. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>q</code></em> - Quiet. Keeps tar from printing + <em class="parameter"><code>c</code></em> flag. </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>q</code></em> - Quiet. Keeps tar from printing diagnostics as it works. This is the same as tarmode quiet. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>r</code></em> - Regular expression include + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>r</code></em> - Regular expression include or exclude. Uses regular expression matching for excluding or excluding files if compiled with HAVE_REGEX_H. However this mode can be very slow. If not compiled with HAVE_REGEX_H, does a limited wildcard match on '*' and '?'. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>N</code></em> - Newer than. Must be followed + </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>N</code></em> - Newer than. Must be followed by the name of a file whose date is compared against files found on the share during a create. Only files newer than the file specified are backed up to the tar file. Useful only with the - <em class="parameter"><code>c</code></em> flag. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><em class="parameter"><code>a</code></em> - Set archive bit. Causes the + <em class="parameter"><code>c</code></em> flag. </p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>a</code></em> - Set archive bit. Causes the archive bit to be reset when a file is backed up. Useful with the <em class="parameter"><code>g</code></em> and <em class="parameter"><code>c</code></em> flags. </p></li></ul></div><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Tar Long File Names</em></span></p><p><code class="literal">smbclient</code>'s tar option now supports long @@ -270,7 +272,7 @@ options. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-T tar options</span></dt><dd><p>smbcli only of any use with the tar -T option. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-c command string</span></dt><dd><p>command string is a semicolon-separated list of commands to be executed instead of prompting from stdin. <em class="parameter"><code> -N</code></em> is implied by <em class="parameter"><code>-c</code></em>.</p><p>This is particularly useful in scripts and for printing stdin - to the server, e.g. <code class="literal">-c 'print -'</code>. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPERATIONS"><a name="id2539287"></a><h2>OPERATIONS</h2><p>Once the client is running, the user is presented with + to the server, e.g. <code class="literal">-c 'print -'</code>. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2533317"></a><h2>OPERATIONS</h2><p>Once the client is running, the user is presented with a prompt : </p><p><code class="prompt">smb:\> </code></p><p>The backslash ("\\") indicates the current working directory on the server, and will change if the current working directory is changed. </p><p>The prompt indicates that the client is ready and waiting to @@ -468,14 +470,14 @@ options. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-T tar options</span></dt><dd><p>smbcli </p></dd><dt><span class="term">vuid <number></span></dt><dd><p>Changes the currently used vuid in the protocol to the given arbitrary number. Without an argument prints out the current vuid being used. Used for internal Samba testing purposes. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="NOTES"><a name="id2487394"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>Some servers are fussy about the case of supplied usernames, + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2534408"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>Some servers are fussy about the case of supplied usernames, passwords, share names (AKA service names) and machine names. If you fail to connect try giving all parameters in uppercase. </p><p>It is often necessary to use the -n option when connecting to some types of servers. For example OS/2 LanManager insists on a valid NetBIOS name being used, so you need to supply a valid name that would be known to the server.</p><p>smbclient supports long file names where the server - supports the LANMAN2 protocol or above. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"><a name="id2487420"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2><p>The variable <code class="envar">USER</code> may contain the + supports the LANMAN2 protocol or above. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2534433"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2><p>The variable <code class="envar">USER</code> may contain the username of the person using the client. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords.</p><p>The variable <code class="envar">PASSWD</code> may contain @@ -485,7 +487,7 @@ options. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-T tar options</span></dt><dd><p>smbcli the path, executed with system(), which the client should connect to instead of connecting to a server. This functionality is primarily intended as a development aid, and works best when using a LMHOSTS - file</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="INSTALLATION"><a name="id2540580"></a><h2>INSTALLATION</h2><p>The location of the client program is a matter for + file</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2534469"></a><h2>INSTALLATION</h2><p>The location of the client program is a matter for individual system administrators. The following are thus suggestions only. </p><p>It is recommended that the smbclient software be installed in the <code class="filename">/usr/local/samba/bin/</code> or <code class="filename"> @@ -496,11 +498,11 @@ options. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-T tar options</span></dt><dd><p>smbcli and writeable only by the user. </p><p>To test the client, you will need to know the name of a running SMB/CIFS server. It is possible to run <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> as an ordinary user - running that server as a daemon on a user-accessible port (typically any port number over 1024) - would provide a suitable test server. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="DIAGNOSTICS"><a name="id2540633"></a><h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2><p>Most diagnostics issued by the client are logged in a + would provide a suitable test server. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2534522"></a><h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2><p>Most diagnostics issued by the client are logged in a specified log file. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line. </p><p>The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used by the client. If you have problems, - set the debug level to 3 and peruse the log files. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2540652"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.2 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2540662"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + set the debug level to 3 and peruse the log files. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2534540"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.2 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2534551"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html index 022efbef03..6317baeb91 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcontrol.1.html @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbcontrol</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbcontrol"><a name="smbcontrol.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbcontrol — send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbcontrol</code> [-i] [-s]</p></div><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbcontrol</code> [destination] [message-type] [parameter]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489314"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbcontrol</code> is a very small program, which - sends messages to a <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, a <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, or a <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon running on the system.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489364"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbcontrol</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbcontrol.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbcontrol — send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbcontrol</code> [-i] [-s]</p></div><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbcontrol</code> [destination] [message-type] [parameter]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483336"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbcontrol</code> is a very small program, which + sends messages to a <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, a <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, or a <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon running on the system.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483387"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-s|--configfile <configuration file></span></dt><dd><p>The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server. The information in this file includes server-specific @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-i</span></dt><dd><p>Run interactiv <code class="filename">winbindd.pid</code> file.</p><p>If a single process ID is given, the message is sent to only that process.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">message-type</span></dt><dd><p>Type of message to send. See the section <code class="constant">MESSAGE-TYPES</code> for details. - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">parameters</span></dt><dd><p>any parameters required for the message-type</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="MESSAGE-TYPES"><a name="id2489674"></a><h2>MESSAGE-TYPES</h2><p>Available message types are:</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">close-share</span></dt><dd><p>Order smbd to close the client + </p></dd><dt><span class="term">parameters</span></dt><dd><p>any parameters required for the message-type</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483690"></a><h2>MESSAGE-TYPES</h2><p>Available message types are:</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">close-share</span></dt><dd><p>Order smbd to close the client connections to the named share. Note that this doesn't affect client connections to any other shares. This message-type takes an argument of the share name for which client connections will be closed, or the @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-i</span></dt><dd><p>Run interactiv Note that this message only sends notification that an event has occured. It doesn't actually cause the event to happen. - </p><p>This message can only be sent to <code class="constant">smbd</code>. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">samsync</span></dt><dd><p>Order smbd to synchronise sam database from PDC (being BDC). Can only be sent to <code class="constant">smbd</code>. </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Not working at the moment</p></div></dd><dt><span class="term">samrepl</span></dt><dd><p>Send sam replication message, with specified serial. Can only be sent to <code class="constant">smbd</code>. Should not be used manually.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dmalloc-mark</span></dt><dd><p>Set a mark for dmalloc. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">dmalloc-log-changed</span></dt><dd><p> + </p><p>This message can only be sent to <code class="constant">smbd</code>. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">samsync</span></dt><dd><p>Order smbd to synchronise sam database from PDC (being BDC). Can only be sent to <code class="constant">smbd</code>. </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Not working at the moment</p></div></dd><dt><span class="term">samrepl</span></dt><dd><p>Send sam replication message, with specified serial. Can only be sent to <code class="constant">smbd</code>. Should not be used manually.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dmalloc-mark</span></dt><dd><p>Set a mark for dmalloc. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">dmalloc-log-changed</span></dt><dd><p> Dump the pointers that have changed since the mark set by dmalloc-mark. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">shutdown</span></dt><dd><p>Shut down specified daemon. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">pool-usage</span></dt><dd><p>Print a human-readable description of all talloc(pool) memory usage by the specified daemon/process. Available @@ -65,8 +65,8 @@ compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-i</span></dt><dd><p>Run interactiv to update their local version of the driver. Can only be sent to smbd.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">reload-config</span></dt><dd><p>Force daemon to reload smb.conf configuration file. Can be sent to <code class="constant">smbd</code>, <code class="constant">nmbd</code>, or <code class="constant">winbindd</code>. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487682"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2487694"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487718"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481702"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481713"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481738"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcquotas.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcquotas.1.html index ce991e5765..2a2666adce 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcquotas.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbcquotas.1.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbcquotas</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbcquotas"><a name="smbcquotas.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbcquotas — Set or get QUOTAs of NTFS 5 shares</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> {//server/share} [-u user] [-L] [-F] [-S QUOTA_SET_COMMAND] [-n] [-t] [-v] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-l logdir] [-V] [-U username] [-N] [-k] [-A]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489516"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> program manipulates NT Quotas on SMB file shares. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489545"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p>The following options are available to the <code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> program. </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-u user</span></dt><dd><p> Specifies the user of whom the quotas are get or set. +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbcquotas</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbcquotas.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbcquotas — Set or get QUOTAs of NTFS 5 shares</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> {//server/share} [-u user] [-L] [-F] [-S QUOTA_SET_COMMAND] [-n] [-t] [-v] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-l logdir] [-V] [-U username] [-N] [-k] [-A]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483534"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> program manipulates NT Quotas on SMB file shares. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483562"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p>The following options are available to the <code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> program. </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-u user</span></dt><dd><p> Specifies the user of whom the quotas are get or set. By default the current user's username will be used.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-L</span></dt><dd><p>Lists all quota records of the share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-F</span></dt><dd><p>Show the share quota status and default limits.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-S QUOTA_SET_COMMAND</span></dt><dd><p>This command sets/modifies quotas for a user or on the share, depending on the QUOTA_SET_COMMAND parameter which is described later.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-n</span></dt><dd><p>This option displays all QUOTA information in numeric format. The default is to convert SIDs to names and QUOTA limits @@ -40,6 +40,8 @@ option is also defined the password on the command line will be silently ingnored and no password will be used.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-k|--kerberos</span></dt><dd><p> Try to authenticate with kerberos. Only useful in an Active Directory environment. +</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-C|--use-ccache</span></dt><dd><p> +Try to use the credentials cached by winbind. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-A|--authentication-file=filename</span></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to specify a file from which to read the username and password used in the connection. The format of the file is @@ -62,7 +64,7 @@ on the file restrict access from unwanted users. See the many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the <code class="literal">ps</code> command. To be safe always allow <code class="literal">rpcclient</code> to prompt for a password and type -it in directly. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="QUOTA_SET_COMAND"><a name="id2487658"></a><h2>QUOTA_SET_COMAND</h2><p>The format of an the QUOTA_SET_COMMAND is an operation +it in directly. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481692"></a><h2>QUOTA_SET_COMAND</h2><p>The format of an the QUOTA_SET_COMMAND is an operation name followed by a set of parameters specific to that operation. </p><p>To set user quotas for the user specified by -u or for the current username: </p><p><strong class="userinput"><code> @@ -74,13 +76,13 @@ it in directly. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="QUOTA_SET To change the share quota settings: </p><p><strong class="userinput"><code> FSQFLAGS:QUOTA_ENABLED/DENY_DISK/LOG_SOFTLIMIT/LOG_HARD_LIMIT - </code></strong></p><p>All limits are specified as a number of bytes.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXIT STATUS"><a name="id2487710"></a><h2>EXIT STATUS</h2><p>The <code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> program sets the exit status + </code></strong></p><p>All limits are specified as a number of bytes.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481744"></a><h2>EXIT STATUS</h2><p>The <code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> program sets the exit status depending on the success or otherwise of the operations performed. The exit status may be one of the following values. </p><p>If the operation succeeded, smbcquotas returns an exit status of 0. If <code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> couldn't connect to the specified server, or when there was an error getting or setting the quota(s), an exit status of 1 is returned. If there was an error parsing any command line - arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487743"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487754"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + arguments, an exit status of 2 is returned. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481777"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481788"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p><code class="literal">smbcquotas</code> was written by Stefan Metzmacher.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbd.8.html index 63e57490f0..56cd060c09 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbd.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbd"><a name="smbd.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbd — server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbd</code> [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-h] [-V] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-l <log directory>] [-p <port number(s)>] [-P <profiling level>] [-O <socket option>] [-s <configuration file>]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489651"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This program is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbd</code> is the server daemon that +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbd.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbd — server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbd</code> [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-h] [-V] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-l <log directory>] [-p <port number(s)>] [-P <profiling level>] [-O <socket option>] [-s <configuration file>]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483383"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This program is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbd</code> is the server daemon that provides filesharing and printing services to Windows clients. The server provides filespace and printer services to clients using the SMB (or CIFS) protocol. This is compatible @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ can force a reload by sending a SIGHUP to the server. Reloading the configuration file will not affect connections to any service that is already established. Either the user will have to - disconnect from the service, or <code class="literal">smbd</code> killed and restarted.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489739"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-D</span></dt><dd><p>If specified, this parameter causes + disconnect from the service, or <code class="literal">smbd</code> killed and restarted.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483594"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-D</span></dt><dd><p>If specified, this parameter causes the server to operate as a daemon. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port. Operating the server as a @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ than a file.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-i</span></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is specified it causes the server to run "interactively", not as a daemon, even if the server is executed on the command line of a shell. Setting this - parameter negates the implicit deamon mode when run from the + parameter negates the implicit daemon mode when run from the command line. <code class="literal">smbd</code> also logs to standard output, as if the <code class="literal">-S</code> parameter had been given. @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. number specifying the level of profiling data to be collected. 0 turns off profiling, 1 turns on counter profiling only, 2 turns on complete profiling, and 3 resets all profiling data. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="FILES"><a name="id2487661"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/inetd.conf</code></span></dt><dd><p>If the server is to be run by the + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481680"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/inetd.conf</code></span></dt><dd><p>If the server is to be run by the <code class="literal">inetd</code> meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon. @@ -96,31 +96,31 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</code></span></dt><dd><p>This is the default location of the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> server configuration file. Other common places that systems install this file are <code class="filename">/usr/samba/lib/smb.conf</code> and <code class="filename">/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</p><p>This file describes all the services the server - is to make available to clients. See <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> for more information.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="LIMITATIONS"><a name="id2487787"></a><h2>LIMITATIONS</h2><p>On some systems <code class="literal">smbd</code> cannot change uid back + is to make available to clients. See <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> for more information.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481806"></a><h2>LIMITATIONS</h2><p>On some systems <code class="literal">smbd</code> cannot change uid back to root after a setuid() call. Such systems are called trapdoor uid systems. If you have such a system, you will be unable to connect from a client (such as a PC) as two different users at once. Attempts to connect the second user will result in access denied or - similar.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"><a name="id2487809"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="envar">PRINTER</code></span></dt><dd><p>If no printer name is specified to + similar.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481827"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="envar">PRINTER</code></span></dt><dd><p>If no printer name is specified to printable services, most systems will use the value of this variable (or <code class="constant">lp</code> if this variable is not defined) as the name of the printer to use. This - is not specific to the server, however.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="PAM INTERACTION"><a name="id2487838"></a><h2>PAM INTERACTION</h2><p>Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext + is not specific to the server, however.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481856"></a><h2>PAM INTERACTION</h2><p>Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext password), for account checking (is this account disabled?) and for session management. The degree too which samba supports PAM is restricted by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS" target="_top">obey pam restrictions</a> <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> paramater. When this is set, the following restrictions apply: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Account Validation</em></span>: All accesses to a + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Account Validation</em></span>: All accesses to a samba server are checked against PAM to see if the account is vaild, not disabled and is permitted to login at this time. This also applies to encrypted logins. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Session Management</em></span>: When not using share + </p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Session Management</em></span>: When not using share level secuirty, users must pass PAM's session checks before access is granted. Note however, that this is bypassed in share level secuirty. Note also that some older pam configuration files may need a line added for session support. - </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487897"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="DIAGNOSTICS"><a name="id2487908"></a><h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2><p>Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged + </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481915"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481926"></a><h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2><p>Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged in a specified log file. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line.</p><p>The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used by the server. If you have problems, set @@ -129,10 +129,10 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. available in the source code to warrant describing each and every diagnostic. At this stage your best bet is still to grep the source code and inspect the conditions that gave rise to the - diagnostics you are seeing.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="TDB FILES"><a name="id2487936"></a><h2>TDB FILES</h2><p>Samba stores it's data in several TDB (Trivial Database) files, usually located in <code class="filename">/var/lib/samba</code>.</p><p> + diagnostics you are seeing.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481954"></a><h2>TDB FILES</h2><p>Samba stores it's data in several TDB (Trivial Database) files, usually located in <code class="filename">/var/lib/samba</code>.</p><p> (*) information persistent across restarts (but not necessarily important to backup). - </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">account_policy.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>NT account policy settings such as pw expiration, etc...</p></dd><dt><span class="term">brlock.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>byte range locks</p></dd><dt><span class="term">browse.dat</span></dt><dd><p>browse lists</p></dd><dt><span class="term">connections.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>share connections (used to enforce max connections, etc...)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">gencache.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>generic caching db</p></dd><dt><span class="term">group_mapping.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>group mapping information</p></dd><dt><span class="term">locking.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>share modes & oplocks</p></dd><dt><span class="term">login_cache.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>bad pw attempts</p></dd><dt><span class="term">messages.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>Samba messaging system</p></dd><dt><span class="term">netsamlogon_cache.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>cache of user net_info_3 struct from net_samlogon() request (as a domain member)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">ntdrivers.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>installed printer drivers</p></dd><dt><span class="term">ntforms.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>installed printer forms</p></dd><dt><span class="term">ntprinters.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>installed printer information</p></dd><dt><span class="term">printing/</span></dt><dd><p>directory containing tdb per print queue of cached lpq output</p></dd><dt><span class="term">registry.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>Windows registry skeleton (connect via regedit.exe)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">sessionid.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>session information (e.g. support for 'utmp = yes')</p></dd><dt><span class="term">share_info.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>share acls</p></dd><dt><span class="term">winbindd_cache.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>winbindd's cache of user lists, etc...</p></dd><dt><span class="term">winbindd_idmap.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>winbindd's local idmap db</p></dd><dt><span class="term">wins.dat*</span></dt><dd><p>wins database when 'wins support = yes'</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="SIGNALS"><a name="id2538635"></a><h2>SIGNALS</h2><p>Sending the <code class="literal">smbd</code> a SIGHUP will cause it to + </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">account_policy.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>NT account policy settings such as pw expiration, etc...</p></dd><dt><span class="term">brlock.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>byte range locks</p></dd><dt><span class="term">browse.dat</span></dt><dd><p>browse lists</p></dd><dt><span class="term">connections.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>share connections (used to enforce max connections, etc...)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">gencache.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>generic caching db</p></dd><dt><span class="term">group_mapping.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>group mapping information</p></dd><dt><span class="term">locking.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>share modes & oplocks</p></dd><dt><span class="term">login_cache.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>bad pw attempts</p></dd><dt><span class="term">messages.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>Samba messaging system</p></dd><dt><span class="term">netsamlogon_cache.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>cache of user net_info_3 struct from net_samlogon() request (as a domain member)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">ntdrivers.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>installed printer drivers</p></dd><dt><span class="term">ntforms.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>installed printer forms</p></dd><dt><span class="term">ntprinters.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>installed printer information</p></dd><dt><span class="term">printing/</span></dt><dd><p>directory containing tdb per print queue of cached lpq output</p></dd><dt><span class="term">registry.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>Windows registry skeleton (connect via regedit.exe)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">sessionid.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>session information (e.g. support for 'utmp = yes')</p></dd><dt><span class="term">share_info.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>share acls</p></dd><dt><span class="term">winbindd_cache.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>winbindd's cache of user lists, etc...</p></dd><dt><span class="term">winbindd_idmap.tdb*</span></dt><dd><p>winbindd's local idmap db</p></dd><dt><span class="term">wins.dat*</span></dt><dd><p>wins database when 'wins support = yes'</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532649"></a><h2>SIGNALS</h2><p>Sending the <code class="literal">smbd</code> a SIGHUP will cause it to reload its <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> configuration file within a short period of time.</p><p>To shut down a user's <code class="literal">smbd</code> process it is recommended that <code class="literal">SIGKILL (-9)</code> <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> @@ -147,11 +147,11 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. <code class="literal">smbd</code> is in a state of waiting for an incoming SMB before issuing them. It is possible to make the signal handlers safe by un-blocking the signals before the select call and re-blocking - them after, however this would affect performance.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2538722"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="hosts_access.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">hosts_access</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="inetd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">inetd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testprns.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testprns</span>(1)</span></a>, and the + them after, however this would affect performance.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532737"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="hosts_access.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">hosts_access</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="inetd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">inetd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testprns.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testprns</span>(1)</span></a>, and the Internet RFC's <code class="filename">rfc1001.txt</code>, <code class="filename">rfc1002.txt</code>. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page <a class="ulink" href="http://samba.org/cifs/" target="_top"> - http://samba.org/cifs/</a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2538802"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + http://samba.org/cifs/</a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532817"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbget.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbget.1.html index 1c8bb63097..24754a56a4 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbget.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbget.1.html @@ -1,14 +1,14 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbget</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbget"><a name="smbget.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbget — wget-like utility for download files over SMB</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbget</code> [-a, --guest] [-r, --resume] [-R, --recursive] [-u, --username=STRING] [-p, --password=STRING] [-w, --workgroup=STRING] [-n, --nonprompt] [-d, --debuglevel=INT] [-D, --dots] [-P, --keep-permissions] [-o, --outputfile] [-f, --rcfile] [-q, --quiet] [-v, --verbose] [-b, --blocksize] [-?, --help] [--usage] {smb://host/share/path/to/file} [smb://url2/] [...]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489703"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>smbget is a simple utility with wget-like semantics, that can download files from SMB servers. You can specify the files you would like to download on the command-line. +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbget</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbget.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbget — wget-like utility for download files over SMB</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbget</code> [-a, --guest] [-r, --resume] [-R, --recursive] [-u, --username=STRING] [-p, --password=STRING] [-w, --workgroup=STRING] [-n, --nonprompt] [-d, --debuglevel=INT] [-D, --dots] [-P, --keep-permissions] [-o, --outputfile] [-f, --rcfile] [-q, --quiet] [-v, --verbose] [-b, --blocksize] [-?, --help] [--usage] {smb://host/share/path/to/file} [smb://url2/] [...]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483556"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>smbget is a simple utility with wget-like semantics, that can download files from SMB servers. You can specify the files you would like to download on the command-line. </p><p> The files should be in the smb-URL standard, e.g. use smb://host/share/file for the UNC path <span class="emphasis"><em>\\\\HOST\\SHARE\\file</em></span>. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489735"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><dt><span class="term">-a, --guest</span></dt><dd><p>Work as user guest</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-r, --resume</span></dt><dd><p>Automatically resume aborted files</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-R, --recursive</span></dt><dd><p>Recursively download files</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-u, --username=STRING</span></dt><dd><p>Username to use</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-p, --password=STRING</span></dt><dd><p>Password to use</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-w, --workgroup=STRING</span></dt><dd><p>Workgroup to use (optional)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-n, --nonprompt</span></dt><dd><p>Don't ask anything (non-interactive)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-d, --debuglevel=INT</span></dt><dd><p>Debuglevel to use</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-D, --dots</span></dt><dd><p>Show dots as progress indication</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-P, --keep-permissions</span></dt><dd><p>Set same permissions on local file as are set on remote file.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-o, --outputfile</span></dt><dd><p>Write the file that is being download to the specified file. Can not be used together with -R.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-f, --rcfile</span></dt><dd><p>Use specified rcfile. This will be loaded in the order it was specified - e.g. if you specify any options before this one, they might get overriden by the contents of the rcfile.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-q, --quiet</span></dt><dd><p>Be quiet</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-v, --verbose</span></dt><dd><p>Be verbose</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-b, --blocksize</span></dt><dd><p>Number of bytes to download in a block. Defaults to 64000.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-?, --help</span></dt><dd><p>Show help message</p></dd><dt><span class="term">--usage</span></dt><dd><p>Display brief usage message</p></dd></div><div class="refsect1" title="SMB URLS"><a name="id2489937"></a><h2>SMB URLS</h2><p> SMB URL's should be specified in the following format:</p><pre class="programlisting"> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483588"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><dt><span class="term">-a, --guest</span></dt><dd><p>Work as user guest</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-r, --resume</span></dt><dd><p>Automatically resume aborted files</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-R, --recursive</span></dt><dd><p>Recursively download files</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-u, --username=STRING</span></dt><dd><p>Username to use</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-p, --password=STRING</span></dt><dd><p>Password to use</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-w, --workgroup=STRING</span></dt><dd><p>Workgroup to use (optional)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-n, --nonprompt</span></dt><dd><p>Don't ask anything (non-interactive)</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-d, --debuglevel=INT</span></dt><dd><p>Debuglevel to use</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-D, --dots</span></dt><dd><p>Show dots as progress indication</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-P, --keep-permissions</span></dt><dd><p>Set same permissions on local file as are set on remote file.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-o, --outputfile</span></dt><dd><p>Write the file that is being download to the specified file. Can not be used together with -R.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-f, --rcfile</span></dt><dd><p>Use specified rcfile. This will be loaded in the order it was specified - e.g. if you specify any options before this one, they might get overriden by the contents of the rcfile.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-q, --quiet</span></dt><dd><p>Be quiet</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-v, --verbose</span></dt><dd><p>Be verbose</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-b, --blocksize</span></dt><dd><p>Number of bytes to download in a block. Defaults to 64000.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-?, --help</span></dt><dd><p>Show help message</p></dd><dt><span class="term">--usage</span></dt><dd><p>Display brief usage message</p></dd></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483791"></a><h2>SMB URLS</h2><p> SMB URL's should be specified in the following format:</p><pre class="programlisting"> smb://[[[domain;]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]] </pre><pre class="programlisting"> smb:// means all the workgroups </pre><pre class="programlisting"> smb://name/ means, if <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> is a workgroup, all the servers in this workgroup, or if <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em> is a server, all the shares on this server. -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2487486"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><pre class="programlisting"> +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481502"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><pre class="programlisting"> # Recursively download 'src' directory smbget -R smb://rhonwyn/jelmer/src # Download FreeBSD ISO and enable resuming @@ -17,10 +17,10 @@ smbget -r smb://rhonwyn/isos/FreeBSD5.1.iso smbget -Rr smb://rhonwyn/isos # Backup my data on rhonwyn smbget -Rr smb://rhonwyn/ -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="BUGS"><a name="id2487503"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p>Permission denied is returned in some cases where the cause of the error is unknown +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481519"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p>Permission denied is returned in some cases where the cause of the error is unknown (such as an illegally formatted smb:// url or trying to get a directory without -R -turned on).</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487516"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487528"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +turned on).</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481532"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481543"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The smbget manpage was written by Jelmer Vernooij.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbgetrc.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbgetrc.5.html index e1a08792c4..aa9cb5f819 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbgetrc.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbgetrc.5.html @@ -1,17 +1,17 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbgetrc</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbgetrc"><a name="smbgetrc.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbgetrc — configuration file for smbget</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><p><code class="filename">smbgetrc</code></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528892"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbgetrc</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbgetrc.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbgetrc — configuration file for smbget</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><p><code class="filename">smbgetrc</code></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522911"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> This manual page documents the format and options of the <span class="emphasis"><em>smbgetrc</em></span> file. This is the configuration file used by the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbget.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbget</span>(1)</span></a> utility. The file contains of key-value pairs, one pair on each line. The key and value should be separated by a space. </p><p>By default, smbget reads its configuration from <span class="emphasis"><em>$HOME/.smbgetrc</em></span>, though - other locations can be specified using the command-line options.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2528925"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p> + other locations can be specified using the command-line options.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522944"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p> The following keys can be set: </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">resume on|off</span></dt><dd><p> Whether aborted downloads should be automatically resumed. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">recursive on|off</span></dt><dd><p>Whether directories should be downloaded recursively</p></dd><dt><span class="term">username <em class="replaceable"><code>name</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>Username to use when logging in to the remote server. Use an empty string for anonymous access. - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">password <em class="replaceable"><code>pass</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>Password to use when logging in.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">workgroup <em class="replaceable"><code>wg</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>Workgroup to use when logging in</p></dd><dt><span class="term">nonprompt on|off</span></dt><dd><p>Turns off asking for username and password. Useful for scripts.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">debuglevel <em class="replaceable"><code>int</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>(Samba) debuglevel to run at. Useful for tracking down protocol level problems.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dots on|off</span></dt><dd><p>Whether a single dot should be printed for each block that has been downloaded, instead of the default progress indicator.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">blocksize <em class="replaceable"><code>int</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>Number of bytes to put in a block. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489540"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489551"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbget.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbget</span>(1)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="Samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">Samba</span>(7)</span></a>. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489575"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></dd><dt><span class="term">password <em class="replaceable"><code>pass</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>Password to use when logging in.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">workgroup <em class="replaceable"><code>wg</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>Workgroup to use when logging in</p></dd><dt><span class="term">nonprompt on|off</span></dt><dd><p>Turns off asking for username and password. Useful for scripts.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">debuglevel <em class="replaceable"><code>int</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>(Samba) debuglevel to run at. Useful for tracking down protocol level problems.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">dots on|off</span></dt><dd><p>Whether a single dot should be printed for each block that has been downloaded, instead of the default progress indicator.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">blocksize <em class="replaceable"><code>int</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>Number of bytes to put in a block. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483556"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483567"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbget.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbget</span>(1)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="Samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">Samba</span>(7)</span></a>. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483592"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>This manual page was written by Jelmer Vernooij</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.5.html index ce6660b123..ee52054e9a 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.5.html @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbpasswd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbpasswd"><a name="smbpasswd.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbpasswd — The Samba encrypted password file</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><p><code class="filename">smbpasswd</code></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528892"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>smbpasswd is the Samba encrypted password file. It contains +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbpasswd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbpasswd.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbpasswd — The Samba encrypted password file</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><p><code class="filename">smbpasswd</code></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522911"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>smbpasswd is the Samba encrypted password file. It contains the username, Unix user id and the SMB hashed passwords of the user, as well as account flag information and the time the password was last changed. This file format has been evolving with - Samba and has had several different formats in the past. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="FILE FORMAT"><a name="id2528919"></a><h2>FILE FORMAT</h2><p>The format of the smbpasswd file used by Samba 2.2 + Samba and has had several different formats in the past. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522938"></a><h2>FILE FORMAT</h2><p>The format of the smbpasswd file used by Samba 2.2 is very similar to the familiar Unix <code class="filename">passwd(5)</code> file. It is an ASCII file containing one line for each user. Each field ithin each line is separated from the next by a colon. Any entry @@ -58,15 +58,15 @@ '[' and ']' characters and is always 13 characters in length (including the '[' and ']' characters). The contents of this field may be any of the following characters: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>U</em></span> - This means - this is a "User" account, i.e. an ordinary user.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>N</em></span> - This means the + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>U</em></span> - This means + this is a "User" account, i.e. an ordinary user.</p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>N</em></span> - This means the account has no password (the passwords in the fields LANMAN Password Hash and NT Password Hash are ignored). Note that this will only allow users to log on with no password if the <em class="parameter"><code> null passwords</code></em> parameter is set in the - <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> config file. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>D</em></span> - This means the account - is disabled and no SMB/CIFS logins will be allowed for this user. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>X</em></span> - This means the password - does not expire. </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><span class="emphasis"><em>W</em></span> - This means this account + <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> config file. </p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>D</em></span> - This means the account + is disabled and no SMB/CIFS logins will be allowed for this user. </p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>X</em></span> - This means the password + does not expire. </p></li><li><p><span class="emphasis"><em>W</em></span> - This means this account is a "Workstation Trust" account. This kind of account is used in the Samba PDC code stream to allow Windows NT Workstations and Servers to join a Domain hosted by a Samba PDC. </p></li></ul></div><p>Other flags may be added as the code is extended in future. @@ -76,10 +76,10 @@ last modified. It consists of the characters 'LCT-' (standing for "Last Change Time") followed by a numeric encoding of the UNIX time in seconds since the epoch (1970) that the last change was made. - </p></dd></dl></div><p>All other colon separated fields are ignored at this time.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489672"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489683"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="Samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">Samba</span>(7)</span></a>, and + </p></dd></dl></div><p>All other colon separated fields are ignored at this time.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483686"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483698"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="Samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">Samba</span>(7)</span></a>, and the Internet RFC1321 for details on the MD4 algorithm. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489709"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483724"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.8.html index bca2b0c36a..30836e3df8 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbpasswd.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbpasswd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbpasswd"><a name="smbpasswd.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbpasswd — change a user's SMB password</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> [-a] [-c <config file>] [-x] [-d] [-e] [-D debuglevel] [-n] [-r <remote machine>] [-R <name resolve order>] [-m] [-U username[%password]] [-h] [-s] [-w pass] [-W] [-i] [-L] [username]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489526"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The smbpasswd program has several different +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbpasswd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbpasswd.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbpasswd — change a user's SMB password</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> [-a] [-c <config file>] [-x] [-d] [-e] [-D debuglevel] [-n] [-r <remote machine>] [-R <name resolve order>] [-m] [-U username[%password]] [-h] [-s] [-w pass] [-W] [-i] [-L] [username]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483542"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The smbpasswd program has several different functions, depending on whether it is run by the <span class="emphasis"><em>root</em></span> user or not. When run as a normal user it allows the user to change the password used for their SMB sessions on any machines that store @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ the attributes of the user in this file to be made. When run by root, <code class="literal"> smbpasswd</code> accesses the local smbpasswd file directly, thus enabling changes to be made even if smbd is not - running. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489648"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-a</span></dt><dd><p> + running. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483663"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-a</span></dt><dd><p> This option specifies that the username following should be added to the local smbpasswd file, with the new password typed (type <Enter> for the old password). This option is ignored if the username following already exists in the smbpasswd file and it is treated like a regular change password command. Note that the @@ -92,20 +92,20 @@ specifying a Win95/98 machine as remote machine target. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-R name resolve order</span></dt><dd><p>This option allows the user of smbpasswd to determine what name resolution services to use when looking up the NetBIOS name of the host being connected to. </p><p>The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast". They - cause names to be resolved as follows: </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">lmhosts</code>: Lookup an IP + cause names to be resolved as follows: </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="constant">lmhosts</code>: Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the <a class="citerefentry" href="lmhosts.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">lmhosts</span>(5)</span></a> for details) then - any name type matches for lookup.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">host</code>: Do a standard host + any name type matches for lookup.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">host</code>: Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system <code class="filename">/etc/hosts </code>, NIS, or DNS lookups. This method of name resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the <code class="filename">/etc/nsswitch.conf</code> file). Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise - it is ignored.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">wins</code>: Query a name with + it is ignored.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">wins</code>: Query a name with the IP address listed in the <em class="parameter"><code>wins server</code></em> parameter. If no WINS server has been specified this method - will be ignored.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="constant">bcast</code>: Do a broadcast on + will be ignored.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">bcast</code>: Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the <em class="parameter"><code>interfaces</code></em> parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ <span class="emphasis"><em>root only</em></span> options to operate on. Only root can specify this parameter as only root has the permission needed to modify attributes directly in the local smbpasswd file. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="NOTES"><a name="id2538536"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>Since <code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> works in client-server + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532553"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>Since <code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> works in client-server mode communicating with a local smbd for a non-root user then the smbd daemon must be running for this to work. A common problem is to add a restriction to the hosts that may access the <code class="literal"> @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ hosts</code></em> or <em class="parameter"><code>deny hosts</code></em> entry in the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> file and neglecting to allow "localhost" access to the smbd. </p><p>In addition, the smbpasswd command is only useful if Samba - has been set up to use encrypted passwords. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2538585"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2538596"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="Samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">Samba</span>(7)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2538619"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + has been set up to use encrypted passwords. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532602"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532613"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="Samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">Samba</span>(7)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532636"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbspool.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbspool.8.html index 601afcaa68..9650b2cd4d 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbspool.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbspool.8.html @@ -1,29 +1,29 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbspool</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbspool"><a name="smbspool.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbspool — send a print file to an SMB printer</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbspool</code> {job} {user} {title} {copies} {options} [filename]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489310"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>smbspool is a very small print spooling program that +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbspool</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbspool.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbspool — send a print file to an SMB printer</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbspool</code> {job} {user} {title} {copies} {options} [filename]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483326"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>smbspool is a very small print spooling program that sends a print file to an SMB printer. The command-line arguments are position-dependent for compatibility with the Common UNIX Printing System, but you can use smbspool with any printing system or from a program or script.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>DEVICE URI</em></span></p><p>smbspool specifies the destination using a Uniform Resource Identifier ("URI") with a method of "smb". This string can take - a number of forms:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>smb://server[:port]/printer</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>smb://workgroup/server[:port]/printer</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>smb://username:password@server[:port]/printer</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>smb://username:password@workgroup/server[:port]/printer</p></li></ul></div><p>smbspool tries to get the URI from the environment variable + a number of forms:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>smb://server[:port]/printer</p></li><li><p>smb://workgroup/server[:port]/printer</p></li><li><p>smb://username:password@server[:port]/printer</p></li><li><p>smb://username:password@workgroup/server[:port]/printer</p></li></ul></div><p>smbspool tries to get the URI from the environment variable <code class="envar">DEVICE_URI</code>. If <code class="envar">DEVICE_URI</code> is not present, - smbspool will use argv[0] if that starts with <span class="quote">“<span class="quote">smb://</span>”</span> + smbspool will use argv[0] if that starts with “<span class="quote">smb://</span>” or argv[1] if that is not the case.</p><p>Programs using the <code class="literal">exec(2)</code> functions can pass the URI in argv[0], while shell scripts must set the <code class="envar">DEVICE_URI</code> environment variable prior to - running smbspool.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489523"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>The job argument (argv[1]) contains the + running smbspool.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483539"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>The job argument (argv[1]) contains the job ID number and is presently not used by smbspool. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The user argument (argv[2]) contains the + </p></li><li><p>The user argument (argv[2]) contains the print user's name and is presently not used by smbspool. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The title argument (argv[3]) contains the + </p></li><li><p>The title argument (argv[3]) contains the job title string and is passed as the remote file name - when sending the print job.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The copies argument (argv[4]) contains + when sending the print job.</p></li><li><p>The copies argument (argv[4]) contains the number of copies to be printed of the named file. If no filename is provided then this argument is not used by - smbspool.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The options argument (argv[5]) contains + smbspool.</p></li><li><p>The options argument (argv[5]) contains the print options in a single string and is currently - not used by smbspool.</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The filename argument (argv[6]) contains the + not used by smbspool.</p></li><li><p>The filename argument (argv[6]) contains the name of the file to print. If this argument is not specified - then the print file is read from the standard input.</p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489574"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489585"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489609"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p><code class="literal">smbspool</code> was written by Michael Sweet + then the print file is read from the standard input.</p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483590"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483601"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483626"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p><code class="literal">smbspool</code> was written by Michael Sweet at Easy Software Products.</p><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbstatus.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbstatus.1.html index c2bd348db1..50cd06b650 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbstatus.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbstatus.1.html @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbstatus</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbstatus"><a name="smbstatus.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbstatus — report on current Samba connections</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbstatus</code> [-P] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-v] [-L] [-B] [-p] [-S] [-s <configuration file>] [-u <username>]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489342"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbstatus</code> is a very simple program to - list the current Samba connections.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489369"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-P|--profile</span></dt><dd><p>If samba has been compiled with the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbstatus</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbstatus.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbstatus — report on current Samba connections</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbstatus</code> [-P] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-v] [-L] [-B] [-p] [-S] [-s <configuration file>] [-u <username>]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483359"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbstatus</code> is a very simple program to + list the current Samba connections.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483386"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-P|--profile</span></dt><dd><p>If samba has been compiled with the profiling option, print only the contents of the profiling shared memory area.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-b|--brief</span></dt><dd><p>gives brief output.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-d|--debuglevel=level</span></dt><dd><p><em class="replaceable"><code>level</code></em> is an integer from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is @@ -28,8 +28,8 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-v|--verbose</span></dt><dd><p>gives verbose output.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-L|--locks</span></dt><dd><p>causes smbstatus to only list locks.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-B|--byterange</span></dt><dd><p>causes smbstatus to include byte range locks. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-p|--processes</span></dt><dd><p>print a list of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> processes and exit. Useful for scripting.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-S|--shares</span></dt><dd><p>causes smbstatus to only list shares.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. -</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-u|--user=<username></span></dt><dd><p>selects information relevant to <em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> only.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487501"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2487512"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487537"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-u|--user=<username></span></dt><dd><p>selects information relevant to <em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> only.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481522"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481533"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481558"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtar.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtar.1.html index d0bbee4bd6..22e9de2032 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtar.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtar.1.html @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbtar</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbtar"><a name="smbtar.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbtar — shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares - directly to UNIX tape drives</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbtar</code> [-r] [-i] [-a] [-v] {-s server} [-p password] [-x services] [-X] [-N filename] [-b blocksize] [-d directory] [-l loglevel] [-u user] [-t tape] {filenames}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489666"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbtar</code> is a very small shell script on top - of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a> which dumps SMB shares directly to tape.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489700"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-s server</span></dt><dd><p>The SMB/CIFS server that the share resides +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbtar</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbtar.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbtar — shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares + directly to UNIX tape drives</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbtar</code> [-r] [-i] [-a] [-v] {-s server} [-p password] [-x services] [-X] [-N filename] [-b blocksize] [-d directory] [-l loglevel] [-u user] [-t tape] {filenames}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483521"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbtar</code> is a very small shell script on top + of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a> which dumps SMB shares directly to tape.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483555"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-s server</span></dt><dd><p>The SMB/CIFS server that the share resides upon.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-x service</span></dt><dd><p>The share name on the server to connect to. The default is "backup".</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-X</span></dt><dd><p>Exclude mode. Exclude filenames... from tar create or restore. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-d directory</span></dt><dd><p>Change to initial <em class="parameter"><code>directory @@ -17,14 +17,14 @@ up if they have the archive bit set. The archive bit is reset after each file is read. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-r</span></dt><dd><p>Restore. Files are restored to the share from the tar file. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-l log level</span></dt><dd><p>Log (debug) level. Corresponds to the - <em class="parameter"><code>-d</code></em> flag of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"><a name="id2489919"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>$TAPE</code></em> variable specifies the + <em class="parameter"><code>-d</code></em> flag of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483774"></a><h2>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</h2><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>$TAPE</code></em> variable specifies the default tape device to write to. May be overridden - with the -t option. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="BUGS"><a name="id2489936"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p>The <code class="literal">smbtar</code> script has different - options from ordinary tar and from smbclient's tar command. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="CAVEATS"><a name="id2487461"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>Sites that are more careful about security may not like + with the -t option. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483791"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p>The <code class="literal">smbtar</code> script has different + options from ordinary tar and from smbclient's tar command. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481478"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>Sites that are more careful about security may not like the way the script handles PC passwords. Backup and restore work on entire shares; should work on file lists. smbtar works best - with GNU tar and may not work well with other versions. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="DIAGNOSTICS"><a name="id2487476"></a><h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2><p>See the <span class="emphasis"><em>DIAGNOSTICS</em></span> section for the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a> command.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487499"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2487510"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487544"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + with GNU tar and may not work well with other versions. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481492"></a><h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2><p>See the <span class="emphasis"><em>DIAGNOSTICS</em></span> section for the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a> command.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481516"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481527"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481561"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p><a class="ulink" href="mailto:poultenr@logica.co.uk" target="_top">Ricky Poulten</a> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtree.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtree.1.html index 0d2ec2eaab..c48f7a36e8 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtree.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smbtree.1.html @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbtree</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smbtree"><a name="smbtree.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbtree — A text based smb network browser - </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbtree</code> [-b] [-D] [-S]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528918"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbtree</code> is a smb browser program +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smbtree</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smbtree.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smbtree — A text based smb network browser + </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">smbtree</code> [-b] [-D] [-S]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522937"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">smbtree</code> is a smb browser program in text mode. It is similar to the "Network Neighborhood" found on Windows computers. It prints a tree with all the known domains, the servers in those domains and the shares on the servers. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489316"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-b</span></dt><dd><p>Query network nodes by sending requests + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483333"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-b</span></dt><dd><p>Query network nodes by sending requests as broadcasts instead of querying the local master browser. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-D</span></dt><dd><p>Only print a list of all the domains known on broadcast or by the @@ -44,6 +44,8 @@ option is also defined the password on the command line will be silently ingnored and no password will be used.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-k|--kerberos</span></dt><dd><p> Try to authenticate with kerberos. Only useful in an Active Directory environment. +</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-C|--use-ccache</span></dt><dd><p> +Try to use the credentials cached by winbind. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-A|--authentication-file=filename</span></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to specify a file from which to read the username and password used in the connection. The format of the file is @@ -67,8 +69,8 @@ many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the <code class="literal">ps</code> command. To be safe always allow <code class="literal">rpcclient</code> to prompt for a password and type it in directly. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487498"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba - suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487510"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481532"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba + suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481543"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The smbtree man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij. </p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/swat.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/swat.8.html index 2881b75291..019ff5a62c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/swat.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/swat.8.html @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>swat</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="swat"><a name="swat.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>swat — Samba Web Administration Tool</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">swat</code> [-s <smb config file>] [-a] [-P]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528884"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">swat</code> allows a Samba administrator to +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>swat</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="swat.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>swat — Samba Web Administration Tool</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">swat</code> [-s <smb config file>] [-a] [-P]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522936"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">swat</code> allows a Samba administrator to configure the complex <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> file via a Web browser. In addition, a <code class="literal">swat</code> configuration page has help links to all the configurable options in the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file allowing an - administrator to easily look up the effects of any change. </p><p><code class="literal">swat</code> is run from <code class="literal">inetd</code> </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489635"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-s smb configuration file</span></dt><dd><p>The default configuration file path is + administrator to easily look up the effects of any change. </p><p><code class="literal">swat</code> is run from <code class="literal">inetd</code> </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483366"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-s smb configuration file</span></dt><dd><p>The default configuration file path is determined at compile time. The file specified contains the configuration details required by the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> server. This is the file that <code class="literal">swat</code> will modify. @@ -41,14 +41,14 @@ compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-l|--log-basename=logdirectory</spa <code class="constant">".progname"</code> will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="INSTALLATION"><a name="id2487457"></a><h2>INSTALLATION</h2><p>Swat is included as binary package with most distributions. The +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481475"></a><h2>INSTALLATION</h2><p>Swat is included as binary package with most distributions. The package manager in this case takes care of the installation and configuration. This section is only for those who have compiled swat from scratch. </p><p>After you compile SWAT you need to run <code class="literal">make install </code> to install the <code class="literal">swat</code> binary and the various help files and images. A default install would put - these in: </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>/usr/local/samba/sbin/swat</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>/usr/local/samba/swat/images/*</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>/usr/local/samba/swat/help/*</p></li></ul></div><div class="refsect2" title="Inetd Installation"><a name="id2487503"></a><h3>Inetd Installation</h3><p>You need to edit your <code class="filename">/etc/inetd.conf + these in: </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>/usr/local/samba/sbin/swat</p></li><li><p>/usr/local/samba/swat/images/*</p></li><li><p>/usr/local/samba/swat/help/*</p></li></ul></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481522"></a><h3>Inetd Installation</h3><p>You need to edit your <code class="filename">/etc/inetd.conf </code> and <code class="filename">/etc/services</code> to enable SWAT to be launched via <code class="literal">inetd</code>.</p><p>In <code class="filename">/etc/services</code> you need to add a line like this: </p><p><code class="literal">swat 901/tcp</code></p><p>Note for NIS/YP and LDAP users - you may need to rebuild the @@ -62,21 +62,21 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. /usr/local/samba/sbin/swat swat</code></p><p>Once you have edited <code class="filename">/etc/services</code> and <code class="filename">/etc/inetd.conf</code> you need to send a HUP signal to inetd. To do this use <code class="literal">kill -1 PID - </code> where PID is the process ID of the inetd daemon. </p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="LAUNCHING"><a name="id2487615"></a><h2>LAUNCHING</h2><p>To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and + </code> where PID is the process ID of the inetd daemon. </p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481634"></a><h2>LAUNCHING</h2><p>To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and point it at "http://localhost:901/".</p><p>Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent - in the clear over the wire. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="FILES"><a name="id2487634"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/inetd.conf</code></span></dt><dd><p>This file must contain suitable startup + in the clear over the wire. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481652"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/inetd.conf</code></span></dt><dd><p>This file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon.</p></dd><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/services</code></span></dt><dd><p>This file must contain a mapping of service name (e.g., swat) to service port (e.g., 901) and protocol type (e.g., tcp). </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</code></span></dt><dd><p>This is the default location of the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> server configuration file that swat edits. Other common places that systems install this file are <code class="filename"> /usr/samba/lib/smb.conf</code> and <code class="filename">/etc/smb.conf </code>. This file describes all the services the server - is to make available to clients. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="WARNINGS"><a name="id2487715"></a><h2>WARNINGS</h2><p><code class="literal">swat</code> will rewrite your <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> file. It will rearrange the entries and delete all + is to make available to clients. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481733"></a><h2>WARNINGS</h2><p><code class="literal">swat</code> will rewrite your <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> file. It will rearrange the entries and delete all comments, <em class="parameter"><code>include=</code></em> and <em class="parameter"><code>copy= </code></em> options. If you have a carefully crafted <code class="filename"> - smb.conf</code> then back it up or don't use swat! </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487759"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2487770"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><code class="literal">inetd(5)</code>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487800"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + smb.conf</code> then back it up or don't use swat! </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481777"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481788"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><code class="literal">inetd(5)</code>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481818"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbbackup.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbbackup.8.html index 826f3d3214..70c00674f1 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbbackup.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbbackup.8.html @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>tdbbackup</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="tdbbackup"><a name="tdbbackup.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>tdbbackup — tool for backing up and for validating the integrity of samba .tdb files</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">tdbbackup</code> [-s suffix] [-v] [-h]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528920"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(1)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">tdbbackup</code> is a tool that may be used to backup samba .tdb +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>tdbbackup</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="tdbbackup.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>tdbbackup — tool for backing up and for validating the integrity of samba .tdb files</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">tdbbackup</code> [-s suffix] [-v] [-h]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522938"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(1)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">tdbbackup</code> is a tool that may be used to backup samba .tdb files. This tool may also be used to verify the integrity of the .tdb files prior to samba startup or during normal operation. If it finds file damage and it finds a prior backup the backup file will be restored. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489319"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483335"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-h</span></dt><dd><p> Get help information. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-s suffix</span></dt><dd><p> The <code class="literal">-s</code> option allows the adminisistrator to specify a file @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-v</span></dt><dd><p> The <code class="literal">-v</code> will check the database for damages (currupt data) which if detected causes the backup to be restored. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="COMMANDS"><a name="id2489502"></a><h2>COMMANDS</h2><p><span class="emphasis"><em>GENERAL INFORMATION</em></span></p><p> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483395"></a><h2>COMMANDS</h2><p><span class="emphasis"><em>GENERAL INFORMATION</em></span></p><p> The <code class="literal">tdbbackup</code> utility can safely be run at any time. It was designed so that it can be used at any time to validate the integrity of tdb files, even during Samba operation. Typical usage for the command will be: @@ -20,16 +20,16 @@ </p><p>tdbbackup -v [-s suffix] *.tdb</p><p> Samba .tdb files are stored in various locations, be sure to run backup all .tdb file on the system. Important files includes: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p> + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p> <code class="literal">secrets.tdb</code> - usual location is in the /usr/local/samba/private directory, or on some systems in /etc/samba. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">passdb.tdb</code> - usual location is in the /usr/local/samba/private directory, or on some systems in /etc/samba. - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + </p></li><li><p> <code class="literal">*.tdb</code> located in the /usr/local/samba/var directory or on some systems in the /var/cache or /var/lib/samba directories. - </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489582"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489593"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483597"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483608"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbdump.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbdump.8.html index 9a5a111951..871926b019 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbdump.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbdump.8.html @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>tdbdump</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="tdbdump"><a name="tdbdump.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>tdbdump — tool for printing the contents of a TDB file</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">tdbdump</code> {filename}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528904"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(1)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">tdbdump</code> is a very simple utility that 'dumps' the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>tdbdump</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="tdbdump.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>tdbdump — tool for printing the contents of a TDB file</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">tdbdump</code> {filename}</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522922"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(1)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">tdbdump</code> is a very simple utility that 'dumps' the contents of a TDB (Trivial DataBase) file to standard output in a human-readable format. </p><p>This tool can be used when debugging problems with TDB files. It is intended for those who are somewhat familiar with Samba internals. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489306"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489317"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483322"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483333"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbtool.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbtool.8.html index 5ef3b48d3f..9acc770dfa 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbtool.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/tdbtool.8.html @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>tdbtool</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="tdbtool"><a name="tdbtool.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>tdbtool — manipulate the contents TDB files</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">tdbtool</code></p></div><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">tdbtool</code> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>tdbtool</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="tdbtool.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>tdbtool — manipulate the contents TDB files</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">tdbtool</code></p></div><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">tdbtool</code> <em class="replaceable"><code>TDBFILE</code></em> [ <em class="replaceable"><code>COMMANDS</code></em> - ...]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528928"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the + ...]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522946"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(1)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">tdbtool</code> a tool for displaying and altering the contents of Samba TDB (Trivial DataBase) files. Each of the commands listed below can be entered interactively or - provided on the command line.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="COMMANDS"><a name="id2489326"></a><h2>COMMANDS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="option">create</code> + provided on the command line.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483342"></a><h2>COMMANDS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="option">create</code> <em class="replaceable"><code>TDBFILE</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>Create a new database named <em class="replaceable"><code>TDBFILE</code></em>. </p></dd><dt><span class="term"><code class="option">open</code> @@ -59,10 +59,10 @@ </p></dd><dt><span class="term"> <code class="option">quit</code> </span></dt><dd><p>Exit <code class="literal">tdbtool</code>. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="CAVEATS"><a name="id2487450"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>The contents of the Samba TDB files are private + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481470"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>The contents of the Samba TDB files are private to the implementation and should not be altered with <code class="literal">tdbtool</code>. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487468"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487479"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481487"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481498"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/testparm.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/testparm.1.html index 46321eff8e..3de1fc02f8 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/testparm.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/testparm.1.html @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>testparm</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="testparm"><a name="testparm.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>testparm — check an smb.conf configuration file for - internal correctness</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">testparm</code> [-s] [-h] [-v] [-L <servername>] [-t <encoding>] {config filename} [hostname hostIP]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489320"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">testparm</code> is a very simple test program +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>testparm</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="testparm.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>testparm — check an smb.conf configuration file for + internal correctness</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">testparm</code> [-s] [-h] [-v] [-L <servername>] [-t <encoding>] {config filename} [hostname hostIP]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483337"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">testparm</code> is a very simple test program to check an <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> configuration file for internal correctness. If this program reports no problems, you can use the configuration file with confidence that <code class="literal">smbd @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ has access to each service. </p><p>If <code class="literal">testparm</code> finds an error in the <code class="filename"> smb.conf</code> file it returns an exit code of 1 to the calling program, else it returns an exit code of 0. This allows shell scripts - to test the output from <code class="literal">testparm</code>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489527"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-s</span></dt><dd><p>Without this option, <code class="literal">testparm</code> + to test the output from <code class="literal">testparm</code>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483544"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-s</span></dt><dd><p>Without this option, <code class="literal">testparm</code> will prompt for a carriage return after printing the service names and before dumping the service definitions.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-V|--version</span></dt><dd><p>Prints the program version number. @@ -41,14 +41,14 @@ this parameter is supplied, the hostIP parameter must also be supplied.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">hostIP</span></dt><dd><p>This is the IP address of the host specified in the previous parameter. This address must be supplied - if the hostname parameter is supplied. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="FILES"><a name="id2489737"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a></span></dt><dd><p>This is usually the name of the configuration + if the hostname parameter is supplied. </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483754"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a></span></dt><dd><p>This is usually the name of the configuration file used by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DIAGNOSTICS"><a name="id2489773"></a><h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2><p>The program will issue a message saying whether the + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483789"></a><h2>DIAGNOSTICS</h2><p>The program will issue a message saying whether the configuration file loaded OK or not. This message may be preceded by errors and warnings if the file did not load. If the file was loaded OK, the program then dumps all known service details - to stdout. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487456"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2487466"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487492"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + to stdout. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481477"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481486"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481512"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/umount.cifs.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/umount.cifs.8.html index 545d6cdbf1..21250881cb 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/umount.cifs.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/umount.cifs.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>umount.cifs</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="umount.cifs"><a name="umount.cifs.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>umount.cifs — for normal, non-root users, to unmount their own Common Internet File System (CIFS) mounts</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">umount.cifs</code> {mount-point} [-nVvhfle]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528921"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>umount.cifs unmounts a Linux CIFS filesystem. It can be invoked +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>umount.cifs</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="umount.cifs.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>umount.cifs — for normal, non-root users, to unmount their own Common Internet File System (CIFS) mounts</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">umount.cifs</code> {mount-point} [-nVvhfle]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522933"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>umount.cifs unmounts a Linux CIFS filesystem. It can be invoked indirectly by the <a class="citerefentry" href="umount.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">umount</span>(8)</span></a> command when umount.cifs is in /sbin directory, unless you specify the "-i" option to umount. Specifying -i to umount avoids execution of umount helpers such as umount.cifs. The umount.cifs command only works in Linux, and the kernel must @@ -11,24 +11,24 @@ by the popular Open Source server Samba. It is possible to set the mode for umount.cifs to setuid root (or equivalently update the /etc/permissions file) to allow non-root users to umount shares to directories for which they have write permission. The umount.cifs utility is typically not needed if unmounts need only be performed by root users, or if user mounts and unmounts -can rely on specifying explicit entries in /etc/fstab See</p><p><a class="citerefentry" href="fstab.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">fstab</span>(5)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489344"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">--verbose</span></dt><dd><p>print additional debugging information</p></dd><dt><span class="term">--no-mtab</span></dt><dd><p>Do not update the mtab even if unmount completes successfully (/proc/mounts will still display the correct information)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="NOTES"><a name="id2489510"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>This command is normally intended to be installed setuid (since root users can already run unmount). An alternative to using umount.cifs is to add specfic entries for the user mounts that you wish a particular user or users to mount and unmount to /etc/fstab</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="CONFIGURATION"><a name="id2489524"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p> +can rely on specifying explicit entries in /etc/fstab See</p><p><a class="citerefentry" href="fstab.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">fstab</span>(5)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483366"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">--verbose</span></dt><dd><p>print additional debugging information</p></dd><dt><span class="term">--no-mtab</span></dt><dd><p>Do not update the mtab even if unmount completes successfully (/proc/mounts will still display the correct information)</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483525"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>This command is normally intended to be installed setuid (since root users can already run unmount). An alternative to using umount.cifs is to add specfic entries for the user mounts that you wish a particular user or users to mount and unmount to /etc/fstab</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483540"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p> The primary mechanism for making configuration changes and for reading debug information for the cifs vfs is via the Linux /proc filesystem. In the directory <code class="filename">/proc/fs/cifs</code> are various configuration files and pseudo files which can display debug information. For more information see the kernel file <code class="filename">fs/cifs/README</code>. -</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="BUGS"><a name="id2489551"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p>At this time umount.cifs does not lock the mount table using the same lock as the umount utility does, so do not attempt to do multiple unmounts from different processes (and in particular unmounts of a cifs mount and another type of filesystem mount at the same time). +</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483567"></a><h2>BUGS</h2><p>At this time umount.cifs does not lock the mount table using the same lock as the umount utility does, so do not attempt to do multiple unmounts from different processes (and in particular unmounts of a cifs mount and another type of filesystem mount at the same time). </p><p>If the same mount point is mounted multiple times by cifs, umount.cifs will remove all of the matching entries from the mount table (although umount.cifs will actually only unmount the last one), rather than only removing the last matching entry in /etc/mtab. The pseudofile /proc/mounts will display correct information though, and the lack of an entry in /etc/mtab does not prevent subsequent unmounts.</p><p> Note that the typical response to a bug report is a suggestion to try the latest version first. So please try doing that first, and always include which versions you use of relevant software when reporting bugs (minimum: umount.cifs (try umount.cifs -V), kernel (see /proc/version) and server type you are trying to contact. -</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489585"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 1.34 of - the cifs vfs filesystem (roughly Linux kernel 2.6.12).</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2489597"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> +</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483601"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 1.34 of + the cifs vfs filesystem (roughly Linux kernel 2.6.12).</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483613"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> Documentation/filesystems/cifs.txt and fs/cifs/README in the linux kernel source tree may contain additional options and information. -</p><p><a class="citerefentry" href="mount.cifs.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">mount.cifs</span>(8)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489618"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>Steve French</p><p>The syntax was loosely based on the umount utility and the manpage was loosely based on that of mount.cifs.8. The man page was created by Steve French</p><p>The maintainer of the Linux cifs vfs and the userspace +</p><p><a class="citerefentry" href="mount.cifs.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">mount.cifs</span>(8)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483634"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>Steve French</p><p>The syntax was loosely based on the umount utility and the manpage was loosely based on that of mount.cifs.8. The man page was created by Steve French</p><p>The maintainer of the Linux cifs vfs and the userspace tool <span class="emphasis"><em>umount.cifs</em></span> is <a class="ulink" href="mailto:sfrench@samba.org" target="_top">Steve French</a>. The <a class="ulink" href="mailto:linux-cifs-client@lists.samba.org" target="_top">Linux CIFS Mailing list</a> is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_acl_tdb.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_acl_tdb.8.html index a7e46c2617..c58f54291a 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_acl_tdb.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_acl_tdb.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_acl_tdb</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_acl_tdb"><a name="vfs_acl_tdb.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_acl_tdb — Save NTFS-ACLs in a tdb file</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = acl_tdb</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_acl_tdb</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_acl_tdb.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_acl_tdb — Save NTFS-ACLs in a tdb file</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = acl_tdb</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_acl_tdb</code> VFS module stores NTFS Access Control Lists (ACLs) in a tdb file. This enables the full mapping of Windows ACLs on Samba @@ -8,9 +8,9 @@ <code class="filename">$LOCKDIR/file_ntacls.tdb</code>. </p><p>Please note that this module is <span class="emphasis"><em>experimental</em></span>! - </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489310"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p> + </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483333"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p> There are no options for <code class="literal">vfs_acl_tdb</code>. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489326"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483349"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_acl_xattr.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_acl_xattr.8.html index b41943399b..b128e1e334 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_acl_xattr.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_acl_xattr.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_acl_xattr</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_acl_xattr"><a name="vfs_acl_xattr.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_acl_xattr — Save NTFS-ACLs in Extended Attributes (EAs)</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = acl_xattr</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_acl_xattr</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_acl_xattr.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_acl_xattr — Save NTFS-ACLs in Extended Attributes (EAs)</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = acl_xattr</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522914"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_acl_xattr</code> VFS module stores NTFS Access Control Lists (ACLs) in Extended Attributes (EAs). This enables the full mapping of Windows ACLs on Samba @@ -12,9 +12,9 @@ </code>). </p><p>Please note that this module is <span class="emphasis"><em>experimental</em></span>! - </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489340"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p> + </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483362"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><p> There are no options for <code class="literal">vfs_acl_xattr</code>. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489355"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483378"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_audit.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_audit.8.html index ff3e1e65af..d38732e2bd 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_audit.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_audit.8.html @@ -1,19 +1,19 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_audit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_audit"><a name="vfs_audit.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_audit — record selected Samba VFS operations in the system log</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = audit</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528896"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_audit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_audit.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_audit — record selected Samba VFS operations in the system log</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = audit</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_audit</code> VFS module records selected client operations to the system log using - <a class="citerefentry" href="syslog.3.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">syslog</span>(3)</span></a>.</p><p>The following Samba VFS operations are recorded:</p><table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"><tr><td>connect</td></tr><tr><td>disconnect</td></tr><tr><td>opendir</td></tr><tr><td>mkdir</td></tr><tr><td>rmdir</td></tr><tr><td>open</td></tr><tr><td>close</td></tr><tr><td>rename</td></tr><tr><td>unlink</td></tr><tr><td>chmod</td></tr><tr><td>fchmod</td></tr><tr><td>chmod_acl</td></tr><tr><td>fchmod_acl</td></tr></table><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489358"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">audit:facility = FACILITY</span></dt><dd><p>Log messages to the named + <a class="citerefentry" href="syslog.3.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">syslog</span>(3)</span></a>.</p><p>The following Samba VFS operations are recorded:</p><table class="simplelist" border="0" summary="Simple list"><tr><td>connect</td></tr><tr><td>disconnect</td></tr><tr><td>opendir</td></tr><tr><td>mkdir</td></tr><tr><td>rmdir</td></tr><tr><td>open</td></tr><tr><td>close</td></tr><tr><td>rename</td></tr><tr><td>unlink</td></tr><tr><td>chmod</td></tr><tr><td>fchmod</td></tr><tr><td>chmod_acl</td></tr><tr><td>fchmod_acl</td></tr></table><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483374"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">audit:facility = FACILITY</span></dt><dd><p>Log messages to the named <a class="citerefentry" href="syslog.3.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">syslog</span>(3)</span></a> facility. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">audit:priority = PRIORITY</span></dt><dd><p>Log messages with the named <a class="citerefentry" href="syslog.3.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">syslog</span>(3)</span></a> priority. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489533"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Log operations on all shares using the LOCAL1 facility + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483547"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Log operations on all shares using the LOCAL1 facility and NOTICE priority:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[global]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = audit</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#AUDIT:FACILITY" target="_top">audit:facility = LOCAL1</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#AUDIT:PRIORITY" target="_top">audit:priority = NOTICE</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489689"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489700"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483704"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483715"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_cacheprime.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_cacheprime.8.html index 10b779648b..d619af90ed 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_cacheprime.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_cacheprime.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_cacheprime</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_cacheprime"><a name="vfs_cacheprime.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_cacheprime — prime the kernel file data cache</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = cacheprime</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_cacheprime</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_cacheprime.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_cacheprime — prime the kernel file data cache</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = cacheprime</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522914"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_cacheprime</code> VFS module reads chunks of file data near the range requested by clients in order to make sure the data is present in the kernel file data cache at @@ -7,20 +7,20 @@ cacheprime:rsize option. All disk read operations are aligned on boundaries that are a multiple of this size. Each range of the file data is primed at most once during the time the client - has the file open. </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489313"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">cacheprime:rsize = BYTES</span></dt><dd><p>The number of bytes with which to prime - the kernel data cache.</p><p>The following suffixes may be applied to BYTES:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">K</code> - BYTES is a number of kilobytes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">M</code> - BYTES is a number of megabytes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">G</code> - BYTES is a number of gigabytes</p></li></ul></div></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489371"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>For a hypothetical disk array, it is necessary to ensure + has the file open. </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483334"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">cacheprime:rsize = BYTES</span></dt><dd><p>The number of bytes with which to prime + the kernel data cache.</p><p>The following suffixes may be applied to BYTES:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">K</code> - BYTES is a number of kilobytes</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">M</code> - BYTES is a number of megabytes</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">G</code> - BYTES is a number of gigabytes</p></li></ul></div></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483392"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>For a hypothetical disk array, it is necessary to ensure that all read operations are of size 1 megabyte (1048576 bytes), and aligned on 1 megabyte boundaries: </p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[hypothetical]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = cacheprime</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CACHEPRIME:RSIZE" target="_top">cacheprime:rsize = 1M</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="CAVEATS"><a name="id2489645"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p><code class="literal">cacheprime</code> is not a a substitute for +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483662"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p><code class="literal">cacheprime</code> is not a a substitute for a general-purpose readahead mechanism. It is intended for use only in very specific environments where disk operations must be aligned and sized to known values (as much as that is possible). - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489663"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489674"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483679"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483690"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_cap.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_cap.8.html index c8007ac4b8..c35653e10a 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_cap.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_cap.8.html @@ -1,17 +1,17 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_cap</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_cap"><a name="vfs_cap.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_cap — CAP encode filenames</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = cap</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528895"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_cap</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_cap.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_cap — CAP encode filenames</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = cap</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522914"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>CAP (Columbia Appletalk Protocol) encoding is a technique for representing non-ASCII filenames in ASCII. The <code class="literal">vfs_cap</code> VFS module translates filenames to and from CAP format, allowing users to name files in their native encoding. </p><p>CAP encoding is most commonly - used in Japanese language environments. </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2528934"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>On a system using GNU libiconv, use CAP encoding to support + used in Japanese language environments. </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522952"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>On a system using GNU libiconv, use CAP encoding to support users in the Shift_JIS locale:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[global]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOSCHARSET" target="_top">dos charset = CP932</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOSCHARSET" target="_top">dos charset = CP932</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = cap</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489355"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489366"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483371"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483381"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_catia.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_catia.8.html index de26b31146..6d7ce35645 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_catia.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_catia.8.html @@ -1,14 +1,14 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_catia</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_catia"><a name="vfs_catia.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_catia — translate illegal characters in Catia filenames</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = catia</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528896"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_catia</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_catia.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_catia — translate illegal characters in Catia filenames</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = catia</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522914"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The Catia CAD package commonly creates filenames that use characters that are illegal in CIFS filenames. The <code class="literal">vfs_catia</code> VFS module implements a fixed character mapping so that these files can be shared with CIFS clients. - </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2528930"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Map Catia filenames on the [CAD] share:</p><pre class="programlisting"> + </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522948"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Map Catia filenames on the [CAD] share:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[CAD]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /data/cad</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = catia</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489341"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489352"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483357"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483368"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_commit.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_commit.8.html index e85a811bb9..06473d78b6 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_commit.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_commit.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_commit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_commit"><a name="vfs_commit.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_commit — flush dirty data at specified intervals</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = commit</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_commit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_commit.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_commit — flush dirty data at specified intervals</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = commit</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_commit</code> VFS module keeps track of the amount of data written to a file and synchronizes it to disk when a specified amount accumulates. @@ -7,18 +7,18 @@ impact of unexpected power loss can be minimized by a small commit:dthresh value. Secondly, write performance can be improved on some systems by flushing file data early and at - regular intervals.</p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489308"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">commit:dthresh = BYTES</span></dt><dd><p>Synchronize file data each time the specified + regular intervals.</p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483330"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">commit:dthresh = BYTES</span></dt><dd><p>Synchronize file data each time the specified number of bytes has been written. - </p><p>The following suffixes may be applied to BYTES:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">K</code> - BYTES is a number of kilobytes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">M</code> - BYTES is a number of megabytes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">G</code> - BYTES is a number of gigabytes</p></li></ul></div></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489367"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Synchronize the file data on the [precious] share after + </p><p>The following suffixes may be applied to BYTES:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">K</code> - BYTES is a number of kilobytes</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">M</code> - BYTES is a number of megabytes</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">G</code> - BYTES is a number of gigabytes</p></li></ul></div></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483389"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Synchronize the file data on the [precious] share after every 512 kilobytes (524288 bytes) of data is written:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[precious]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /data/precious</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = commit</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#COMMIT:DTHRESH" target="_top">commit:dthresh = 512K</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="CAVEATS"><a name="id2489653"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>On some systems, the data synchronization performed by +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483668"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>On some systems, the data synchronization performed by <code class="literal">commit</code> may reduce performance. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489669"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489680"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483684"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483695"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_default_quota.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_default_quota.8.html index eb92622a48..eb075e80eb 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_default_quota.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_default_quota.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_default_quota</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_default_quota"><a name="vfs_default_quota.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_default_quota — store default quota records for Windows clients</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = default_quota</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528904"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_default_quota</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_default_quota.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_default_quota — store default quota records for Windows clients</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = default_quota</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>Many common quota implementations only store quotas for users and groups, but do not store a default quota. The @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ refuses to update them. <code class="literal">vfs_default_quota</code> maps the default quota to the quota record of a user. By default the root user is taken because quota limits for root are typically - not enforced.</p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489315"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">default_quota:uid = UID</span></dt><dd><p>UID specifies the user ID of the quota record where the + not enforced.</p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483336"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">default_quota:uid = UID</span></dt><dd><p>UID specifies the user ID of the quota record where the default user quota values are stored. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">default_quota:gid = GID</span></dt><dd><p>GID specifies the group ID of the quota record where the default group quota values are stored. @@ -21,15 +21,15 @@ quota record is storing the default group quota will be reported as having a quota of NO_LIMIT. Otherwise, the stored values will be reported. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489507"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Store the default quota record in the quota record for + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483527"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Store the default quota record in the quota record for the user with ID 65535 and report that user as having no quota limits:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[global]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = default_quota</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULT_QUOTA:UID" target="_top">default_quota:uid = 65535</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULT_QUOTA:UIDNOLIMIT" target="_top">default_quota:uid nolimit = yes</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489661"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489672"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483681"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483691"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_dirsort.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_dirsort.8.html index ce061b3c28..3d336d17ac 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_dirsort.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_dirsort.8.html @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_dirsort</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_dirsort"><a name="vfs_dirsort.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_dirsort — Sort directory contents</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = dirsort</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_dirsort</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_dirsort.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_dirsort — Sort directory contents</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = dirsort</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_dirsort</code> module sorts directory entries alphabetically before sending them to the client.</p><p>Please be aware that adding this module might have negative - performance implications for large directories.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2528937"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Sort directories for all shares:</p><pre class="programlisting"> + performance implications for large directories.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522949"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Sort directories for all shares:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[global]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = dirsort</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489326"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.3 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489337"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483348"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.3 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483359"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_extd_audit.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_extd_audit.8.html index 8477fc885f..fcd4124cae 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_extd_audit.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_extd_audit.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_extd_audit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_extd_audit"><a name="vfs_extd_audit.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_extd_audit — record selected Samba VFS operations</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = extd_audit</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_extd_audit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_extd_audit.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_extd_audit — record selected Samba VFS operations</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = extd_audit</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522914"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">extd_audit</code> VFS module records selected client operations to both the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> log and @@ -7,8 +7,8 @@ <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> log, <code class="literal">vfs_extd_audit</code> is identical to <a class="citerefentry" href="vfs_audit.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">vfs_audit</span>(8)</span></a>. - </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489334"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489345"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483357"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483368"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_fake_perms.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_fake_perms.8.html index 5643c686d8..712cc7171c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_fake_perms.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_fake_perms.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_fake_perms</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_fake_perms"><a name="vfs_fake_perms.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_fake_perms — enable read only Roaming Profiles</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = fake_perms</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_fake_perms</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_fake_perms.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_fake_perms — enable read only Roaming Profiles</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = fake_perms</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522914"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_fake_perms</code> VFS module was created to allow Roaming Profile files and directories to be set (on the Samba server under UNIX) as read only. This module will, @@ -6,12 +6,12 @@ the Profile files and directories are writeable. This satisfies the client even though the files will never be overwritten as the client logs out or shuts down. - </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2528940"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><pre class="programlisting"> + </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522952"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[Profiles]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /profiles</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = fake_perms</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489336"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489347"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483358"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483369"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_fileid.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_fileid.8.html index 82d35b192d..5752daa024 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_fileid.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_fileid.8.html @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_fileid</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_fileid"><a name="vfs_fileid.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_fileid — Generates file_id structs with unique device id values for - cluster setups</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = fileid</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528904"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_fileid</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_fileid.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_fileid — Generates file_id structs with unique device id values for + cluster setups</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = fileid</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522916"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>Samba uses file_id structs to uniquely identify files for locking purpose. By default the file_id contains the device @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ <code class="literal">SMB_VFS_FILE_ID_CREATE()</code> operation and generates the device number based on the configured algorithm (see the "fileid:algorithm" option). - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489304"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">fileid:algorithm = ALGORITHM</span></dt><dd><p>Available algorithms are <code class="literal">fsname</code> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483326"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">fileid:algorithm = ALGORITHM</span></dt><dd><p>Available algorithms are <code class="literal">fsname</code> and <code class="literal">fsid</code>. The default value is <code class="literal">fsname</code>. </p><p>The <code class="literal">fsname</code> algorithm generates @@ -20,13 +20,13 @@ </p></dd><dt><span class="term">fileid:mapping = ALGORITHM</span></dt><dd><p>This option is the legacy version of the <code class="literal">fileid:algorithm</code> option, which was used in earlier versions of fileid mapping feature in custom Samba 3.0 versions. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489529"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Usage of the <code class="literal">fileid</code> module with the + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483543"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Usage of the <code class="literal">fileid</code> module with the <code class="literal">fsid</code> algorithm:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[global]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = fileid</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FILEID:ALGORITHM" target="_top">fileid:algorithm = fsid</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489685"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.2 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489696"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483700"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.2 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483711"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_full_audit.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_full_audit.8.html index 5872eda656..d2806a8417 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_full_audit.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_full_audit.8.html @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_full_audit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_full_audit"><a name="vfs_full_audit.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_full_audit — record Samba VFS operations in the system log</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = full_audit</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528904"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_full_audit</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_full_audit.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_full_audit — record Samba VFS operations in the system log</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = full_audit</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_full_audit</code> VFS module records selected client operations to the system log using <a class="citerefentry" href="syslog.3.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">syslog</span>(3)</span></a>.</p><p><code class="literal">vfs_full_audit</code> is able to record the - complete set of Samba VFS operations:</p><table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"><tr><td>aio_cancel</td></tr><tr><td>aio_error</td></tr><tr><td>aio_fsync</td></tr><tr><td>aio_read</td></tr><tr><td>aio_return</td></tr><tr><td>aio_suspend</td></tr><tr><td>aio_write</td></tr><tr><td>chdir</td></tr><tr><td>chflags</td></tr><tr><td>chmod</td></tr><tr><td>chmod_acl</td></tr><tr><td>chown</td></tr><tr><td>close</td></tr><tr><td>closedir</td></tr><tr><td>connect</td></tr><tr><td>disconnect</td></tr><tr><td>disk_free</td></tr><tr><td>fchmod</td></tr><tr><td>fchmod_acl</td></tr><tr><td>fchown</td></tr><tr><td>fget_nt_acl</td></tr><tr><td>fgetxattr</td></tr><tr><td>flistxattr</td></tr><tr><td>fremovexattr</td></tr><tr><td>fset_nt_acl</td></tr><tr><td>fsetxattr</td></tr><tr><td>fstat</td></tr><tr><td>fsync</td></tr><tr><td>ftruncate</td></tr><tr><td>get_nt_acl</td></tr><tr><td>get_quota</td></tr><tr><td>get_shadow_copy_data</td></tr><tr><td>getlock</td></tr><tr><td>getwd</td></tr><tr><td>getxattr</td></tr><tr><td>kernel_flock</td></tr><tr><td>lgetxattr</td></tr><tr><td>link</td></tr><tr><td>linux_setlease</td></tr><tr><td>listxattr</td></tr><tr><td>llistxattr</td></tr><tr><td>lock</td></tr><tr><td>lremovexattr</td></tr><tr><td>lseek</td></tr><tr><td>lsetxattr</td></tr><tr><td>lstat</td></tr><tr><td>mkdir</td></tr><tr><td>mknod</td></tr><tr><td>open</td></tr><tr><td>opendir</td></tr><tr><td>pread</td></tr><tr><td>pwrite</td></tr><tr><td>read</td></tr><tr><td>readdir</td></tr><tr><td>readlink</td></tr><tr><td>realpath</td></tr><tr><td>removexattr</td></tr><tr><td>rename</td></tr><tr><td>rewinddir</td></tr><tr><td>rmdir</td></tr><tr><td>seekdir</td></tr><tr><td>sendfile</td></tr><tr><td>set_nt_acl</td></tr><tr><td>set_quota</td></tr><tr><td>setxattr</td></tr><tr><td>stat</td></tr><tr><td>statvfs</td></tr><tr><td>symlink</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_add_perm</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_clear_perms</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_create_entry</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_delete_def_file</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_free_acl</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_free_qualifier</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_free_text</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_entry</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_fd</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_file</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_perm</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_permset</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_qualifier</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_tag_type</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_init</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_set_fd</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_set_file</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_set_permset</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_set_qualifier</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_set_tag_type</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_to_text</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_valid</td></tr><tr><td>telldir</td></tr><tr><td>unlink</td></tr><tr><td>utime</td></tr><tr><td>write</td></tr></table><p>In addition to these operations, + complete set of Samba VFS operations:</p><table class="simplelist" border="0" summary="Simple list"><tr><td>aio_cancel</td></tr><tr><td>aio_error</td></tr><tr><td>aio_fsync</td></tr><tr><td>aio_read</td></tr><tr><td>aio_return</td></tr><tr><td>aio_suspend</td></tr><tr><td>aio_write</td></tr><tr><td>chdir</td></tr><tr><td>chflags</td></tr><tr><td>chmod</td></tr><tr><td>chmod_acl</td></tr><tr><td>chown</td></tr><tr><td>close</td></tr><tr><td>closedir</td></tr><tr><td>connect</td></tr><tr><td>disconnect</td></tr><tr><td>disk_free</td></tr><tr><td>fchmod</td></tr><tr><td>fchmod_acl</td></tr><tr><td>fchown</td></tr><tr><td>fget_nt_acl</td></tr><tr><td>fgetxattr</td></tr><tr><td>flistxattr</td></tr><tr><td>fremovexattr</td></tr><tr><td>fset_nt_acl</td></tr><tr><td>fsetxattr</td></tr><tr><td>fstat</td></tr><tr><td>fsync</td></tr><tr><td>ftruncate</td></tr><tr><td>get_nt_acl</td></tr><tr><td>get_quota</td></tr><tr><td>get_shadow_copy_data</td></tr><tr><td>getlock</td></tr><tr><td>getwd</td></tr><tr><td>getxattr</td></tr><tr><td>kernel_flock</td></tr><tr><td>lgetxattr</td></tr><tr><td>link</td></tr><tr><td>linux_setlease</td></tr><tr><td>listxattr</td></tr><tr><td>llistxattr</td></tr><tr><td>lock</td></tr><tr><td>lremovexattr</td></tr><tr><td>lseek</td></tr><tr><td>lsetxattr</td></tr><tr><td>lstat</td></tr><tr><td>mkdir</td></tr><tr><td>mknod</td></tr><tr><td>open</td></tr><tr><td>opendir</td></tr><tr><td>pread</td></tr><tr><td>pwrite</td></tr><tr><td>read</td></tr><tr><td>readdir</td></tr><tr><td>readlink</td></tr><tr><td>realpath</td></tr><tr><td>removexattr</td></tr><tr><td>rename</td></tr><tr><td>rewinddir</td></tr><tr><td>rmdir</td></tr><tr><td>seekdir</td></tr><tr><td>sendfile</td></tr><tr><td>set_nt_acl</td></tr><tr><td>set_quota</td></tr><tr><td>setxattr</td></tr><tr><td>stat</td></tr><tr><td>statvfs</td></tr><tr><td>symlink</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_add_perm</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_clear_perms</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_create_entry</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_delete_def_file</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_free_acl</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_free_qualifier</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_free_text</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_entry</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_fd</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_file</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_perm</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_permset</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_qualifier</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_get_tag_type</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_init</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_set_fd</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_set_file</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_set_permset</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_set_qualifier</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_set_tag_type</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_to_text</td></tr><tr><td>sys_acl_valid</td></tr><tr><td>telldir</td></tr><tr><td>unlink</td></tr><tr><td>utime</td></tr><tr><td>write</td></tr></table><p>In addition to these operations, <code class="literal">vfs_full_audit</code> recognizes the special operation names "all" and "none ", which refer to all the VFS operations and none of the VFS operations respectively. @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ format consisting of fields separated by '|' characters. The format is: </p><pre class="programlisting"> smbd_audit: PREFIX|OPERATION|RESULT|FILE - </pre><p>The record fields are:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">PREFIX</code> - the result of the full_audit:prefix string after variable substitutions</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">OPERATION</code> - the name of the VFS operation</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">RESULT</code> - whether the operation succeeded or failed</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">FILE</code> - the name of the file or directory the operation was performed on</p></li></ul></div><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2487512"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">vfs_full_audit:prefix = STRING</span></dt><dd><p>Prepend audit messages with STRING. STRING is + </pre><p>The record fields are:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">PREFIX</code> - the result of the full_audit:prefix string after variable substitutions</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">OPERATION</code> - the name of the VFS operation</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">RESULT</code> - whether the operation succeeded or failed</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">FILE</code> - the name of the file or directory the operation was performed on</p></li></ul></div><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481531"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">vfs_full_audit:prefix = STRING</span></dt><dd><p>Prepend audit messages with STRING. STRING is processed for standard substitution variables listed in <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>. The default prefix is "%u|%I". </p></dd><dt><span class="term">vfs_full_audit:success = LIST</span></dt><dd><p>LIST is a list of VFS operations that should be @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ </p></dd><dt><span class="term">full_audit:priority = PRIORITY</span></dt><dd><p>Log messages with the named <a class="citerefentry" href="syslog.3.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">syslog</span>(3)</span></a> priority. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2487618"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Log file and directory open operations on the [records] + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481637"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Log file and directory open operations on the [records] share using the LOCAL7 facility and ALERT priority, including the username and IP address:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[records]</code></em> @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FULL_AUDIT:FAILURE" target="_top">full_audit:failure = all</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FULL_AUDIT:FACILITY" target="_top">full_audit:facility = LOCAL7</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FULL_AUDIT:PRIORITY" target="_top">full_audit:priority = ALERT</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487822"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487833"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481840"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481851"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_gpfs.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_gpfs.8.html index cd6ba8e0a7..cbc958dd3c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_gpfs.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_gpfs.8.html @@ -1,35 +1,35 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_gpfs</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_gpfs"><a name="vfs_gpfs.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_gpfs — gpfs specific samba extensions like acls and prealloc</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = gpfs</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528896"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_gpfs</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_gpfs.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_gpfs — gpfs specific samba extensions like acls and prealloc</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = gpfs</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">gpfs</code> VFS module is the home for all gpfs extensions that Samba requires for proper integration with GPFS. It uses the GPL library interfaces provided by GPFS. </p><p>Currently the gpfs vfs module provides extensions in following areas : - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p>NFSv4 ACL Interfaces with configurable options for GPFS</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Kernel oplock support on GPFS</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>Lease support on GPFS</p></li></ul></div><p> + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>NFSv4 ACL Interfaces with configurable options for GPFS</p></li><li><p>Kernel oplock support on GPFS</p></li><li><p>Lease support on GPFS</p></li></ul></div><p> </p><p><code class="literal">NOTE:</code>This module follows the posix-acl behaviour and hence allows permission stealing via chown. Samba might allow at a later point in time, to restrict the chown via this module as such restrictions are the responsibility of the underlying filesystem than of Samba. - </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489332"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">nfs4:mode = [ simple | special ]</span></dt><dd><p> + </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483348"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">nfs4:mode = [ simple | special ]</span></dt><dd><p> Enable/Disable substitution of special IDs on GPFS. This parameter should not affect the windows users in anyway. It only ensures that Samba sets the special IDs - OWNER@ and GROUP@ ( mappings to simple uids ) that are relevant to GPFS. - </p><p>The following MODEs are understood by the module:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">simple(default)</code> - do not use special IDs in GPFS ACEs</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">special</code> - use special IDs in GPFS ACEs. </p></li></ul></div></dd><dt><span class="term">nfs4:acedup = [dontcare|reject|ignore|merge]</span></dt><dd><p> + </p><p>The following MODEs are understood by the module:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">simple(default)</code> - do not use special IDs in GPFS ACEs</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">special</code> - use special IDs in GPFS ACEs. </p></li></ul></div></dd><dt><span class="term">nfs4:acedup = [dontcare|reject|ignore|merge]</span></dt><dd><p> This parameter configures how Samba handles duplicate ACEs encountered in GPFS ACLs. GPFS allows/creates duplicate ACE for different bits for same ID. - </p><p>Following is the behaviour of Samba for different values :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">dontcare (default)</code> - copy the ACEs as they come</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">reject</code> - stop operation and exit with error on ACL set op</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">ignore</code> - don't include the second matching ACE</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">merge</code> - bitwise OR the 2 ace.flag fields and 2 ace.mask fields of the 2 duplicate ACEs into 1 ACE</p></li></ul></div></dd><dt><span class="term">nfs4:chown = [yes|no]</span></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows enabling or disabling the chown supported + </p><p>Following is the behaviour of Samba for different values :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">dontcare (default)</code> - copy the ACEs as they come</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">reject</code> - stop operation and exit with error on ACL set op</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">ignore</code> - don't include the second matching ACE</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">merge</code> - bitwise OR the 2 ace.flag fields and 2 ace.mask fields of the 2 duplicate ACEs into 1 ACE</p></li></ul></div></dd><dt><span class="term">nfs4:chown = [yes|no]</span></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows enabling or disabling the chown supported by the underlying filesystem. This parameter should be enabled with care as it might leave your system insecure.</p><p>Some filesystems allow chown as a) giving b) stealing. It is the latter - that is considered a risk.</p><p>Following is the behaviour of Samba for different values : </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">yes</code> - Enable chown if as supported by the under filesystem</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">no (default)</code> - Disable chown</p></li></ul></div></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489621"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>A GPFS mount can be exported via Samba as follows :</p><pre class="programlisting"> + that is considered a risk.</p><p>Following is the behaviour of Samba for different values : </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">yes</code> - Enable chown if as supported by the under filesystem</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">no (default)</code> - Disable chown</p></li></ul></div></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483635"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>A GPFS mount can be exported via Samba as follows :</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[samba_gpfs_share]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = gpfs</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /test/gpfs_mount</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NFS4:MODE" target="_top">nfs4: mode = special</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NFS4:ACEDUP" target="_top">nfs4: acedup = merge</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="CAVEATS"><a name="id2487453"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>The gpfs gpl libraries are required by <code class="literal">gpfs</code> VFS +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481471"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>The gpfs gpl libraries are required by <code class="literal">gpfs</code> VFS module during both compilation and runtime. Also this VFS module is tested to work on SLES 9/10 and RHEL 4.4 - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487470"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487481"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481488"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481499"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The GPFS VFS module was created with contributions from diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_netatalk.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_netatalk.8.html index fa708cf07e..16b8fb0f4c 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_netatalk.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_netatalk.8.html @@ -1,15 +1,15 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_netatalk</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_netatalk"><a name="vfs_netatalk.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_netatalk — hide .AppleDouble files from CIFS clients</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = netatalk</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_netatalk</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_netatalk.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_netatalk — hide .AppleDouble files from CIFS clients</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = netatalk</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522914"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_netatalk</code> VFS module dynamically hides .AppleDouble files, preventing spurious errors on some CIFS clients. .AppleDouble files may be created by historic - implementations of AFP (Apple Filing Protocol) on servers. </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2528937"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Hide .AppleDouble files on the [data] share:</p><pre class="programlisting"> + implementations of AFP (Apple Filing Protocol) on servers. </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522949"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Hide .AppleDouble files on the [data] share:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[data]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = netatalk</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="CAVEATS"><a name="id2489327"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>This module is largely historic and unlikely to be of use +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483350"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>This module is largely historic and unlikely to be of use in modern networks since current Apple systems are able to mount CIFS shares natively. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489339"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489350"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483362"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483373"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_notify_fam.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_notify_fam.8.html index 11db4a7e73..f6447ed2bf 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_notify_fam.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_notify_fam.8.html @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_notify_fam</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_notify_fam"><a name="vfs_notify_fam.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_notify_fam — FAM support for file change notifications</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = notify_fam</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_notify_fam</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_notify_fam.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_notify_fam — FAM support for file change notifications</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = notify_fam</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522914"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_notify_fam</code> module makes use of the system FAM (File Alteration Monitor) daemon to implement file change notifications for Windows clients. FAM is generally - present only on IRIX and some BSD systems.</p><p>This module is not stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2528937"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Support FAM notifications globally:</p><pre class="programlisting"> + present only on IRIX and some BSD systems.</p><p>This module is not stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522948"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Support FAM notifications globally:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[global]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = notify_fam</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489326"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489337"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483349"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483360"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_prealloc.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_prealloc.8.html index 9f568778c3..dd5de32544 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_prealloc.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_prealloc.8.html @@ -1,22 +1,22 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_prealloc</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_prealloc"><a name="vfs_prealloc.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_prealloc — preallocate matching files to a predetermined size</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = prealloc</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528904"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_prealloc</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_prealloc.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_prealloc — preallocate matching files to a predetermined size</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = prealloc</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_prealloc</code> VFS module preallocates files to a specified size each time a new file is created. This is useful in environments where files are of a predetermined size will be written to a disk subsystem where extending file - allocations is expensive. </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2528938"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">prealloc:EXT = BYTES</span></dt><dd><p>Preallocate all files with the extension EXT to + allocations is expensive. </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522950"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">prealloc:EXT = BYTES</span></dt><dd><p>Preallocate all files with the extension EXT to the size specified by BYTES. - </p><p>The following suffixes may be applied to BYTES:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">K</code> - BYTES is a number of kilobytes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">M</code> - BYTES is a number of megabytes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">G</code> - BYTES is a number of gigabytes</p></li></ul></div></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489356"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>A process writes TIFF files to a Samba share, and the + </p><p>The following suffixes may be applied to BYTES:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">K</code> - BYTES is a number of kilobytes</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">M</code> - BYTES is a number of megabytes</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">G</code> - BYTES is a number of gigabytes</p></li></ul></div></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483378"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>A process writes TIFF files to a Samba share, and the is known these files will almost always be around 4 megabytes (4194304 bytes): </p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[frames]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /data/frames</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = prealloc</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PREALLOC:TIFF" target="_top">prealloc:tiff = 4M</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="CAVEATS"><a name="id2489643"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p><code class="literal">vfs_prealloc</code> is not supported on all +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483658"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p><code class="literal">vfs_prealloc</code> is not supported on all platforms and filesystems. Currently only XFS filesystems on Linux and IRIX are supported. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489659"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489670"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483674"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483686"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_preopen.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_preopen.8.html index af807343c1..16b4e48563 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_preopen.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_preopen.8.html @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_preopen</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_preopen"><a name="vfs_preopen.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_preopen — Hide read latencies for applications reading numbered files</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = preopen</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528904"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_preopen</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_preopen.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_preopen — Hide read latencies for applications reading numbered files</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = preopen</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522916"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>This module assists applications that want to read numbered files in sequence with very strict latency requirements. One area where this happens in video streaming applications that want to read one file per frame.</p><p>When you use this module, a number of helper processes is started that speculatively open files and read a number of bytes to prime the file system cache, so that later on when the real - application's request comes along, no disk access is necessary.</p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2528940"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">preopen:names = /pattern/</span></dt><dd><p> + application's request comes along, no disk access is necessary.</p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522952"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">preopen:names = /pattern/</span></dt><dd><p> preopen:names specifies the file name pattern which should trigger the preopen helpers to do their work. We assume that the files are numbered incrementally. So if your file names @@ -19,8 +19,8 @@ </p></dd><dt><span class="term">preopen:queuelen = NUM-FILES</span></dt><dd><p> Number of files that should be speculatively opened. Defaults to the 10 subsequent files. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489375"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.3 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489518"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483396"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.3 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483532"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The PREOPEN VFS module was created with contributions from diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_readahead.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_readahead.8.html index b0725dcde1..1f54fc1f16 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_readahead.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_readahead.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_readahead</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_readahead"><a name="vfs_readahead.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_readahead — pre-load the kernel buffer cache</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = readahead</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_readahead</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_readahead.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_readahead — pre-load the kernel buffer cache</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = readahead</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522914"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>This <code class="literal">vfs_readahead</code> VFS module detects read requests at multiples of a given offset (hex 0x80000 by default) and then tells the kernel via either the readahead @@ -12,14 +12,14 @@ readahead:length option. By default this is set to the same value as the readahead:offset option and if not set explicitly will use the current value of - readahead:offset.</p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489321"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><p>The following suffixes may be applied to BYTES:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">K</code> - BYTES is a number of kilobytes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">M</code> - BYTES is a number of megabytes</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">G</code> - BYTES is a number of gigabytes</p></li></ul></div><dl><dt><span class="term">readahead:offset = BYTES</span></dt><dd><p>The offset multiple that causes readahead to be + readahead:offset.</p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483343"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><p>The following suffixes may be applied to BYTES:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">K</code> - BYTES is a number of kilobytes</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">M</code> - BYTES is a number of megabytes</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">G</code> - BYTES is a number of gigabytes</p></li></ul></div><dl><dt><span class="term">readahead:offset = BYTES</span></dt><dd><p>The offset multiple that causes readahead to be requested of the kernel buffer cache.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">readahead:length = BYTES</span></dt><dd><p>The number of bytes requested to be read into the kernel buffer cache on each - readahead call.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489527"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><pre class="programlisting"> + readahead call.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483542"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[hypothetical]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = readahead</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489656"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489667"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483672"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483683"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_readonly.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_readonly.8.html index 183dde24f4..0ac6274d55 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_readonly.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_readonly.8.html @@ -1,15 +1,15 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_readonly</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_readonly"><a name="vfs_readonly.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_readonly — make a Samba share read only for a specified time period</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = readonly</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528904"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_readonly</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_readonly.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_readonly — make a Samba share read only for a specified time period</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = readonly</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_readonly</code> VFS module marks a share as read only for all clients connecting within the configured time period. Clients connecting during this time will be denied write access to all files in the share, irrespective of ther - actual access privileges.</p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2528939"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">readonly:period = BEGIN, END</span></dt><dd><p>Only mark the share as read only if the client + actual access privileges.</p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522950"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">readonly:period = BEGIN, END</span></dt><dd><p>Only mark the share as read only if the client connection was made between the times marked by the BEGIN and END date specifiers. The syntax of these date specifiers is the same as that accepted by the -d option of GNU <a class="citerefentry" href="date.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">date</span>(1)</span></a>. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489334"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Mark all shares read only:</p><pre class="programlisting"> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483356"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Mark all shares read only:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[global]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = readonly</a> </pre><p>Mark the [backup] share as read only during business hours:</p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /readonly</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = readonly</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY:PERIOD" target="_top">readonly:period = readonly:period = "today 9:00","today 17:00"</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489644"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489655"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483659"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483669"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_recycle.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_recycle.8.html index ab294231a7..06906c2a1b 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_recycle.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_recycle.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_recycle</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_recycle"><a name="vfs_recycle.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_recycle — Samba VFS recycle bin</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = recycle</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528903"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_recycle</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_recycle.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_recycle — Samba VFS recycle bin</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = recycle</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_recycle</code> intercepts file deletion requests and moves the affected files to a temporary repository rather than deleting them immediately. This gives the same effect @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ of the created directory depends on recycle:repository. Users can recover files from the recycle bin. If the recycle:keeptree option has been specified, deleted files will be found in a path - identical with that from which the file was deleted. </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489309"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">recycle:repository = PATH</span></dt><dd><p>Path of the directory where deleted files should be moved. + identical with that from which the file was deleted. </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522952"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">recycle:repository = PATH</span></dt><dd><p>Path of the directory where deleted files should be moved. </p><p>If this option is not set, the default path .recycle is used. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">recycle:directory_mode = MODE</span></dt><dd><p>Set MODE to the octal mode the recycle repository should be created with. The recycle repository will be @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ </p></dd><dt><span class="term">recycle:noversions = LIST</span></dt><dd><p>Specifies a list of paths (wildcards such as * and ? are supported) for which no versioning should be used. Only useful when recycle:versions is enabled. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489648"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Move files "deleted" on <em class="parameter"><code>share</code></em> to + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483663"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Move files "deleted" on <em class="parameter"><code>share</code></em> to <em class="parameter"><code>/data/share/.recycle</code></em> instead of deleting them: </p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[share]</code></em> @@ -56,8 +56,8 @@ <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#RECYCLE:REPOSITORY" target="_top">recycle:repository = .recycle</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#RECYCLE:KEEPTREE" target="_top">recycle:keeptree = yes</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#RECYCLE:VERSIONS" target="_top">recycle:versions = yes</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487496"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487507"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481515"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481526"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_shadow_copy.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_shadow_copy.8.html index 56f419cd2b..8f58918b07 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_shadow_copy.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_shadow_copy.8.html @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_shadow_copy</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_shadow_copy"><a name="vfs_shadow_copy.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_shadow_copy — Make a Samba share read only for a specified time period</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = shadow_copy</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528905"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_shadow_copy</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_shadow_copy.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_shadow_copy — Make a Samba share read only for a specified time period</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = shadow_copy</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy</code> VFS module functionality that is similar to Microsoft Shadow Copy services. When setup properly, this module allows Microsoft Shadow Copy clients to browse "shadow copies" on Samba shares. - </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="CONFIGURATION"><a name="id2528938"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p><code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy</code> relies on a filesystem + </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522949"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p><code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy</code> relies on a filesystem snapshot implementation. Many common filesystems have native support for this. </p><p>Filesystem snapshots must be mounted on @@ -11,22 +11,22 @@ <code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy</code>. The snapshot mount points must be immediate children of a the directory being shared.</p><p>The snapshot naming convention is @GMT-YYYY.MM.DD-hh.mm.ss, where: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">YYYY</code> is the 4 digit year</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">MM</code> is the 2 digit month</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">DD</code> is the 2 digit day</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">hh</code> is the 2 digit hour</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">mm</code> is the 2 digit minute</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">ss</code> is the 2 digit second.</p></li></ul></div><p> + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">YYYY</code> is the 4 digit year</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">MM</code> is the 2 digit month</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">DD</code> is the 2 digit day</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">hh</code> is the 2 digit hour</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">mm</code> is the 2 digit minute</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">ss</code> is the 2 digit second.</p></li></ul></div><p> </p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy</code> snapshot naming convention can be produced with the following <a class="citerefentry" href="date.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">date</span>(1)</span></a> command: </p><pre class="programlisting"> TZ=GMT date +@GMT-%Y.%m.%d-%H.%M.%S - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489536"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Add shadow copy support to user home directories:</p><pre class="programlisting"> + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483556"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Add shadow copy support to user home directories:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[homes]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = shadow_copy</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="CAVEATS"><a name="id2489671"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>This is not a backup, archival, or version control solution. +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483690"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>This is not a backup, archival, or version control solution. </p><p>With Samba or Windows servers, <code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy</code> is designed to be an end-user tool only. It does not replace or enhance your backup and archival solutions and should in no way be considered as such. Additionally, if you need version control, implement a - version control system.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489695"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489706"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + version control system.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483714"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.0.25 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483726"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_shadow_copy2.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_shadow_copy2.8.html index f78e9443f3..3447f906a0 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_shadow_copy2.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_shadow_copy2.8.html @@ -1,14 +1,14 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_shadow_copy2</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_shadow_copy2"><a name="vfs_shadow_copy2.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_shadow_copy2 — Expose snapshots to Windows clients as shadow copies.</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = shadow_copy2</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528905"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_shadow_copy2</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_shadow_copy2.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_shadow_copy2 — Expose snapshots to Windows clients as shadow copies.</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = shadow_copy2</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy2</code> VFS module functionality that is similar to Microsoft Shadow Copy services. When setup properly, this module allows Microsoft Shadow Copy clients to browse "shadow copies" on Samba shares. </p><p>This is a 2nd implementation of a shadow copy module. This - version has the following features:</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol class="orderedlist" type="1"><li class="listitem"><p>You don't need to populate your shares with symlinks to the + version has the following features:</p><div class="orderedlist"><ol type="1"><li><p>You don't need to populate your shares with symlinks to the snapshots. This can be very important when you have thousands of - shares, or use [homes].</p></li><li class="listitem"><p>The inode number of the files is altered so it is different + shares, or use [homes].</p></li><li><p>The inode number of the files is altered so it is different from the original. This allows the 'restore' button to work - without a sharing violation.</p></li></ol></div><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="CONFIGURATION"><a name="id2489330"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p><code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy2</code> relies on a filesystem + without a sharing violation.</p></li></ol></div><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483351"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p><code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy2</code> relies on a filesystem snapshot implementation. Many common filesystems have native support for this. </p><p>Filesystem snapshots must be mounted on @@ -16,12 +16,12 @@ <code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy2</code>. The snapshot mount points must be immediate children of a the directory being shared.</p><p>The snapshot naming convention is @GMT-YYYY.MM.DD-hh.mm.ss, where: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">YYYY</code> is the 4 digit year</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">MM</code> is the 2 digit month</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">DD</code> is the 2 digit day</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">hh</code> is the 2 digit hour</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">mm</code> is the 2 digit minute</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">ss</code> is the 2 digit second.</p></li></ul></div><p> + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">YYYY</code> is the 4 digit year</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">MM</code> is the 2 digit month</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">DD</code> is the 2 digit day</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">hh</code> is the 2 digit hour</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">mm</code> is the 2 digit minute</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">ss</code> is the 2 digit second.</p></li></ul></div><p> </p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy2</code> snapshot naming convention can be produced with the following <a class="citerefentry" href="date.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">date</span>(1)</span></a> command: </p><pre class="programlisting"> TZ=GMT date +@GMT-%Y.%m.%d-%H.%M.%S - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489564"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">shadow:snapdir = SNAPDIR + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483583"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">shadow:snapdir = SNAPDIR </span></dt><dd><p>Path to the directory where snapshots are kept. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">shadow:basedir = BASEDIR </span></dt><dd><p>Path to the base directory that snapshots are from. @@ -34,19 +34,19 @@ files (such as happens with GPFS snapshots). If you don't set this option then the 'restore' button in the shadow copy UI will fail with a sharing violation. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489631"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Add shadow copy support to user home directories:</p><pre class="programlisting"> + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483651"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>Add shadow copy support to user home directories:</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[homes]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = shadow_copy2</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHADOW:SNAPDIR" target="_top">shadow:snapdir = /data/snaphots</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHADOW:BASEDIR" target="_top">shadow:basedir = /data/home</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="CAVEATS"><a name="id2487457"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>This is not a backup, archival, or version control solution. +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481475"></a><h2>CAVEATS</h2><p>This is not a backup, archival, or version control solution. </p><p>With Samba or Windows servers, <code class="literal">vfs_shadow_copy2</code> is designed to be an end-user tool only. It does not replace or enhance your backup and archival solutions and should in no way be considered as such. Additionally, if you need version control, implement a - version control system.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487480"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.2.7 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487491"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + version control system.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481498"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.2.7 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481509"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8.html index d3fde420db..17cc96616d 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8.html @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smb_traffic_analyzer</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="smb_traffic_analyzer"><a name="vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer — log Samba VFS read and write operations through a socket - to a helper application</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = smb_traffic_analyzer</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528898"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smb_traffic_analyzer</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer — log Samba VFS read and write operations through a socket + to a helper application</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = smb_traffic_analyzer</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522909"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer</code> VFS module logs client write and read operations on a Samba server and sends this data over a socket to a helper program, which feeds a SQL database. More @@ -7,15 +7,15 @@ homepage of the project at: http://holger123.wordpress.com/smb-traffic-analyzer/ </p><p><code class="literal">vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer</code> currently is aware - of the following VFS operations:</p><table border="0" summary="Simple list" class="simplelist"><tr><td>write</td></tr><tr><td>pwrite</td></tr><tr><td>read</td></tr><tr><td>pread</td></tr></table><p><code class="literal">vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer</code> sends the following data + of the following VFS operations:</p><table class="simplelist" border="0" summary="Simple list"><tr><td>write</td></tr><tr><td>pwrite</td></tr><tr><td>read</td></tr><tr><td>pread</td></tr></table><p><code class="literal">vfs_smb_traffic_analyzer</code> sends the following data in a fixed format seperated by a comma through either an internet or a unix domain socket:</p><pre class="programlisting"> BYTES|USER|DOMAIN|READ/WRITE|SHARE|FILENAME|TIMESTAMP </pre><p>Description of the records: - </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">BYTES</code> - the length in bytes of the VFS operation</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">USER</code> - the user who initiated the operation</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">DOMAIN</code> - the domain of the user</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">READ/WRITE</code> - either "W" for a write operation or "R" for read</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">SHARE</code> - the name of the share on which the VFS operation occured</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">FILENAME</code> - the name of the file that was used by the VFS operation</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">TIMESTAMP</code> - a timestamp, formatted as "yyyy-mm-dd hh-mm-ss.ms" indicating when the VFS operation occured</p></li></ul></div><p> + </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">BYTES</code> - the length in bytes of the VFS operation</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">USER</code> - the user who initiated the operation</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">DOMAIN</code> - the domain of the user</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">READ/WRITE</code> - either "W" for a write operation or "R" for read</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">SHARE</code> - the name of the share on which the VFS operation occured</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">FILENAME</code> - the name of the file that was used by the VFS operation</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">TIMESTAMP</code> - a timestamp, formatted as "yyyy-mm-dd hh-mm-ss.ms" indicating when the VFS operation occured</p></li></ul></div><p> - </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489543"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">smb_traffic_analyzer:mode = STRING</span></dt><dd><p>If STRING matches to "unix_domain_socket", the module will + </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483551"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">smb_traffic_analyzer:mode = STRING</span></dt><dd><p>If STRING matches to "unix_domain_socket", the module will use a unix domain socket located at /var/tmp/stadsocket, if STRING contains an different string or is not defined, the module will use an internet domain socket for data transfer.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">smb_traffic_analyzer:host = STRING</span></dt><dd><p>The module will send the data to the system named with @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ smb_traffic_analyzer:anonymize_prefix, without generating an additional hash number. This means that any transfer data will be mapped to a single user, leading to a total - anonymization of user related data.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489634"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>The module running on share "example_share", using a unix domain socket</p><pre class="programlisting"> + anonymization of user related data.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483642"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><p>The module running on share "example_share", using a unix domain socket</p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[example_share]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /data/example</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = smb_traffic_analyzer</a> @@ -49,8 +49,8 @@ <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SMB_TRAFFIC_ANALYZER:HOST" target="_top">smb_traffic_analyzer:host = examplehost</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SMB_TRAFFIC_ANALYZER:PORT" target="_top">smb_traffic_analyzer:port = 3491</a> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SMB_TRAFFIC_ANALYZER:ANONYMIZE_PREFIX" target="_top">smb_traffic_analyzer:anonymize_prefix = User</a> - </pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487582"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.3 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487593"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481601"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3.3 of the Samba suite. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481612"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The original version of the VFS module and the diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_streams_depot.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_streams_depot.8.html index 96d8f88ef4..7301b34fad 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_streams_depot.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_streams_depot.8.html @@ -1,15 +1,15 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_streams_depot</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_streams_depot"><a name="vfs_streams_depot.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_streams_depot — EXPERIMENTAL module to store alternate data streams in a +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_streams_depot</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_streams_depot.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_streams_depot — EXPERIMENTAL module to store alternate data streams in a central directory. - </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = streams_depot</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528905"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This <span class="emphasis"><em>EXPERIMENTAL</em></span> VFS module is part of the + </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = streams_depot</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This <span class="emphasis"><em>EXPERIMENTAL</em></span> VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_streams_depot</code> enables storing of NTFS alternate data streams in the file system. As a normal posix file system does not support the concept of multiple data streams per file, the streams_depot module stores the data in files in a separate - directory.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2528940"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">streams_depot:directory = PATH</span></dt><dd><p>Path of the directory where the alternate data streams - should be stored. Defaults to the sharepath/.streams.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489328"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><pre class="programlisting"> + directory.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522951"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">streams_depot:directory = PATH</span></dt><dd><p>Path of the directory where the alternate data streams + should be stored. Defaults to the sharepath/.streams.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483349"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[share]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = streams_depot</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489354"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483376"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_streams_xattr.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_streams_xattr.8.html index ad9e452588..08de1a91f0 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_streams_xattr.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_streams_xattr.8.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_streams_xattr</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_streams_xattr"><a name="vfs_streams_xattr.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_streams_xattr — Store alternate data streams in posix xattrs</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = streams_xattr</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528904"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_streams_xattr</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_streams_xattr.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_streams_xattr — Store alternate data streams in posix xattrs</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = streams_xattr</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_streams_xattr</code> enables storing of NTFS alternate data streams in the file system. As a normal posix file system does not support the concept of multiple data streams per file, @@ -8,10 +8,10 @@ support xattrs.</p><p>Please note that most file systems have severe limitations on the size of xattrs. So this module might work for applications like IE that stores small zone information in streams but will fail for - applications that store serious amounts of data in ADSs.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLES"><a name="id2489314"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><pre class="programlisting"> + applications that store serious amounts of data in ADSs.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483335"></a><h2>EXAMPLES</h2><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[share]</code></em> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VFSOBJECTS" target="_top">vfs objects = streams_xattr</a> -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489339"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483361"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_xattr_tdb.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_xattr_tdb.8.html index 2e83a69525..d76bd56549 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_xattr_tdb.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfs_xattr_tdb.8.html @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_xattr_tdb</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfs_xattr_tdb"><a name="vfs_xattr_tdb.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_xattr_tdb — Save Extended Attributes (EAs) in a tdb file</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = xattr_tdb</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528904"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfs_xattr_tdb</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfs_xattr_tdb.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfs_xattr_tdb — Save Extended Attributes (EAs) in a tdb file</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfs objects = xattr_tdb</code></p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522915"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This VFS module is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">vfs_xattr_tdb</code> VFS module stores Extended Attributes (EAs) in a tdb file. This enables the usage of Extended Attributes on OS and filesystems which do not support Extended Attributes by themselves. - </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2528938"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">xattr_tdb:file = PATH</span></dt><dd><p>Name of the tdb file the EAs are stored in. + </p><p>This module is stackable.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522949"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">xattr_tdb:file = PATH</span></dt><dd><p>Name of the tdb file the EAs are stored in. If this option is not set, the default filename - <code class="filename">xattr.tdb</code> is used.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489327"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + <code class="filename">xattr.tdb</code> is used.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483350"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfstest.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfstest.1.html index b2a83fb533..3db40ddcec 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfstest.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/vfstest.1.html @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfstest</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="vfstest"><a name="vfstest.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfstest — tool for testing samba VFS modules </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfstest</code> [-d debuglevel] [-c command] [-l logdir] [-h]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528926"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">vfstest</code> is a small command line +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>vfstest</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="vfstest.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>vfstest — tool for testing samba VFS modules </p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">vfstest</code> [-d debuglevel] [-c command] [-l logdir] [-h]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522945"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">vfstest</code> is a small command line utility that has the ability to test dso samba VFS modules. It gives the user the ability to call the various VFS functions manually and supports cascaded VFS modules. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489323"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-c|--command=command</span></dt><dd><p>Execute the specified (colon-separated) commands. + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483340"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-c|--command=command</span></dt><dd><p>Execute the specified (colon-separated) commands. See below for the commands that are available. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-l|--logfile=logbasename</span></dt><dd><p>File name for log/debug files. The extension @@ -32,10 +32,10 @@ The default configuration file name is determined at compile time.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-l|--log-basename=logdirectory</span></dt><dd><p>Base directory name for log/debug files. The extension <code class="constant">".progname"</code> will be appended (e.g. log.smbclient, log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="COMMANDS"><a name="id2489704"></a><h2>COMMANDS</h2><p><span class="emphasis"><em>VFS COMMANDS</em></span></p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">load <module.so></code> - Load specified VFS module </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">populate <char> <size></code> - Populate a data buffer with the specified data - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">showdata [<offset> <len>]</code> - Show data currently in data buffer - </p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">connect</code> - VFS connect()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">disconnect</code> - VFS disconnect()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">disk_free</code> - VFS disk_free()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">opendir</code> - VFS opendir()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">readdir</code> - VFS readdir()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">mkdir</code> - VFS mkdir()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">rmdir</code> - VFS rmdir()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">closedir</code> - VFS closedir()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">open</code> - VFS open()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">close</code> - VFS close()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">read</code> - VFS read()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">write</code> - VFS write()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">lseek</code> - VFS lseek()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">rename</code> - VFS rename()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">fsync</code> - VFS fsync()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">stat</code> - VFS stat()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">fstat</code> - VFS fstat()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">lstat</code> - VFS lstat()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">unlink</code> - VFS unlink()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">chmod</code> - VFS chmod()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">fchmod</code> - VFS fchmod()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">chown</code> - VFS chown()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">fchown</code> - VFS fchown()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">chdir</code> - VFS chdir()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">getwd</code> - VFS getwd()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">utime</code> - VFS utime()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">ftruncate</code> - VFS ftruncate()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">lock</code> - VFS lock()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">symlink</code> - VFS symlink()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">readlink</code> - VFS readlink()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">link</code> - VFS link()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">mknod</code> - VFS mknod()</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">realpath</code> - VFS realpath()</p></li></ul></div><p><span class="emphasis"><em>GENERAL COMMANDS</em></span></p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">conf <smb.conf></code> - Load a different configuration file</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">help [<command>]</code> - Get list of commands or info about specified command</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">debuglevel <level></code> - Set debug level</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">freemem</code> - Free memory currently in use</p></li><li class="listitem"><p><code class="literal">exit</code> - Exit vfstest</p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2487782"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba - suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2487793"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483721"></a><h2>COMMANDS</h2><p><span class="emphasis"><em>VFS COMMANDS</em></span></p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">load <module.so></code> - Load specified VFS module </p></li><li><p><code class="literal">populate <char> <size></code> - Populate a data buffer with the specified data + </p></li><li><p><code class="literal">showdata [<offset> <len>]</code> - Show data currently in data buffer + </p></li><li><p><code class="literal">connect</code> - VFS connect()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">disconnect</code> - VFS disconnect()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">disk_free</code> - VFS disk_free()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">opendir</code> - VFS opendir()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">readdir</code> - VFS readdir()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">mkdir</code> - VFS mkdir()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">rmdir</code> - VFS rmdir()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">closedir</code> - VFS closedir()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">open</code> - VFS open()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">close</code> - VFS close()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">read</code> - VFS read()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">write</code> - VFS write()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">lseek</code> - VFS lseek()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">rename</code> - VFS rename()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">fsync</code> - VFS fsync()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">stat</code> - VFS stat()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">fstat</code> - VFS fstat()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">lstat</code> - VFS lstat()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">unlink</code> - VFS unlink()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">chmod</code> - VFS chmod()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">fchmod</code> - VFS fchmod()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">chown</code> - VFS chown()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">fchown</code> - VFS fchown()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">chdir</code> - VFS chdir()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">getwd</code> - VFS getwd()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">utime</code> - VFS utime()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">ftruncate</code> - VFS ftruncate()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">lock</code> - VFS lock()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">symlink</code> - VFS symlink()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">readlink</code> - VFS readlink()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">link</code> - VFS link()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">mknod</code> - VFS mknod()</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">realpath</code> - VFS realpath()</p></li></ul></div><p><span class="emphasis"><em>GENERAL COMMANDS</em></span></p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="literal">conf <smb.conf></code> - Load a different configuration file</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">help [<command>]</code> - Get list of commands or info about specified command</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">debuglevel <level></code> - Set debug level</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">freemem</code> - Free memory currently in use</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">exit</code> - Exit vfstest</p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481803"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba + suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481814"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p>The vfstest man page was written by Jelmer Vernooij.</p></div></div></body></html> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/wbinfo.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/wbinfo.1.html index a2dddbdd77..e07b7aee90 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/wbinfo.1.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/wbinfo.1.html @@ -1,9 +1,9 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>wbinfo</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="wbinfo"><a name="wbinfo.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>wbinfo — Query information from winbind daemon</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">wbinfo</code> [-a user%password] [--all-domains] [--allocate-gid] [--allocate-uid] [-D domain] [--domain domain] [-g] [--getdcname domain] [--get-auth-user] [-G gid] [-h] [-i user] [-I ip] [-K user%password] [-m] [-n name] [-N netbios-name] [--own-domain] [-p] [-r user] [--remove-uid-mapping uid,sid] [--remove-gid-mapping gid,sid] [-s sid] [--separator] [--sequence] [--set-auth-user user%password] [--set-uid-mapping uid,sid] [--set-gid-mapping gid,sid] [-S sid] [-t] [-u] [--uid-info uid] [--user-domgroups sid] [--user-sids sid] [-U uid] [-V] [-Y sid] [--verbose]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489842"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">wbinfo</code> program queries and returns information +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>wbinfo</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="wbinfo.1"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>wbinfo — Query information from winbind daemon</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">wbinfo</code> [-a user%password] [--all-domains] [--allocate-gid] [--allocate-uid] [-D domain] [--domain domain] [-g] [--getdcname domain] [--get-auth-user] [-G gid] [-h] [-i user] [-I ip] [-K user%password] [-m] [-n name] [-N netbios-name] [--own-domain] [-p] [-r user] [--remove-uid-mapping uid,sid] [--remove-gid-mapping gid,sid] [-s sid] [--separator] [--sequence] [--set-auth-user user%password] [--set-uid-mapping uid,sid] [--set-gid-mapping gid,sid] [-S sid] [-t] [-u] [--uid-info uid] [--user-domgroups sid] [--user-sids sid] [-U uid] [-V] [-Y sid] [--verbose]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483696"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This tool is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p>The <code class="literal">wbinfo</code> program queries and returns information created and used by the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon. </p><p>The <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon must be configured and running for the <code class="literal">wbinfo</code> program to be able - to return information.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2489897"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-a|--authenticate <em class="replaceable"><code>username%password</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>Attempt to authenticate a user via <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a>. + to return information.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483752"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-a|--authenticate <em class="replaceable"><code>username%password</code></em></span></dt><dd><p>Attempt to authenticate a user via <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a>. This checks both authentication methods and reports its results. - </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Do not be tempted to use this + </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Do not be tempted to use this functionality for authentication in third-party applications. Instead use <a class="citerefentry" href="ntlm_auth.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">ntlm_auth</span>(1)</span></a>.</p></div></dd><dt><span class="term">--allocate-gid</span></dt><dd><p>Get a new GID out of idmap </p></dd><dt><span class="term">--allocate-uid</span></dt><dd><p>Get a new UID out of idmap @@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ mapping in the IDmap backend.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">--set-gid-mapping gid,sid</span></dt><dd><p>Create a new or modify an existing gid to sid mapping in the IDmap backend.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">-V|--version</span></dt><dd><p>Prints the program version number. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">-h|--help</span></dt><dd><p>Print a summary of command line options. -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXIT STATUS"><a name="id2538616"></a><h2>EXIT STATUS</h2><p>The wbinfo program returns 0 if the operation +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532629"></a><h2>EXIT STATUS</h2><p>The wbinfo program returns 0 if the operation succeeded, or 1 if the operation failed. If the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon is not working <code class="literal">wbinfo</code> will always return - failure. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2538642"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2538652"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="ntlm_auth.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">ntlm_auth</span>(1)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2538675"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + failure. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532654"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532665"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="ntlm_auth.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">ntlm_auth</span>(1)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532688"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p><code class="literal">wbinfo</code> and <code class="literal">winbindd</code> diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbind_krb5_locator.7.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbind_krb5_locator.7.html index 022b77c1b3..a1833202c2 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbind_krb5_locator.7.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbind_krb5_locator.7.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>winbind_krb5_locator</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="winbind_krb5_locator"><a name="winbind_krb5_locator.7"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>winbind_krb5_locator — A plugin for MIT and Heimdal Kerberos for detecting KDCs using Windows semantics.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2528887"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>winbind_krb5_locator</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="winbind_krb5_locator.7"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>winbind_krb5_locator — A plugin for MIT and Heimdal Kerberos for detecting KDCs using Windows semantics.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522895"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p> This plugin is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite. </p><p> <code class="literal">winbind_krb5_locator</code> is a plugin that permits MIT and @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ of closest dc. The plugin uses the public locator API provided by most modern Kerberos implementations. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="PREREQUISITES"><a name="id2528919"></a><h2>PREREQUISITES</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522928"></a><h2>PREREQUISITES</h2><p> MIT Kerberos (at least version 1.5) or Heimdal Kerberos (at least version 1.0) is required. </p><p> @@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ Users should be able to kinit into their kerberized Windows environment without any modification or servers being put manually into <code class="filename">/etc/krb5.conf</code>. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2489353"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483376"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p> This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2489364"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483387"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html index 3bba193e49..3ac65897cc 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/winbindd.8.html @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>winbindd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.75.2"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" title="winbindd"><a name="winbindd.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>winbindd — Name Service Switch daemon for resolving names - from NT servers</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv" title="Synopsis"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">winbindd</code> [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-Y] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-n]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="DESCRIPTION"><a name="id2489326"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This program is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">winbindd</code> is a daemon that provides +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>winbindd</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="winbindd.8"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>winbindd — Name Service Switch daemon for resolving names + from NT servers</p></div><div class="refsynopsisdiv"><h2>Synopsis</h2><div class="cmdsynopsis"><p><code class="literal">winbindd</code> [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-Y] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-n]</p></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483342"></a><h2>DESCRIPTION</h2><p>This program is part of the <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a> suite.</p><p><code class="literal">winbindd</code> is a daemon that provides a number of services to the Name Service Switch capability found in most modern C libraries, to arbitrary applications via PAM and <code class="literal">ntlm_auth</code> and to Samba itself.</p><p>Even if winbind is not used for nsswitch, it still provides a @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ parameters are not required. (This is known as `netlogon proxy only mode'.)</p><p> The Name Service Switch allows user and system information to be obtained from different databases services such as NIS or DNS. The exact behaviour can be configured - throught the <code class="filename">/etc/nsswitch.conf</code> file. + through the <code class="filename">/etc/nsswitch.conf</code> file. Users and groups are allocated as they are resolved to a range of user and group ids specified by the administrator of the Samba system.</p><p>The service provided by <code class="literal">winbindd</code> is called `winbind' and @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ hosts: files dns wins resolve hostnames from <code class="filename">/etc/hosts</code> and then from the WINS server.</p><pre class="programlisting"> hosts: files wins -</pre></div><div class="refsect1" title="OPTIONS"><a name="id2487530"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-F</span></dt><dd><p>If specified, this parameter causes +</pre></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481549"></a><h2>OPTIONS</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">-F</span></dt><dd><p>If specified, this parameter causes the main <code class="literal">winbindd</code> process to not daemonize, i.e. double-fork and disassociate with the terminal. Child processes are still created as normal to service @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. as a single process (the mode of operation in Samba 2.2). Winbindd's default behavior is to launch a child process that is responsible for updating expired cache entries. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="NAME AND ID RESOLUTION"><a name="id2487789"></a><h2>NAME AND ID RESOLUTION</h2><p>Users and groups on a Windows NT server are assigned + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481808"></a><h2>NAME AND ID RESOLUTION</h2><p>Users and groups on a Windows NT server are assigned a security id (SID) which is globally unique when the user or group is created. To convert the Windows NT user or group into a unix user or group, a mapping between SIDs and unix user @@ -127,24 +127,24 @@ log.smbd, etc...). The log file is never removed by the client. where the user and group mappings are stored by winbindd. If this store is deleted or corrupted, there is no way for winbindd to determine which user and group ids correspond to Windows NT user - and group rids. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="CONFIGURATION"><a name="id2487827"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p>Configuration of the <code class="literal">winbindd</code> daemon + and group rids. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481846"></a><h2>CONFIGURATION</h2><p>Configuration of the <code class="literal">winbindd</code> daemon is done through configuration parameters in the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> file. All parameters should be specified in the - [global] section of smb.conf. </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul class="itemizedlist" type="disc"><li class="listitem"><p> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDSEPARATOR" target="_top">winbind separator</a></p></li><li class="listitem"><p> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPUID" target="_top">idmap uid</a></p></li><li class="listitem"><p> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPGID" target="_top">idmap gid</a></p></li><li class="listitem"><p> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND" target="_top">idmap backend</a></p></li><li class="listitem"><p> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDCACHETIME" target="_top">winbind cache time</a></p></li><li class="listitem"><p> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDENUMUSERS" target="_top">winbind enum users</a></p></li><li class="listitem"><p> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDENUMGROUPS" target="_top">winbind enum groups</a></p></li><li class="listitem"><p> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#TEMPLATEHOMEDIR" target="_top">template homedir</a></p></li><li class="listitem"><p> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#TEMPLATESHELL" target="_top">template shell</a></p></li><li class="listitem"><p> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN" target="_top">winbind use default domain</a></p></li><li class="listitem"><p> + [global] section of smb.conf. </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDSEPARATOR" target="_top">winbind separator</a></p></li><li><p> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPUID" target="_top">idmap uid</a></p></li><li><p> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPGID" target="_top">idmap gid</a></p></li><li><p> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND" target="_top">idmap backend</a></p></li><li><p> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDCACHETIME" target="_top">winbind cache time</a></p></li><li><p> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDENUMUSERS" target="_top">winbind enum users</a></p></li><li><p> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDENUMGROUPS" target="_top">winbind enum groups</a></p></li><li><p> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#TEMPLATEHOMEDIR" target="_top">template homedir</a></p></li><li><p> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#TEMPLATESHELL" target="_top">template shell</a></p></li><li><p> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN" target="_top">winbind use default domain</a></p></li><li><p> <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBIND:RPCONLY" target="_top">winbind: rpc only</a> Setting this parameter forces winbindd to use RPC instead of LDAP to retrieve information from Domain Controllers. - </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="EXAMPLE SETUP"><a name="id2538486"></a><h2>EXAMPLE SETUP</h2><p> + </p></li></ul></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532502"></a><h2>EXAMPLE SETUP</h2><p> To setup winbindd for user and group lookups plus authentication from a domain controller use something like the following setup. This was tested on an early Red Hat Linux box. @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ auth sufficient /lib/security/pam_winbind.so auth required /lib/security/pam_unix.so \ use_first_pass shadow nullok </pre><p> - </p><div class="note" title="Note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> + </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> The PAM module pam_unix has recently replaced the module pam_pwdb. Some Linux systems use the module pam_unix2 in place of pam_unix. </p></div><p>Note in particular the use of the <em class="parameter"><code>sufficient @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_unix.so \ and that you can login to your unix box as a domain user, using the DOMAIN+user syntax for the username. You may wish to use the commands <code class="literal">getent passwd</code> and <code class="literal">getent group - </code> to confirm the correct operation of winbindd.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="NOTES"><a name="id2538677"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>The following notes are useful when configuring and + </code> to confirm the correct operation of winbindd.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532693"></a><h2>NOTES</h2><p>The following notes are useful when configuring and running <code class="literal">winbindd</code>: </p><p><a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> must be running on the local machine for <code class="literal">winbindd</code> to work. </p><p>PAM is really easy to misconfigure. Make sure you know what you are doing when modifying PAM configuration files. It is possible @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_unix.so \ then in general the user and groups ids allocated by winbindd will not be the same. The user and group ids will only be valid for the local machine, unless a shared <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND" target="_top">idmap backend</a> is configured.</p><p>If the the Windows NT SID to UNIX user and group id mapping - file is damaged or destroyed then the mappings will be lost. </p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SIGNALS"><a name="id2538742"></a><h2>SIGNALS</h2><p>The following signals can be used to manipulate the + file is damaged or destroyed then the mappings will be lost. </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532758"></a><h2>SIGNALS</h2><p>The following signals can be used to manipulate the <code class="literal">winbindd</code> daemon. </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">SIGHUP</span></dt><dd><p>Reload the <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a> file and apply any parameter changes to the running version of winbindd. This signal also clears any cached @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_unix.so \ by winbindd is also reloaded. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">SIGUSR2</span></dt><dd><p>The SIGUSR2 signal will cause <code class="literal"> winbindd</code> to write status information to the winbind log file.</p><p>Log files are stored in the filename specified by the - log file parameter.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="FILES"><a name="id2538805"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/nsswitch.conf(5)</code></span></dt><dd><p>Name service switch configuration file.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">/tmp/.winbindd/pipe</span></dt><dd><p>The UNIX pipe over which clients communicate with + log file parameter.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532821"></a><h2>FILES</h2><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">/etc/nsswitch.conf(5)</code></span></dt><dd><p>Name service switch configuration file.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">/tmp/.winbindd/pipe</span></dt><dd><p>The UNIX pipe over which clients communicate with the <code class="literal">winbindd</code> program. For security reasons, the winbind client will only attempt to connect to the winbindd daemon if both the <code class="filename">/tmp/.winbindd</code> directory @@ -232,8 +232,8 @@ auth required /lib/security/pam_unix.so \ compiled using the <em class="parameter"><code>--with-lockdir</code></em> option. This directory is by default <code class="filename">/usr/local/samba/var/locks </code>. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">$LOCKDIR/winbindd_cache.tdb</span></dt><dd><p>Storage for cached user and group information. - </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" title="VERSION"><a name="id2538950"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of - the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" title="SEE ALSO"><a name="id2538961"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><code class="filename">nsswitch.conf(5)</code>, <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="wbinfo.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">wbinfo</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="ntlm_auth.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">ntlm_auth</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="pam_winbind.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">pam_winbind</span>(8)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" title="AUTHOR"><a name="id2539017"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities + </p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532966"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of + the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532977"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p><code class="filename">nsswitch.conf(5)</code>, <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="wbinfo.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">wbinfo</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="ntlm_auth.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">ntlm_auth</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smb.conf.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smb.conf</span>(5)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="pam_winbind.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">pam_winbind</span>(8)</span></a></p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2533033"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p>The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</p><p><code class="literal">wbinfo</code> and <code class="literal">winbindd</code> were |